=a
AK
^<
) ANALYTICAL AND PRACTICAL
GRAMMAR
il
OF THK
}l
I f
J)
ENG^^H LAMUAGE. >^
4
BY REV. PETER BULLION, D. D.
REVISED RV
^Itev.fJ. CRAVEN, D.D,
^ KALEIGH :
PUBLISHED BY THE N. C. CHRISTIAN ADVOCATE
PUBUSHINQ COMPA]^y.
1S64.
Ic!,.v
P^'
-'^
ik
T^U
TI
R
\) J\^''i
THE ETHEL CARR PEACOCK
MEMORIAL COLLECTION
Main's amori monumentum
TRINITY COLLEGE LIBRARY
DURHAM, N. C.
1903
Gift of Dr. and Mrs. Drcd Peacock
f •..
Tk..
DUi
1903
Gift of Dr. and Mrs. Dred Pc^
AX
ANALYTICAL AND PRACTICAL
11
GRAMMAR
OF THE!
ENGL.18II LANGUAGE.
Ry Rev. PETER BUI.LIONS, D. R.
REVISED BY
Rev. B. CRAVEX, D. D,
S
RALEIGH, N. C.
rUGLTSHED BY THE N. C. CHRISTIAN ADVOCATE
^ PUBLISHING COMPANY.
^ 1864.
ra:H'=r
fti'rqnri -^y-^r einT
^eiljoS ?.'/■ J of tff jiiorft
(siift'jorfaB
;::;r; ,i..y;r:i».r rf-v 'iii^ ;:• ; - 'iuJafffl^ no •'
7/T; i.'f -ft. ; ly tij.'^ iV'j': r.: ! . /
^^\i:;xirJi
,^AV
GRAMMAR
"t:^l3^4&iiA^4& fe(!)tii> sCiliNCt and'ai? A^ "^ f]
2. 4-S; a-j scjENCE; it investigates the priiici'gtos*'of lan-
guage in general :*as tin art, it teaches the right method
of applying these principles to a prtrticular hmgnage, so
•as thereby, to express our thoughts in a com-ect and proper
manner^ xt eCicyjcUjig to. .Q^JjibliBh^ed. usage^
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
3; English -Grammar IB the' art 'of speaking a-iid Nvrit-
ing the English language with propriety.
4. Language is either spoken or written.
5. The elements of spoken language, are vocal and articulate
souads... - - .^'^r.:r 9fif :i.l v^codjcqi-i'i A
C. The elements of written language, are characlei^' oi' 'kacrs
which represent these sounds.
7. Letters are formed into i-yllables and words . words into sen-
tences ; and by these, properly uttered or written, mcii communi-
cate their, 'houghts to eaeh other.
8. G|iAM$j^ is divided into four parts; namely, Or-
thography, which treats of letters ) Etymology, ol\\ ox (\^ ;
Syntax, Qi-:ti^i^nQ^'^^r\d,{Bro&)dy, of^locution -and vcr-
r^itication,''' ■ rov .■■• -ciAi-n --A ■■■/.rA '-fl',. . .,- I,-...',-.
EXG-LI6H GRAMMAE.
PARTI.
OBTIIOtfEAPitt;
ORTHOGRArHY teachcs the rature and powers of Let-
ters, and the correct method of spelling words.
A Letter is a cimriictor represeating a particular sound of
tlie Ijuman voice. ' -
' There are 2f?0(?ft/y-5/x letters in tlic Kn^^lish Alphabet.
* Lot tors' are either Vowels or Consdnants. ' '■-
A ' VoWfe?] is ti' letter which' repffesents a simple iimHiculdLtc
Boufid:aiid in a' word or syllable may be sounded alone. They
arc a, e, i, o, u, and to and y. not beginning a syllable.
A Cons^onant is a letter which represents an ariictUaie sound:
and in a word or syllable is never sounded alone, but always in
connection witli a vowel. They are b, c, d,f, ff, hj, k, I, m, n,
p, q, r, s, t, V, X, z, and w and y beginning a sylbible.
A Diphthong is the onion '(^" two vowels in one sound. Thcy
arc of two kinds, proper and improper.
A Proper Diphthong is one in which both the /VOwcls are
sounded, as cum out; oiin oil ; oiv in cou\
An Lnpropsr Diphthong or digraph is one in which only one
of the vOwjbIs is. sounded, as ou in court; oa in mat.
A Triphthong is Ihe union of three vowels in one sound as eau
. ■■■■.■■.)■• ') .*">iij '•vyyj . :■■ • ■;_■': •
THE POWERS OF, l4ET!]p;E]?.,S. .,, ^.^.^.j .;
Ill analyzing words into t^eir elenrentiary BOiancls,''iV^ neces-
sary to distinguish between the name of ia'le tier audits jjomnc;-.
■^ The name of a letter ia that by whioh it is nsnally called ; as A,
hp', sc, de, &'c. ■ -' ■ '^^' '*' ^-' '' "'''' . /• ^ '•
Thej^owgy of ftVelter i'8 the.effe^t which it hfaft; elitk^ by itself
or combined with other letters, in forming a word or syllable.
ORTHOaRAPHr,
sPEi^ma.
Spelling is the art of expressing a word by its prop^
er letters, and rightly ^iividing it into syllables.
The OrthDgraphy of the EngHah language is so anomaious*
and in many cases arbitrary, that proficiency in it can be acquir-
rd only by practice and the use of the Spelling book or Dictiona-
ry.— The following rules are of a general character, though even
to these there may be a few exceptions,
RULES rOR SPELLING WORDS.
EuLE 1. MoDo^syilablos and words accented on the
last Bj'Uable, ending with a single consonant preceded
by a short vowel, double that consonant before aa ad-
ditional syllabic beginning with a vowel; as, rob^ ruh
bcr ; admit, admittance^ admitttd. Es^cept 5; and 7f, which
are never doubled, ,■o^ ,,^Vxv/.y^.ri .o ■y:l^i^^y^\
But when a diphthong- precedes, or the accent is no*
on the last syllable, the consaiiant is not doubled u^
boil^ boiling, boiler ; ^;?'^^V, visited. «
EuLE 2. Words ending with II generally drop one I
before the tcrmintitions ness^ less, (y, arid fxdl; hu^^/ul
ncss,s7ciUess,/u^^i/,sk'7/td. ■'' - -^^ ,^'0 '
EuLE 3. Words ending m ^"prececieciB^ a cor/so)§ar.t
change^ into i before an additional letter or' syfla^^le ;
a;^, .<:p^, spies ; happ?/. happier, happiest; carry, carr^er^ car-
ried; fanvy^ fanciful. , ^^ ,, , ; ,., .',u/.\ ,.r V . /
Exception 1. EatVv'ia' not' cliahged before ing ; as,
deny, denying. . .,,••. ., ., .,,,,,,,,,-, ^,.. ^
Exception 2. v^ords cndiug i,iL,^ pi^eceded by a vow-
el, retain the y unchanged ; ns, hoy. bo^/s^ hoyiah, boyhood.
Exceptions. Lay, pay, sa3% make, laid, paid, said.
Other rules for' spelling, are, encumbered with so many ex-
ceptious a^ to render them nearly useless. They are therefore
omitted.
8 - SNGLISH GRAMMAR.
PART II.
ETTMOLOGY.
10. EtymolooT treats of the different sorts of xv'oi'Js,
. ■ ■ 1 . ' - • ■ • ■ ..•'■■'-'--. J' i
their various modification?, and their derivations. ,
WbEDS.
''■- il, A -Word is an articnkte sound used by common
consent HS the sign of an idea.
12. Wonls, in respect to their Forynation, aro either
Primitive OT Derivaiive, Simjole or Compound. -" ■ '
13. A Primitive word is one that is not derived, from an^y^^ther
word in tbe language; as, bey, Just, father. :'■ aiKOl crlt .q^-
14. A Derivative word is one that is- dc?i\red'-from i'oaie 'otlier
word; a?, boyish, justice, fatherly. [■/:?.\:ic'- ' .''' Jj-^.
15. A >Sj7n;j^e word is one that is not combined iWltiLjafl^^ptjJfer
■word; as, man, house, cify. ..,'•.'.,
16..A Compound wQvd is one that is^madeupof twioormpr^^ple
-wovds ; AS, manhood, hprseman. ... . ~ .. - .
17.' Words, in respect of JPbm,ai^ either' l)e€ltmihWx)r
Indeclinable. . ;^^ . ,.. .u-
18. A Dedipabl^ word is one which un(iei!goe^cc'rto.in-ch(i|)ge8
'otfdrm 'orYermihaHd'tht'io expreiis the different rciiitions'^rgen-'
der, number, case, person, &g., usually termed in 'Grn.mmar
Accidents ; as, 77i£rM, men ; love, loves, hvecL '''^'^■
•'19. fn the changes which they undergo, Nouna artd Prioiiotios
are^^said to he^declmed, Vierbs, to be inflected. •' ^ ■-" -
-^' 20iAri' Indwell hahlevHyrd. is one which undergoes tfo'c^Vanj^o of
'p>tta\ SkB, good, some, perlt'<ips. "'•
ETYMOLOGY — WORDS 9
21. In respect oi Signification and Use, worJs are divi-
ded inio diflferent classes, called Parts of Speech.
22. Parsing is the art of resolving a sentence intc its el-
emenis or parts of speech ; stating the accidents or giarn-
maiical properties of each word, and pointing out its re-
lation to other words with which it is connected.
23; Parsing is distinguislied into Etymological and Syntactical.
24. Avfovd is I'urecilEtymologically by stating the class of
words to which it belongs, with its accide7Us or grammatical
properties.
25, A word is parsed Sij ntacticnl/ 1/ hy staWng, in'additioii, the
relation in which it stands to other words, and the rules accord-
ing to which they are combined, in phrases and sentences.
2^, These two, though related, are perfectly distinct, and should not
be mixed up in the early part of the student's course, by anticipating at
the outset what he can be supposed to know, onl^' at a more advanced
stage. Such a course may seem to bo more intellectual, but its tendency
is only to perplex and darken the subject. Let the student learn one
thing ata time, each thing thoroughly in itsproper order, and continue
to combine things learned, as far as it can be d' ne without anticipating
what is future. In this way the process will be simple and eaf y ; every
step will be taken in the light, and when completed, the result will be
satisfactory. Besides, the student must be able to parse etymologically
with great ease and promptness', before he can Avith any advantage be-
gin the study of syntax. This promptness he will acquire in a very short
time, and almost without effort, if the class is properly drilled on the ex-
eroises furnished at every step in the following pages.
QLESTIONS.
What is Grammar ? What does it do as a Science ' What
does it do as an Ar« 1 What is English Grammar ? Into how
many parts is Grammar divided ? Of what does each part treat 1
Of what does Etymology treat 1 What is a word 1 How many
kindsof words in respect of formation ? What is Parsing? How
many kinds of parsing '? Repeat the substance of the 2Gth sec^
tion.
u
10 EXGLISH GRAMMAR.
PARTS OF SPEECH.
28. The Parts OF Spfech in English are nine: viz. Noun^
Article, Adjective, Pfonoun, Verh^ Adverb, Preposition, In-
terjection,-Aud Conjunction.
29. Of these, the Noun, Pronoun, and Verb, are declin-
ed*3 the rest are indeclinable.
NOUNb.
Oi
>0. A Noun is the name of any person, place, or thing ;
aa, John, London, book. Hence,
The names of persons, places, or tUngs, are Nouns.
31. Nouns are of two kinds, Proper and Common.
82. A Proper Noun is the name applied to an individual
only ; as, John, London, America, the Ohio.
33. A Common Noun is a name applied to all things of
the same sort ; as, man, chair, table, book.
OBSERVATIONS ON NOUNS.
34. When a proper noun is used to denote a whole class, it be-
comes common, and generally has an article before it; as, "The
t^relve Ccesars," " He is the Ckero of his Jige," " A Daniel come to
judgment."
35. Common nouns become proper when personified, and a^s^
when used as proper names; us, Hail, Liberty! The Park,
30. Under common nouns are usually ranked —
1. Collective nouns, or nouns ot multitude, which signify many
in the singular number ; as, army, people.
2. Abstract nouns, or names of qualities . as, 'picty, wickedness.
o. Verbal nouns, or the names of actions. &c. , as, reading,
writing, sleeping.
4. Diminutive nouns, or nouns derived from other nouns, and
denoting a small one of the kind ; as, stream, streamlet',
leaf, leaflet : liHl, hillock, &c. ,
ETy:.I0LOGY— NOUKS. ll
37. To iho class of nouns belongs everything, wlitther word, leU«r,
mark, or character, of w'aieh vya c{iu thiafe, speak, or write, regarded
merely as an object of thougli , even wiieo. as sometimes happens, we do
not give itanaxe. Thus M'hfn w*. say, *'Good" is aa adjective, a is 8
vowel, 6 id a consonant, A is a capita- 4 is an even number, i is a frac-
tion, ? is a mark of interrogation— C'oorf, a, 6,^,4, i,*?, are all to be re-
garded as n('ung.
S**. Remark — A noun is also called ^ suhatantive But this term for
convenience is hp^re ns^d in a m( re comprehensive sense, to mean nount,
personal pronouns, or phrases used as noUQS, and usually called '' iub-
. stantive i hrases." Thus in su^u a rule as this, "An adjective agrees
with a substantive," <fcc , the word substantive may meaa either a noan,
or pronoun, or substantive phrase.
EXERCISES,
1. In the following list distinguish proper nouns from commoa, and
give a reason for the distincli i > : —
Albany, city, tree, natioii,France, Phillip, dog, horse,
house, garden, Dublin, Edinburarh. London, river, Hud-
eon, Ohio, Thames, countries, America; England, Ire-
land, Spain, sun. ,
2. In the following sentences point out the nouns. Say why they aro
nouns ; tell whether they aro proper or common, and why. Th'is : " Ta
bJe" a noun, bccaujo thena"ao of a tniog; c-mmon, because applied to
all things of the sam^ port.
The table and chairs in this room belong to John ; the
book-case,\vriting-desk,and books, to his brother. Time
and tide wait for no miiu.
3. Writ9 a short true sentence with each of the following words;
Man, pen, Confederacy, tree, June, fish, religion, heav-
en, riches, rair..
QUESTIONS.
How many parts of spcrcii ? Name them. Namo th'ise that
are declinable, rsame the indeclinable. What is a noun"?
iJuw many kinds of nouns? What is a proper 'H.un ? What
is a common noun ? Wiien does a proper noun bt'(3«>me com-
mon ? What is a collective noun '^ An alstvact i f un ? A ver-
bal uonn? A diminutive noun ? What other things luuy be
regurdcd as nouns "?
12 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN.
39. To novins belong Person^ Gender^ Number, and
Case.
1\,,7E.— These properties belong also to personal and relative
pronouns.
PERSON.
40. Person, in Grammar, is the distinction of nouns
as used in discourse, to denote the speaker, the person
or thing spoken to, or the person or thing spoken of.—
Hence,
41. rhere are three persons, called Firsts Second and Third.
42. A noun is in the first person, when it denotes ihe speak-
er; as,*' I, Pauf, have wriiten ii."
43. A noun is in the second person, when it denotes the per-
son or thing addressed; as. " Thou, God, seest me."— " HaiJ,
Liberty ! "
44. A noun is in the third person, when it denotes tlio person
or tiling spoken of; as,^* Washhiffion waahrave,"--" TruiJiis
mighty."
45. Remark. — The third person is used som'^times for tbe/r»<; as,
«•' Thy 8en;aHt bfcaine surety for the lad to my father." Gen. xliv.
32 SometimeF,particularly in the language of supplioation, for the sec-
ond; 3.8, " 0 let not the Lord be angry." Gtn. xviii. 80. "Will the
Lord bless us ! "
OBSERVATIONS OX PERSON.
46. The first and the second person can belong only tonouns
denoting persons, or things personified ; because persons only
can speak or be spoken to. The third person may belong to all
nouns.
47. A noun can be the subject of a verb only in the third
person A noun in the Jirst or second person is never used as
the subject of a verb, but only in apposition with the first or
Ipecond personal pronoun, for the sake of explanation oreniph^v
ETYMOLOGY — GENDER. 13
fiis ; and sometimes in the second person, without the pronoun,,
as the object addressed, T
QUESTIONS.
What is person ? How many persons ? What does each per-
son denote '! How can you ascertain the person of a noun ? Is
the third person ever used for the first ? When can nouns be
in the first or second persons ? When a noun is the subject
of ft verb, in what person must it be ?
GENDEFt.
48. Gender is the distinction of nouns -with regard
to sex.
49. There arc three genders, Masculine, Feminine^
and Neuter.
50. Nouns denoting males are Masculine; as, man,
boy.
51. Nouns denoting females are Feminine; as, wo-
man, girl.
52. Nouns denoting neither males nor females, i. e.,
things without sex, are Neuter ; as, house, hook, tree.
•53. Nouns which denote either raa!es or females, such as^a-
rent, neighbor, friend, kc, are sometimes, for the sake of conve-
nience, said to be of the Common Gender^ i. e., either masculine
or feminine.
54. There arc three ways of didiaguiahing'the sexes.
1. Bv different words; as,
Masculine.
Feminine.
Masculine,
Feminine.
Batchelor
maid
Horse
mare
Beau
belle
Husband
wife
Boy
girl
King
queen
Brother
sister
Lord
lady
BucH
doe
^l?vn
wQroan
4
14
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Masculine!.
Feminine.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Bull
cow
Master
mistress
Drake
duck
Nephew
niece
Earl
countess
Ram, buck
ewe
Father
mother
Son
daughter
Friar
nun
Stag
hind
Gander
gooBe
Uncle
aunt
Hart
roe
Wizard
witch
2. By a difference of tormmation ; as,
Masculine.
Femini7ic.
Masculine.
Femiriine.
Abbot
abbess
Landgrave
landgravine
Actor
actress
Lion
lioness
Administrator
ad Jiinistratrix
Marquis
marchioness
Adulterer
adulteress
Mayor
mayoress
Ambassador
ambassadress
Patron
p'troness
Arbiter
arbitress
Peer
peeress
Author
authoress
Poet
poetess
Baron
baroness
Prle^it
priestess
Bridegroom
bride
Princo
princess
Benefactor
benefiictress
Pricr
prioress
Count
countess
Prophet
prophetess
Deacon
deanoness
Protector
protectress
Duke
duchess
Sh^y-iiord
shepherdess
Elector
electrcss
Songster
bongstress
Emperor
empress
Sorcerer
sorcerer
Enchanter
enchantress
Suilaa
( sultana.or sul
I taness
Executor
executrix.
Governor
governess
Tiger
tigress
Heir
heiress
Traitor
traitress
Hero
heroine
Tutor
tutoress
Hunter
hunhcss
Viscount
viscountess
Host
hostess
Votary
votaress
Jew
jowess
Widower
widow
3. By
prefixing a distinguishing word ; as,
Masculine.
Feminine.
• Sparrow.
A cock
'iparrow.
A he^i sparrow.
Goat.
A he goat.
A she goat.
Servant.
A man
Fprvant,
A maid servant.
' Child.
A wiaZe child.
A female child.
Desccpdants. Male deecendante
Fma(edes«?endant8
ETYMOLOGY — GENDER. l5
OBSERVATIONS ON GENDER.
55. Many mascaliao nouns have no corresponding feminine;
as, baher, brewer, &c. : and some feminine nouns have no corres-
ponding masculine; as, laundress, seamstress, &.c.
56. Some nouns naturally neuter, are often, by a figure of
speech, converted into the masculine or feminine; as, when we
say of the sun, " He is setting;" of the moon, " She is
eclipsgd;" or of a ship, " She sails.'*
57. In speaking of animals whose sex is not known to U6, or not re-
garded, we assign the masculine gender to those distinguished for bold-
ness, fidelity, generosity, size, strergth, &,c., as the dog, the horse, the
elephant. On the other hand, we assign the feminine gender to animals
characterized by weakness and timidity ; as, the hare, the cat.
68. In speaking of animals, particularly those of inferior size, we fre-
quently consider them without sex, or of the neuter gender. Thus, of
an infant, we say, "It is a lovely creature "
59. When the male and female is expressed by distinct terms; as.
shepherd, shepherdess, the masculine term has sometimes also a gen-
eral meaning, expressing both male and female, and is always to be
used when the oflBce, profession, occupation, Ac, and not the sex of
the individual, is chiefly to be expressed. The feminine term is used
only when the discrimination of sex is necessary. Thus, when it is
said, " the Poets of jthis country are distinguished for correctness
of taste," the term "Poet" clearly includes hothmale and yema^ wri-
ters of poetry. But, "the best Poetess of the age," would be said
when speaking only of females.
60. Collective nouns, when the reference is to the aggregate
as to one whole, or when they are in the plural number, are
to be considered as neuter; but when the reference is to the ob-
jects composing the collection as individuals, they take the gen-
der of the individuals referred to.
EXERCISES.
1. What is the feminine of — Father, prince, king, mas-
ter, actor, friar, priest, heir, hero, Jew, host, hunter,
sultan, executor, horse?
2. What is the masculine of — Lady, woman, girl, niece,
nun, aunt, sister, mother, shepherdess, songstress, wid-
ow?
1^' ENGLISH GEAMMAK.
3. Tell of what gender the following nouns tire, and why :
Man,, horse, tree, field, father, house, mother, queen,
count, lady, king, prince, castle, tower, river, stone,
hen, goose.
4. Write a sentenca on each of the pracading words.
QLESTIONS,
What is Gender ? How many genders ? What does each
denote? What is. meant by C(>mrfton gender? How many,
Hud what are the different ways of distinguishing the gexl —
Mention some masculine nouns that have no feminine. What
gender is assigned to animals* of inferior size 1 What gfenera{
meaning do masculine terms sometimes have ^ When are col-
lective nouns regarded as neuter ?
NUMBER,
61. I^UMBER is that property of a noun by which it
expresses one, or more than one.
62. Nouns have two numbers, the Singular and the
PluraL The singular denotes one; Rf^y book, tree : ihei
plural, more than one ; as, books, trees,
GENERAL RULE.
63. The plural is commonly formed by adding s to
the singular; a?*, booh^ books.
SPECIAL KULKS.
04. liuLE 1. — Nouns ending in s, sh, ch, soft, z, x, or
0, form the plural by adding es ; txaMiss, 3fisses ; brush,
brushes ; match, matches; topaz, topazes; fox, foxes; he-
ro, heroes.
65. Exceptions. — Nouns in to, vo, and yo, have s or\\y \ cameo,
cameos; folio, folins ; embryo, embin/os. So, also, canto, cantos.
.lu.nt.o, ty.ro, grotto^ ppytipo, solo, I'ulo, quarto., forjinerly hacl
ETYMOLOGY — NUMBER, 17
only s in the plural ; but now more eojumonly take es under the
Rule: as, juflto/juntoe^, &b. Nouns in ch sounding like ky add
5^ only., as, monarch, monarchs. iOKii' -u , JXu'^
66. VVhenever s or e^ will not coalesce with the final syllable,
-t adds a syllable to the word ; as, age. pi. ages; box, boxes. —
But where 5 or cs will coaleFce, it does not add a syllable: as
'-jooJc, books : cargo, cargoes.' The 5 will make an additional syl-
lable only after e final, preceded by g, or an ^-sound : as, cage,
cages ; race, races : rose, roses. Es will coalesce, and does not add
a syllable only after o : as, ccJto, echoes.
,,67. Rule 2. — Noiv^is in g after a ponsonant, chango g
^jito iesin the pluFal;. as, lady,. ladies. But,
., No*uns in ?/ aflcra vowe!, and all proper nouns m g
follow the general rule (03) ; as, dag, days ; the Fomp-
eys,ihe'Tullys, Szc:
=«'?"78. RutE"^.— ^Nouns in / or/e, change / orfe into vcs
HdJmthcx plural; as, loaf , loaves ; life, livts: " '
69. Exceptions. --^'DvfRYt, scarf, reef ; brief, chief, grief; ker^
chief, handkerchief, mischief : gulf, turf, surf, safe, fife, strife:
proof, hoof, reproof, follow, the general rule. Also nouns in j^',
have their plural in s; ns, imiff', mvff's ; except s^trj^, plural
staves; but its com poands-urc regular ; as, fagsiaff, Jlagsiafs ;
ioharf h ai ■ e i t h> o p, wJiarfs x>v mhar ue&. •
L^EBCl^EB.,
1. fi^Ve'the the plural of the following nouns and the rule for forpa-
ing it ; tlrtlP, Fox, foxes, Jiufe-^'^ovLXis in *, sh, ch, soft, ?, ,r, or o,
form thoplfiral by adding ^. Or, more briefly ; nouns ending in x
form tl^plqral by adding .(5*. • •
Foxj. book, leaf, candle, box, coacli, duly, knife, eclio,
JosSy.ca-i'go, wife, story, eliurch, stone, house, glory,
hope, flower, city, difficulty, distress, wolf.
!<-. Day, chimney, journey, valley, arm}^, vale, monnreh,
'two, 'grotto, nuncio, gulf, handkerchief,' hoof, Ptaff,
'^xiff,'^ reef, safe, wharf, fife.
18
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
2. Of what number is — Book, trees globoB. planets,
glass, etfite, foxes, house, bill, river, ecenee, 6tar^,ber-
ries, peach ?
, NOU^■S IRRZuCLAR IK THE PLURAL.
'■^^70. Somo nouns are irregular in tho formation of tl>€irplu-
*"rdl; -sa-oh as — "'"'"'"'
Singular^
I'lural
8i}iyular.
Plural.
Man
men
Tooth
teeth
Woman
women
Goose
geeS6
ci.iia
chiMreii
Mouse
mioo
Foot
i'eet
Louse
lico
Ox .
oxen
Cow
kitic
71.
but now regular, cqws.
Some nouns lin.ve both a re;:ular and an irregular facm
of the plural, but different 8ignifi^**'*'i^^^s J ^9— .!^ft
Singular. : : . ■ • • Plurals i > ' -■
(otto oflliQsame family) brothers
(one of the same society) brethren
(in stamp for coining) dies
(a small cube for gaming) dice
(men of genius) geniuses
(a kind of spirit) genii
(a table of reference) indexes
(a sign in algebra) indices
_^,^^ (as a distinct seed) peas
- vf (as a species of grain) pease
Tan individual animal) sows
(the species) swine
(a coin ) pennies
(a sum or value) pence
72. Note -r-Thpiigh pence is plural, yet such expressions ns
fourpence, sixpence, kc, as t]>e name of a sum, or of a <>oin vpp
resenting that sum is often rcg-arvled a*? Blngular, and capable
of a plural
Brother
Brother
Die
Die
Genius
Genius
Index
Index
Pea
Pea.,;..
So'v
Sow or swine
Penny
Penny
10 .tSi'^q
ETYMOLOGY^ — SLUMBER. 1 9
A Z3. .Cffmpouode ending in ful or fully and generally those
^-bich bate the important word last, form the plural regularly;
'ai-, spoon-ful, ciip-fid, codch-ful, handful, mouse-trap, ox-cart,
cdmera-ohscura, &c ; plural, spdon-ftds, ciip-frils, coack^fulii,
•fee.
74. Compounds in which the principal word stands first, plu-
ralize the first word ; as —
Singular. Plural.
Commander-in- chief Commanders in-chief
Aid-de-camp aids-de-camp
Knight-errant knights- errant
Court-martial courts- martial
Cousin-german cousins-german
Father-in-law, &c. fathers-in-law, S:c.
Man-'Servani changes both ; as men- servants. So also, women-
servants, knights-templars.
75. The compounds of -man form tlie plural as the simple
word; as, Jishennan, fishermen. But nouns accidentally end-
ing in WMiTt, and not compounds o^ man, form the plural by tho
general rule ; as, Turcoman, Mussulman, talisman ; plural,
TurcomanSy Mussulmans, &c.
76. Proper names, when pluralized; and oiher parts of speech
used as nouns, or mere names, form the plural like nouns of
similar ending, as, the Arisfotles, the Solans, the Mariuses, the
Pmnpeys, the Ciceros ; the ai/es and noes', the ins and outs ; by
sixes and sevens, hyf fties ; three fourths, t'wo halves; "His ands
and his'or* ;" '-One of the buts is superfluous."
77. Exception.— Such words ending in ij after a consonant,
follow the general rule, and noc the special rule ; as, the Livi/s
the Tullys, the Henrys — "The lohys and the hys.'"
78. Letters, marks, and numerical figures, are made plural by
adding 's; as, " Dot your Vs and cross your fs:' — "Your s's
are not well maJe." — " The *;S and X's are not in line." — "Four
(Vs «=eight 3'.?"' — 9'5 give place (0 0"5''.
79. Words adopted without change from foreign languages,
generally retain their original plural. As a general rule, nouns
in nm os on^ have a in the plural. Latin nouns in ?>, in the
e^o
PJf^LI^H GRAMMAR.
plural change is inioes; Greek nouns in is, change w into t<i€5'
^ ^4"'^tin nouns in a, change a into oi ; but Greek nouns change a
V into ata in the plural. - The following are the roost commpn,
some of which, however, from common use, have beeome so
much a part of the language as to have also the regular Ijig-
lish foi;m of the plural. lu the iollowing, table th^se areiadica-
ted b^ the letter R. , . v
Singular,
Plural.
Singular.
PiliraL
Alumnus
aluinni
Chrysalis.,
chrysalides
Alumna
alumrjie
Crisis
crises
Amanueusi.s
ams^nqcnsus
Criterion
criteria
Aiialysis
analyses
Datum
data.
Animalculum
animalcula, R,
Desideratum
desidetftta
Antitheso^^',,,,
antitheso:i
Dioeresis
diierases
Apex , / ^
apices, R.
Effluvium
effluvia
Appcncjix
appendices, R.
Ellipsis
ellipses
. Arcanum
arcana
Emphasis
emphases
l^utomaton
automata, R.
Encomium
encomia, R.
J. Axis
axes
Ephemeris
ephemeridesi ;
r pandit
bandi-tti
Erratum
errata ^r-o-i^
Basis
bases
Focus
foci
Beau
beaux, K. '
Formula
forniBl«,R
C^^^ : o;liI \n-
; calces. R.
Fungus
fungi, funguses
Cherub... >f ^
ycherubjm, R..
Genius
genii
r^^n4Vl.i:^y"
genera , '^ .
Nebula
nebulas
.Gymnasium
gymnasia, R.
Oasis
oases
'Hypothesis
Iiyputhe6c!.s
Parenthesis
parentheses
Ignis fatuus
ignrjsfafui
Phenomenon
phenomenq,
lnde.x(a point'
•)iil(Jexc3
Radius
radii
]ndex(in algcb)iiidicuy - ,
.Scholium
BchoH.^ H.::
Lamina
laniinaj.
. Seraph
seraphim, K.
Larva.
larvjc '.\',
magi ■'
Speculum
Stamen
stiltiiiM, t,
•iHedttfirr
niedi<i,. R.
{Stimulus
Btim^^^^^
, ^lemoraiidmu
nicnioranda
Stratum
fitrata
Metamorphosis metamorphoses Thesis theses
Miasma miasmata Vertebra vertebrae
JVIomentum momenta, R. Vertex vertices, H.
Monsienr ' jne68i<^urs Viptu<)So viHudlSoS '"
..Ali%i(matti;cv) mcssrtj(ihastjcrs)YotliCiJ •; ^ r, :-.Tprticcs,^ii?
ETY MOLOG Y— NTt WBEt?^.^ 2t^'"
OBSERVATrONS. ON NUMBKU.
80. Some poans arc used in ike singular only. jS,ifch,5are the
names o{ mctaU^ virtuoi, vices, arts, soitniccs, abaiixicl qifaliiio},
and things, v^eir/hcdQv measured ;,axs goldyjnji^liuiss i^^^ht^.
neas, intemperance, sQulptiui'e, geomelrii^ yjisi^myjlour, 'if^il}cydc^.^j^
Except when ditforent sorts of things a^re expressed : ^s, vines,
teas, sugars, liquors, d'v.
81. Some nouns are used in theplnrg.1 only: as, annals, an>yri a
tijiodes, archives, asseU, ashes, l)illimds,.hitierSrJ)recches, clothes, ,,;.
calends, colors, (militciry banners), dj-egs^ good Sy hysterics yidcs; .
intestines, literati, lees^ letters Cliterature), mimiiice, mannprs^^,
morals, nones, orgiesy pTeiads or pleiades, shambles, tidings^^
thatiks, ifhpcrs^ uitaU, victuals'.' And tKinVfs consisting of two
parts'; as, heUoii's^' drairer^.^hffsc^' nippers, 'plhc'rvSj jdih-Sj sn'vff-
ers, scissors^'shears, tongs, f('<\ 'H
A few words nsaally plural, viz: hmr.'/s, nnhers, entrails',^ ''^
lungs', have sipmetimes a singular, denoting a part or portion o'P
that expressed ny the Piural ; ,as, oowel, Tung, ,a;r,
82. Some nouns are alike in both numbers ; as, deer, sheep,
sicine, vermin, scdmon, perch ; apparatus, hiatus, series, conge-
ries., species, superficies ; head (in the sense of an individual),
cd!/<Ze; also^^Zf, and sometimes ^/J>w;Z, denoting the class; but
denoting individ-uals, they have the regular plural: as, fishe^.
fowls. ■-..•.,-,,,:,,,.,,.-,....•„, ...,,-,,% ^^r-- f
83. T\\Q VI ovdis, brace, couple, pair, yoke, dozen, score^ gross^ ,,
hundred, thousand, and eome others, after adjectives of nuin-,
ber, are either singular or plural ; as, a brace, a Sozen, a hun-'
€?rer?; two brace, three dozen, sfv hirt}dre&^((''c. ' ^fedt'H^itholtt art
adjective ot humber,"or in othei* conistructionSj and particular-
ly afier in, by, rfv., in a distrlbutiv'.? sense, most of these words,'/'"
in the plural, assume a plural form ; a!?;'"lri brac(fi and <:/o?<??».<f."'''*
'*By sdores' iindhnndyrds.-'— '> Worth thousancfs-.^^'' '^^ i •.!▼*' :ij'd i,
84. 1. Thfe lollowing words, plural in fbl^ni; 'nf« '8(HilVe'tirt»ei'-f''i
singular, but Di?«t commonly pfiiral in sJ^nitication, Viz ?'*^
amends, Trteans, ricftes, pains {metkt\\ng laborious efforts),-' ddd's. ^^1
alms, wages yoin^ the names of certain sciences ; as^ mafhernal-^''^
tl ENGLISH tIRAMMAR.
*t'3, ethics^ optics, acQusticdy vKitaphynica, poliiicd, pncuiuatici^
hydroaiatioif <£c
2. Means and amends, referring to one objoct. aro Kin;;ular : '
to more than one, plural. Mean, in the singular form, is now
used to signify the middle between two extremes. Alms {eel-
messe Anglo-Snxon) and riches) richesse, French) ate really
singular, thou;;!! now used commonly in a plural sense. News,
formerly singular or plural, is now mostly singular. Molasses
and measles, though ending-like a plural, are singular, and are
80 used. Oats is generally plural ; gallows is both singular
and plural, though a distinct plural form, (jalloioses, is also in
use.
85. The following are singular in form, but in oonstruciion
various; thus, ybo^ and hcrse, meaning bodies of troops, and
people, meaning pe7'50?25, aro always construed as plural ; can-
non, shot, sail, cavalry, infantnj, as singular or plural. People^
when it signifies a community or body of persons, is a colleciivo ,
noun in the singular, and sometimes, thongh rarely, takes la^ ,
plural form ; as, "Many peoples and nations,"' Rev. x. 11 .
■ THE ri-uRAi. or peopeb n.\me9
80. Proper names for the most part want the plural ; but-- ^
1. Proper numeg without a title aro used in the plural, wheh" ^
they refer to a race or family ; as, the *' Campbells'^ "the, /S<?V .
arts ; ' or to several persons of the saipe name. ,
• •<•';• .-f J- .790
3 Proper names with the title of Mrs. prefixed, or wiib, ap^y ».
title, preceded by the numerals, two, three, kG ^ pluialize thjp-j,,^
name and not the^title ] as, " The Mrs. Howards ;" "the tw,o ,
Miss Mortons f\ ;'the^ two Mr. Henrys:' ,^ ^.
3. But when several persons of the same riame are spoken o^^'>
individually, and distinguished by a particular appellation, ov'
when persons of ditferent names are spoken of together, the ti-,,i;,
tie only, and not the name is made plural ^ fl!?j./.*^»55R J.ujjft,v;^p
and Mary Robinson." ...rr edj fcnr v, Mc^jiwr .ts^in
ETYMOLOGY — CASE. 23 ^.
Tiius far, usage and the rule are settled and uuifoiuj ^ —
4. But in other casoa, usage is still unsettled. Some writurs,
perhaps the majority, pluralize ibeiiUe and not tho name;' as
^*Th« Misses Brown,'' "the 3fe3srs. Harper."' Others of equal
authority, regnrding the title as a sort ot adjective, or the whole
as a compound name, pluralize the name and not the title ; as.
The Miss Brmoiis r^ "the Mr. Harpers."' This form is mora
common in conversation, and, being less stiff and iormal, is more
likely to prevail A few improperly pluralize both name and
title; as, ''The Misses Broions ;'' "the Messrs. Harpers.''
5. Names, with other titles prefixed, follow the same analo-
gy; ns, "Lords Wellington and Lyndhurst; ■' "the locds bishops
of Durham and St. David's;" "the generals Scott nod Taylor." jL
■ viJon.oiii . BXERGISES. :.r,|^,)o 3r|i ^^km^h oT , 1
Gjvethc plural o/— wor.an, penny, 0V'f<3crt, "child,
goose, die, son-in-law, erratum, radius, axis, index, c-her*
ub.
QUPSTIONB.
What is number '? How many numbers'? How is the plu-
ral commonly f(;rmed ? What nouns add es ? When do s and
*s ddd a pyjlable to the word ? How do nouns in y niter a con-
sonant form the plural '? How do nouns endin/r in ?/ after aifs
vowel form the plural ■? How, nouns ending in/ or /c? How
do Compounds of wan form the plural '? How do proper nninrn
fortt the plural ? What is ihe rule for nouns adopted from for-
eign languages? What nouns are used only in the singular '^
U' hat nouns are used only in the plural 7 What nouns are
the same in both numbers ? Wliat nouns plural inform are ^''
singular in signification I Of what number are means and (<
amends'^ When are proper names used in the plural V What
istlie rule for proper names with a title us Mrs prefixed ?
CASES OF ^^OUN^. '-
' .$7, Case is tbe state or condition of .s^Tioun.-^iith re^? . :
Dect to .the other w^i'ds in a sentence.. i.>;a y' j,.j j^u
L'4 KNOLTf^TI GRAMMA?..
88.^9jifns. in English li;\\
//re, Po^GS^i.ve, and Objc.ctioL. . ,
89, The. iVowjjV(//iv oasQ is used— . . .. ,
l.When a noun is used simpiy as the muhe D£*n ot)j'^?fcor!t(wi
3br.Wb;en it is used as that of ivhicli soniothing Is-iftfl^rwiech '
•-.■vtva«, •' JoA?i roads.?.- ■ V . ' ^^^■;.. r.;
3. When it is used as a descriptive; as, *'John is a f^ood7;m/.'
4. When it is used absolutely, or independent of txny other
word ; ^'- O.Absalom, my
.fnnj '^ .■■■ vv^ < ,:t.'(
■'V
00. The Fossrssilr. Cfise cOntvects \f ith tW4 l^hnl'e of jflTfloli^'ect ,
the idea oi*o/^^m, jioss^ssion,' 6\'4iin<if.rff'}'a^ The .^/«}\- rayf: ;
.yoZ( w'.9 *book ; a ^>o?/'.* cap ;7w!<?n'^ .shoes'. '
91. The Objective case is used —
1. To denote the olyect of a transitive verb in the aotivr
,f..' voice ;, as. "James as^istg 7 /<o>;^/^M-.-'. '••• ij! ,^.\ '-/:,.
2. To denote the object of a, rtlatioae^pfessedr.b^ a p^^pcti-
tion ; as, " They live in Louihu," ~ , .
3. To denote time, value, weighty or measure, without a
governing word ; as, "James is ten j/ear.^ old.'"
. '\ "i ,; • CiENfiR.\L RULES, * , _
9.^^ l^be nominative and the objective of- noun
alike.
9'3. The possei'-sivc .siugahir is foniiod by addin^in'
apostrophe and s to tire nominative; as, Joh7i's<< « .!;
94. When the plural ends iii ;s, the possessive i«
formed by adding a,n aposti'ophe , only j a^s, ladies'.
But when the plural does not 6n4 ins, both die apostro
])he and s^ arc add^dj'a^, ii^e^j^sy.'cAj^^rW'.?.
nECLEXSION OF NOUNS.
D5. Nouns are thus declined— '
Siuf/ular. PluraL ; _ i^higulav.
Nom. Lady ladies Man
Pos8. Ladys ladies' Man's
Obj. Lady ladiee Man
PluraL
Stiu/idai
nion
Juhn
men's
John's
mcD^ - '■
- itlabn
ETYxMOLOGrr— CASE. . 25
OG. l^-(-)pcr nanicb fur tlie most part want the plural.
07. ..When the nonnnative singular ends in ss, or in letters of
a faimilur sound, the j al'ter the ^ipostiophe is sometimes omitted
1 order to avoid harahness, or«ioo cIo»e a succession .of hissing
■ undo /as-; '-Fgr goodness' tsako /' "for couscienco' sako, " Da-
vieb' ourvcyin^/' -.Mu^jeti' di.-oii.les ,'' "Jci^iis' feet,'?
lAriElNG THB NOUN,
98. A lioiin ib parsed etymologically, by stating itjf
acc'idonts, or ;.';rai"i"ii\iaiical properties, kind of noun, per-
son, gender, iiunil'cr, and case.
99. NoTE.-^The pussosaivo is easily known by its form. As the
nomiaativrf and objectivo of jiouas are a'iUe, in parsing noons in tli&
f"l!owiDg list.^-, all U'luriJ:' not iu the pogsesiivu may be said to bo la
Ibe^nomiiiaHvo.
100. The student n)a_y parse the vford house tiifs—
lIouEz, Nquii, Common, Xeutcr, Siny luir, 2^ominaiivc.
The teacher tuay then aek, bp a tort of r^icw, why do vou call
Tmuae a itouu ? — why, counnuu ? — v/hy, neuter? — ^why «J/ija/ar ?— why,
t le nomiiiativc ? — rcq nrin^ a dutinct answer to each question. ^n(l
lastly, he. m.iy r oulra the pupil tu-^tato thosa rcasonfc in order, with-
uut the iiucstioDS ; tliio
li ' ' i\'jj^'i because the nam 0 of u thing ;
Co;;?;;io;f, because it belongs to all things of tliO surtj
XculcV; because without sex,;
Sinjuun; because it denotes one, plural, houses ;
yuiHiiidiivj, because it ib used only as a name— •
By repeatii g this f roocra a ftw timo^, a'l tbatbelongB to the pars-
ing of a noan Will bdcom^ uo fauiiliar; aadsj cloarly under&tood, as
to be aUvaj 6 bui>y.
EXEUClSiTrf. '
Father, brothers, moihor'a, boy^.book, loaf, arms, wifo,
hals^ siotor^', bride's, bottles, brii;sh, goose, eagles', wings
2G E^s^GLISH GRAMMAR.
echo, ox's horn, mouse, kings, qiieeiis, hread, child's
■toy, grass, Looih, tongs, eandlCj chair, Jane's boots, Bob-
\\ ii:iL i>> I .iM . in,»v iw.ii.y -M.;os ! When is the nominative
MScd? What doo5? the possessive case <lo'- When is the oh-
iectlvo used? Wliat cases are alike ? How is, the possessive
formed ? Decline several nouns. How is the possessive form-
ed when the noun ( ncis in .9 or >f.s '^ How is a noun parsed ? —
IVhat arc 'the p;raiiimatical propcrlics of a noun 1
THE AirrxGLi:.
101. An AivrtCLE is a word put Tjeforc a noun, to indi-
cate the manner in wbieh it is used.
102. There iire two lu'ticles, a or an and ihc.
103. ^ or an is called tiie inrlefinite article, because it
RhoVs tliftt ita noun dc?iotes a person or thing indpjitntehi, ov
\Vithbut distinction ; as, ^1 man, i. e. any man, or some man:
"withbut stating which one.
104. A is used before a copsonont; a,?, a book ^ also before a
vowel, or diphthong, whreh combines with its sound the power
of initial ?/, or ?/j ; as a iniU, g^ii^c, a eulogiij, a cur, many a one.
105. ^71 is used before a vowel or silent A ; as, an age, an.
lionr : also before words beginning with h sounded, when the
accent is on the second syllable; as, an heroic action, an JiifUo-
rimZ account ;—lDecause h in such words is but slightly sound-
ed.
IOC. ^or an i« sometimes used in the sense of one, each, er-
eri/; as, " Six cents a pound;' "two shillings a yard ;'' " one
dollar a day ;'' *' tour hundred a year.'
1^7. RemAUK — lo tho eyj}rc^s\o\is a hntlnff, n fishing, a huildtng,
and the lit<« a is cqn va^ent to at, to-, in, on, rtnd is not to be regard-
ed, ji8 an article, but as a pror. ositlon or |relix.
ETYMOLOGY — ARTICLES. . 27
108. The is called the definite article, because ii tihows that
its noun is used definitely, and reCcrs to seme particular person
or tiling ; as, the man, i. e., some particular man atfccrtaincd or
pointed out.
109 Parsing. — Thearlicie isparsed by .staliiitj wliolh-
er it isdeJiJiilc ov indeJinUe^ aud to what noun it bclono-s •
ihu.'^, ^' A book." — A is the ijidcliiiilc article, and bclonp-s
to book.
EA'EUCISLIS.
Is it proper to say — a in an, oi- an man ? why ?
a apidc, or an apple I-* vrhv >*
a liou^e, oranlioii.se':' Avhy'/
a hour, or an lioiirT why i*
aiinicoin, or an unicorn? why ;^
a owe, or an owe? mIiv ?
1. Trefix the indefinite article a or an correctly to the following
words.
2. Tell which words aro noun5, ami why -parse them— decline
them.
Chair, table, horse, cart, book, house, garden, bird
owl, Qgg, car, eye, tree, cow, unit, use, old man, young-
man, word, hook, pot, bench, desk, room, oven, oi Ic
eulogy, ewe, uncle, aunt; — open wagon, useful contriv-
ance, round stone, old hat, new coat, iee-honse, kc.
3. In the following, correct surh »s aro -wrong-, and give a reason
for the change;— parse the articles and nouts.
An cup, a door, a apple, a pear, a ounce, a pound, an
hat, an wig, an eulogy, an 3'outh, a honor, a heir, a
crow, a ostrich, a pen --a ugly beast, a useful tree, an
huBimino'-bird.
• QUESTIONS.
What isan Article ? How many articles ? When \9 a used '
When 18 an used '? Fn \^\\\\t sense are a and an sometimea
used ? How is i^n article parsed }
28 ENGLl^U CIRAMMAR.
THE ADJECTIVE. •
llO. An Adjective is^a word used to qualify a sub.
staiitivcf as, "A good boyj" "a .^nvarr bo^J•" '^-ten dol-
•lars;" "wc found liirn poor."
111. A noua U «^"t/(/ic(Z by an adjecii.c, *. t^wi. wi^; vij. v.t uaiued is
ihtviAiy deHcribed, limited, or di<,tingui»hed from Other things ol the
same uame. Tbib is doue two ways: —
J. Certain aJjactivos connect wi'h ^heir nouns soma qualili/ hy
•which the oljec's named are dotcribed or 4ijtingiiishod from others
(.f the same kind; a?, "A red fing;" "an afhubiwj BtOTj." fc'uch are
i.ui)niion and participial adjectives.
ji. Others merely limit, without expressing any quality ; as, "An
AhifricuH book;" ''(en doUiirs;" "luitl week;" "this yearj" ^'every
day;" Ac. fciuch are circimibtantial, m'nneral, and definitive adjeotires
JI2. AJjectives, ;is pa-edicates, may qualify aji infinitive
iiioud, or clause of a seutcnco used as a bubstantiTe ; as, '"To
play 13. pleasant." — T/ial the rich are haypy is not always true."
113. tSevei-al adjectives sometimes qualify the same noun;
iii,''X smootJi round stone."
114. An adjective is sumotiiiios used to qualify the meaning
«.l another adjective, both forming a sort of compound adjec-
tive; its, "x\. hri'jhi red color;"' -a dark blue coat;'' '-a vast-
iron ball."
115. Nouns become adjectives when they are used before
other nouns, to express a quality or property bolon^^iug to
them ; as. ''A gold ring ;"> "a iyilver cup ;" '-sea w^ter."
116 On the contrary, adjectives witbout a substantive are
Eometimes' used aE< nouns; as, '-God rewards the good, an^ pun-
ishes the had" — "The virtuous are the most Jiappg." Adjec-
tives used in this way are usually preceded by the, and, whea
applied to persons, aio for the most part considered plural.
NUMERAL AD.JECTIVES.
117. Adjectives expieseing number are called Nu^
meral adjectives. They are of tvro kinds^ Cardinal
Tind Ordinal.
ETYMOLOGY— ADJECTIVE.^. 29
118. The Cardial numbers indicate Jioio mamj ; llicy'
are owe, two^ three^four^ &c.
119. ThaOrdinal numbers iHdicate irh'ch oneofanum'
her; they are /r.s^, {second, tJii'rd, &c. In compound num-
bers, the last only has the ordinal f.^rm -, as, hrentij-
FIRPT ; f wo .hundred and fi/f^'-TlURD.
120. Numeral, adjective.^, being also 7iamc<; of r.nml crs nre often
used as nouns, and so have ibe inflection and construction of ncuns ;
thus, by tu-os, by tens, hy fifties. For icn's sake, for iiccnly'r, sake.
One and one are Hvo. Tvco is an even number.
Note — In scmo arithmetics the Janguape cmj,lay?d in the opera-
tion of lEuUiplyiDg is tuch as, "Twice two arc. Icur, twice three, arc
six" — is incorrect. It shfubl be, ''Twice two I's fcur," <fec. ; fortbe
word two is used as a singular noun — the name of a Buajbir. The
adverb "twice" is not in constrvction with it, and con?cqueDtly does
not raaVe it plural. The meaning i.-, "The nuniber ti ken twice is
equal to four." For the sime reason w 3 should sny, "Three times two
is six " because the meaning i«», "7'fco taken three ■^imes is six " If
we say, "Ihrce tinies one are ihiee," we ii.iiku' f.'vies" the subject of
the verb, wherea"- the fubjfct of the vcib really is "onr," and * timc^"
is in the objective cf Eumber. 2:4::fi:l'*, should be read,
"As 2 is f> 4, so is a to 12 ; not "As two are to Icur, so are," &c.—
But wbsn numerals denoting more than one, ars used as adjectives,
with a substantive expressed or.understood, th'^j n-n-:t havo a plural
construction.
121. Adjectives in English are indeclinp.blc. •
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVKf^.
ID.j. Most, common nnd participle adjeclivcs have thice
forma cal!e*i degrees of comparison ; namely. Positive^ Com-
parative, and Superlative.
■* 122. The Pos/frt'e expresses a qua. ity simply ; a<!, "Gold
is heavy y *
" 128. The Comparative expres^e^ a quality in a higher
dogr^^e in one oHjeot th.n in f.r.otber, or in sev
;;U . KXGLISII GRAMMAR.
ei;il taken taken togetlier ; aa, *'Ctukl is hciivler
than silver." ''He is v:tscr tlian his tenclicrs." •
] 2j. The Siipcflatioe expresses n qualliy in one olject in
iho highest degree compared with several others ;
as''(io!d ia the most ■precions of the metal?."
126. Rkmahk. — The superlativo degree, whan made hy prefixing
the adverb ///'>«t^ is ofoen used to express a very big'i degree of the
quality in an oVijdct, without directly comparing it with others ; as»
*^ lid is a, must ilistunjulnhecf man." Thus used, it is called the super-
lative of (j/(n*f »cr, -and commonly has a or avi before it, if the noun
ia singular; or it is without an article, if the noun is plnral. The
saujp thing is expressed by prefixing the adverb very, exctedinybj, Slq. )
a?, " A Lcri/ distiiif/uishcd m.a,n." The superlittive of comparison com-
monly has (he before it.
UULES FOR COMPARISON,
127. Rule 1. Adjectives of one syllable form the com-
]iiirative by adding er to tiie positive, and the superla-
tive by adding est] hh, sweet, sweeter, sweetest.
Words ending in e muto, drop e before er and e?/* ; as, tanie,
hayer, larrjcat.
• 128. IluLK 2. Adjectives of more than one syllable,
are conunordy compared by prefixing more and most to
tlie postive ; as, inunerouSy 'more numerous, most numerous,
129. RKMARK'.--ri»ough this rule indicates the prevailing
usage, yet' adjectives of two syllablop are not unfrequently eom-
parcJ hy er and r.<^/ ,• as., "Our ienderest cares :" '• The co?«-
ntnneal materials." "fH.s.syllables in le and ?/ are generally com-
paredfcin ihi.s way; as uttk abler, ablest. All adjectives in y af-
ter a consonant, change // into / before er and est; as. dr^, drier^
ihie:!f ; ?i((j)iii/, happier, hapj/iesi; but// after a vov?el is not
Change(l ; as. (ja'j, f/ai/er, (jai/csi.
130. A lower degree of quality in one object compared with
another, and the lowest compared with several odiers, is ex-
pressed by prefi.King/t'6'.9 and least to the postive ; as, sweet, less
sweet, least siocct. This, by way of distinction, is sometimes
ETYMOLOGY — ADJECTIVES,
81
culled the comparison of diminution, or corr.parisoa descend-
131. The meaning ofth-e positive is sometimes diminislied without
cmployiiig comparison, by annexing the syllable I'a/t ; as, n-hite, whit-^
is-h; hl<(cl-j blackish. These may ba called diminutive adjectives. So
also various shades, degrees, or modifications of^uality are frequent-
ly expressed by connecting with the adjective such words as rather,
domeivhat, slujlitli/, a little, too, very, greatly, &Q., and in the compara-
tive and superlative, by such words as umch, far, altofjcthcr, by far,
rfc.
IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
\?il. The following- acljeclivcs ai'O' oomp
iai'ly, viz. : • '
1 irreo'U-
Fositivt'. Comfaratire, ■■,:■ .". 'uiv.
Good lietter beat
Bad, evil, or ill worse * worst
I^'ittle less, sometmies lesser least
Much or many more most
I^ate ^ later^ irregular, latter latest or last
Ne«r . nearer -. nearest or next
Far farther farthest
Forth (obsolete) further furthest
Fore tonuer foremost or first
Old older or elder oldest or eldest
133. Much is applied to things wCTghed or mcatured , many, to
things that are numbered; more and most, to iToth. Farther and
farthest generally denote place or distance; as, "The farther they
went, L!iO //tore interesling was the scene ^ ', further and furthest re-
fer to quantity or addition; as, "I have nothing further lo say."
Oil!,',- Mud i'liicst are a])plied to peisous or things, and refer to age er
duration :* a;;, '• Homer is nu older poet than Virgil ; " *" The pyramids
are older than the pantheon." jt/cA/- and tldc^l (from the obsolete
eld) are applied only to persons ot the same fuiuily, and denote pri-
ority of birth ; as, " An elder brother." Later &ndlat€st have respect
to time; latter and last, to position or order. ' .
134, Souie superlatives are formed by anneiing inost, sometimes
to the comparative, and sometimes to tho word from Tvhich tUe
comparfitlvfi is forniL'u ; :i, ,,;••.,., -w-,, ».->., or vpmosi, ?rom vp;
•nether^ ncthermont ; innfr, hmrrmosi, or wnwst, from in ;. hinder^ hindrr-
inosty or hindmorf, from hhuJ': outer, oitlermokf, 6r xitmont.Uom out
ATiJECTlVES NOT COV.PAr.Er*.
135. AcljGCtivcs avIjosq signification C\oo<^ n^t admit c4
increaesor climifinlion, cnn n^f ^.rdynM-iy l>o r'oni].ni\'il.
These are —
1. Numerals; ns, oiu-, iiCS^; nunl.f'.urlli, Izc.
2. Fropcr adjectives ; a?, Ihigllsh., American, romni:.
3. Adjectives that denote ^^^J/r^*, s/ifTi?^, or mater'ail ; n^,rirni'ar,
square, toooden,C<.c.
4. Such adjectives as denote 2^os!i.'rc or jiosUion ; f.?, 2'*frpc7Uhcii-
l^r, horl.tonlal.
f). Definitives ; as, wc-//, prr?-.'/, r^7^, so^^, i5;c.
C. Adjectives of an r/i.<toZ?//(^ or viperlativr signification; as, .'.':/': ■
2}crfeH, ziniversai, chirf, cxlrcmc. wjitrilc, ccvipJcte.
13G. Remark. — Of these last, however, corrparative a^d snocrli?-
tive forms are sometimes used, cither to give greater force to the ex-
pression, or when the words are used in a. sense not stn'ctlj nbsolule
or Euperlative. The following are examples :—
ExtremB, — ''The extrenfest of evils." —
Chief. ^" Chief est of the herdsmen."- Bihl"
Perfect. — "Having ?«orej^ie>/cc« knowTcdi-e of that wny," i. e. knowl-
edge nearer to perfection. — Lille. ''Lesn perfeft imit ition."— Moraif^
'■'■ ' «
More rnni2)lef*; mont cornplelejless cornplefe, arc coiViiMon.
Parsing. — h\ parsing an acljoc'tive fully : 1. State its
class, 2. Compare, if admittinii; comp;ii'ison, and if not
compared, so state it. o. Tell Its degree of comparison,
jf compared. 4. The noun wiiielv it onalifies. Do tliir,
nlways m the "^■^ni" ovr'-M*, imd in tlio fewe^-t ".vords
possible.
EXAMPLE?.
" A wise son rcrikeUi a (/lad father. '■ — " "WisJom is mere prccicvs
ETYMOtOSY — ADJECTIVES. 38
tiieu that can render a reason. — " Ikying lips are an abomination
to the Lord." — ^^ Blessed are the ^mr^ in heart."
Wise ia a common adjective, compared by er and eat, positive, and
qualifies ton.
Qlad is a common adjective, ccmpared by er and est, positive, and
qualifies father.
More precious is a common adjective, compared by more and monl-.
comparative, and qualfies iciadom.
Wiser is a common adjective, compared by er nnHest, comparative,
and qualifies aluggard.
Seven ia A numeral adjective, cardinal, not compared, and quali-
fies men.
Blessed is a participal adjective, compared by more and must, pos-
itive, and qualifies /nen understood.
Pure id a common adjective, compared hy er and ett, positive, and
qualifies ynen understood.
• EXERCISES.
1. Compare — Biight, diligent, thin, noble, bad, pretty,
fearful, brave, warm, active, woithy, cold, large, indus-
trious, aflfable, wise, obedient, gloomy, able, sad, little,
strong, near, dutiful, serene, big, good, careless, hot,
late, fruitful.
A.dd to each of these adjectives a noun which it can properly qual-
ify, as, *' A hTighi day," "a diligent student,," Ac.
2. In what form arc the fvllowlng adjectives f — Mild,
est, better, high, more, uttermost, happiest, worthless
le^st, whiter, lowermost, worse, cruel, eldest, gentle,
magnificent, best, many, less, gayest-, peaceful, vir-
tuous, sweetest, evil, inmost, happier, miserable, tem-
perate, useful, honorable.
Compare each of these adjectives.
Add to each, a noun which it can properly qualify.
3. In the following phrases, tell which words are nouns, and which
are adjectives. Parse each word carefully.
A good man ; a kind heart ; a clear sliv ; the benevo*
lent lady ; the highest hill ; a skillful artist ; an older
2b
14 EXGLLSn ORAMMAB.
companion- man's chief concern ; a lady's lap clog;
most, splendid talents; the liveliest disposition; a
p'easant temper, the raging; billows; temples magnlfi-
eont; silent shades; excellent corn; a loftier tower;
n happier disposition ; the third day; a round ball; a
square table; one good l)Ook is better than many bad
books.
QUESTIONS.
"What is an aJjcctlvo? When is a noun said to be qualified by
an adjective? What are participal adjectives? Can an adjective
qualify anything but a noun? Can more than one adjective qual-
ifv a noun at the same time? When do nouns become adjectives?
When do adjectives Jaecome nouns? Wliat are numeral adjectives ?
]Io\v many kirds? Are adjectives declinable? How many de-
grees of comparison? What? What do they denote? flow are
the degrees formed? How is the positive diminished? In what
degree are superior^ inferior ^o, ? How are much and many applied ?
HovV are /iir/Afr and //////ifr applied? In what degree are upper -
771031,- inmost, kc.l What classes of adjectives cannoJ properly be
compjrod? How i? an adjective parsed''
PRONOUxXS.
137. A pRoxouN is a word used instead of a noun ;
as, "John is a good boy; Ac is diligent in his studies.'*
138. The noun whicfi the pronoun represents or designates, is
called its antecedent, because, in the third person, it usually stands
Ififore the pronoun'; and, in tfie first and second, the person inten-
ded is indicated by the pronoun its(df.
139. Pronouns of the third person are used in writing and speak-
ing, to prevent the frequent and awkward repetition of the nouu.
Thus, without the pronoun, the above example -would read, ^^ John
is'a good boy ; Joliji is diligent in Johns studies."
140. A pronoun is sometimes used instead of another pronoun;
fts, " Vou and /must attend to ocii duty."
141. Pr.onouns may bo divided into Personal, Rela-
tive-j I'yferroffmtive and Adjective.
ETYMOLOaY — PP:ONOTJ.27j,' ^5""*,
i. PERSOXAL PEONOUN^S. . , . .
l-i2. I\..=o)ial Prnnomis are those v,'hicli '(irsfinguish. |
the pcnon \^y tln-ir form. They arc either Smple or
Cnrvprnniil.
l4 3. Tlie simple personal proiiorms slyq Ij ruouj ne,
nhr-, it ; with their plurals, ive^ you theif, _ ,• •
144. Of these, /is of the first perion, and denotes, thc^^aeaArer;
thou is of the Eccoijd, and denolec the person addressed ; he, she^ tt,
are of the third, and denqie the person or thinj; spoken of.
Ho. The pronouns /and ^//CM (icnote the s^^caker, and the per-
son addressed, without jrevioas in?ntion, or even knowledge of
their nhme?, tiie persona ir'.eiidod je>ig suniciently indicated by
their presence, or some other cirGuniPtance. The pronouns of the
third person refer to name person or thing previon^lr mentioned, ■
or easily understood Jroin the conicxt, or frc:n the nature of the
sentence.
146. IFc, cJtr^ and f/inf, are frequoi>tiy used as' general teTms la
the beginning of a .<;enteace, equivalen* to -^the person," &c., witb-
oat reforeiice to a noun going before ; a?, " IIo,[Uio person] that '
loveth jdeasure sh.ail be a poor man.'- - .. , • n ■.. ^ :. i. ■
14T. They is abo yscd in a vague sen^e for ''.people,'' ia sucU
expressions as, " They say," like the French o/i, or the .Germ an wau. -^
148. -10 persoiuil pronouns, liko^nouiis, belong.Per^Q?^,
(render] Ninnber, and O/se. The}' are thus deolined: : — '
RIN'GULAR.
PtURA-t.
X:jm.
/0.'5.
OIiJ.
.\'
F0S3.
Obj.
.V. or F.
1
mine
mo
• ^ (•
ours
us
M. or F.
Tliou
thine
thee
You
yours
you
( Masc.
' Fern.
He
his
liini
Thc7
\heirs
them
Siie
hers
her
Th.y
theirs
thorn
1 Ncut.
It
its
it
Th<-y
theirs
them
OESF.RV.LTIOXS OX PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
140. In many Grammar?; the po.?sessIve of all the pronouns, ex-
cept he and it, has t^vo forms as follows : Mt/ or mine; thy or thine;
her or hers; our or ours : your or yours; their or theirs. Accordiag
^ e:ta3lish grammar.
to ihia arrangement, ihe first form, »?y, th>/, .ic., is always lucd be-
fore a noun denoting the object possessed; the second form, min.-,
ihim, AC, never before that noun, but only ref<irrlng to it as previ-
ously mentioned, or evident from the connexion. The possessive
case of nouns, is used in both ways To this classificnllon, there ii
no important objection ; and such as prefer it may readily adopt if.
though for reasons assigned, a different classification is here pre-
ferred. Mine and thin-^ arc sometimes u'od ai possessive! for m>i
and thy,
160. In this manner, may be explained, tao u?e of llio possessive
after transitive verba in the active voice, and after prepo itions ;
thus, "Jamas lost his books, and I garo him //h"/i^," meaning my
»ooi».— "A pictura of the king's," in a piolure of (i. o , from) the
king's pictures. So "A book of mino," is a book of (from) my
books. "A friend of yours," is a friend of (from) your friends. It
l9 worthy of notice, that though this uso of tho possessive after of,
«riginally and strictly implies, selcpllcn, or a i^art only, it has ioeen-
si^ly eome to ba used when no sueh selection is, or ever can b", in-
tanded. Thus we may any, " that house of yours," ' that farm of
yours," without intending to imply that any other houses or farma
belong to you ; and when wo say, ''That head of yours," seleolion is
obviously eseluded by the sense.
151. In proclamations, charters, editorial nrlicles, and the like,
ii:e is frequently applied to one person.
152. Ihou 13 now used only in the solcniu stj'^c, in adjresses to
the Deity, or to some important object iu nature, or to mark spe-
cial emphasis, or in the language of contempt. Ff, the plural of
iJioUy is seldom used (except as the subject of the imperativfj, and
onlj in the solemn style.
163. You, the common plural of thou, in now us.;d also to denote
©na person, but, even when it does so, it always tnkej a iihiral verb.
This usage has become so fixed and uniform, that some eminent
grammarians contend for its boin.^ regarded as singular. No a>lvan-
tage, however, would bo gained by adopting (his proposal, and it
aeems to accord much more with simplicity, as Ay«il as with fact, t >
regard it as a plural which has coma by use to bo app.'iod in this man-
ner. In certain kinds of writing, we is us»id in the same way, and
«o also is the corresponding primoun in French, and soma other mui-
em languages, in ^hicb, however, it \z aUvay • rp7ar..1,-d ai a piural
fona.
ETY MOLOQ Y — rRo:f oir.Ns . 37
131. The prono'.ui iL is used in a variety of ways :--
1 Properly it is used instead of a neuter noun, word, or sub-
stantive phra3e ; aa, "/yi/t;is short; «7 should be well im-
proved.'^ 7l/fl?2 is a noun ; j7 is irregular in the plural." —
" Jamer. is a good scholar, and he knows ity viz., that he
is a good scholar. ''And the burden that was upon it
shall be cut off; for the Lord hath spoken ii" — U. \%\\. 25.
2. ft is used as an indefinite subject of the verb ro ///?, followed
by a predicate in any person or number; a9> " Tl is I ;
" h is you ," " [( is they." kc.
3. It is used in the same manner after the veib to be, in interrog-
ative sentences ; as, " Who is it ?" " What is it? &c.
4. It is prefixed as an introductory subject to such words as to
br, to happen, to become, and the like, referring to an infini-
tive mood, or substantive phrase which follows the verb
and is its true subject; as, "/Ms an honor for man to
cea'<e from strife: i. e., To cnase from strife is an hnuor for
man.
C. It is used indefinitely before certain verbs, to denote some
cause unknown, or general, or well known, whose action
is expressed by the verb; as, " If rains ; "/? snows;" —
Verbs before which it is thus used, are said to be imper-
sonal.
c. It is sometimes used as a mere expletive ; "Come find trip it
as you go.''
taf). The possessives, hcxs, it, ours, your.^, theirs, should never be
written hcr's, it's, our a, yours, theirs.
*1.tO. ///.? and iV,"* before a noun, are possessive pronouns ; with-
out a noun following, they are the possessive case, ffer, before a
noun is the possessive pronoun: without a noun, it is the objec-
tive ca?r\
COALPOT^ND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
157. }[y?.elf (ourse/f), thyself (yourself), himself, herself, itself,
\y\\\\ iheh phwiih, ourselves, yourselves, themselves, are called Com-
pound personal 2>ronoiins. They are used in two cases — the nomi-
native and the objective. In the nominative they are erapbatic,
and are added to their respective personal pronouns, or are used
38- EXGLTSTT oram:mar.
in:tefiil of ihc-m ; as, " I myfclf did it." ^' Uiin:se[f sliull como.' —
J n thf objective tlicv nve rc/Zfr/rr, sliowinpr that the nrrent is alst*
The* object of his own act; ns, " Jnd.is went and hanged himsiif."
I'lS. The simple- prononn<5, also, are t»omettmes used in a reflex-
ive «;ense : n?, •' Thou h.^?t hewed ihff out ft sepnlchre. as he that
hewe h him out a sepulchre on hi((h."' — Bihh.
"ISO, OurscJ/ and yovmelf. are used as compounds, corrcspon-
dinpf to wp and yov, applied to an individual ; as, " We oiirself will
loUow." You must do it yonndf.'''
160.' The possessive cntphpiic or reflexive^ is nmde by adling the
word own to the possesfjives ;';.v. thji. Iris her, kf. ; a?, •' God created
ni:in in his n>'7? image."
J'AdSixa.
Kjl. Por.^onMl pronuims ;)re parsed nearly like the
substantives for wliicli thcybtninl. Th.is, " I love"—
/ i.s :i pronoun of the lir.st person, masculine or femi-
nine, in the nominative sing'i.lar.
162. As an additional exjrcise, a reason may' be'' assigned for each
statement, thus :— ' . >.
I is a jyronoun, b9f ausc it stands for n noun or name,
2)rrsonal, — its form determines its person.
iint person, — it represents the Spc;vker.
MascuVcne or Feminmr, — it denotes male or female.
Xornhnilioc, — subject of locf.
Shfy7ihr.~\( deuot .s but one.
iGo. Parsr (Jic j'ofl'.iicing lisf as(Ii)r<ictl. — 1 th(;u,v\'e,mOj
us, thine, lie, liim, s]»e, hers, they, thco, them, its, tlieir^,
you, her, ours, 3'ours^ m'ne, liis, it; — myself, ourselves,
yourself, liimself, themselves.
2. Select the yjersonal pronouns in tlte following sentences, and
pa'se them t if of the first or seoiond p^rsm, state what they desig-
nate : if of the third; fctite the nouns for vrhiea the}' stand.
ETYMDLO(>Y — PRONOUNS. dixf
James says he is older than I, but T ain taller than
he. That book is mine; take it anr? reixd it. Lot tliein
do it themselves. When you learu the. lesson, come
to rae,»and I will hear you say it. They will go when
we return. Thou art the man. Your knife is sharper
than mine; lend it to me, if you please, till I mend
my pen.
2. WTfte Bontonces, eaoh of wbi^^h oball contain a pronoun ia the
nominative case — In the objectiTe case.
. S. Ch9nge the following sentences, eo that tV shall bo opiiUed, and
t\»6 subject or thing spoken of shall stand first.
It is pleasant to see the sun. It i§ criminal to de-
ceive. It is manifest that you have been deceived. —
It is jsaid the cholera has ;«ppeared in England. It is
easy to talk,
4. "Write tenteooefl of thi? iiind both wavs.
QUESTIONS.
What is a pronouD? What is tho antecedent? Why are pro-
) nouns U3od? Into vrhat olaasos are pronoun3 divided? What
are Personal Pronon^is? IIow many simple personal pronouns?
I What do they denote ? How ore //c, -fAe and they /rcquentl}'^ used?
What belong to personal prononns ? Decline each of tho simple
pmuouns ? How many toim^j has the p/)S3e.«3ive case of the pro-
uoms ? How are ihev explained ? Wln-n i.i vf aprdiod to ('ne
person? How is ?//o^/ used ? Of what numher is you? In what
different ways is it used? Waat fs the caution in No. 156? Ex^^
plain the variation in the' use of his and its ? What are myself,
himself, &c. How are they used? In what cases? How ia the
possessive emphatic formed ?
II. RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
164. A Rehitivt Pronoun is one that relates to, and
connects its c'ause with a noun or pronoun before it
called the antecedent ; ns, '• The master tt^Ao taught us/'
40 i:?tQLia«i oRAMiiiR.
1G5. The autoceJeut of a relative maj be a uouu, a prououu, au
iD6nitlve mood, a clauac of a sentence, or any fact or thing im--
plied in it ; aa, "A kinj who is just, makes his people happy;'*
'* fTe that is wise, is wise for himself;" " He who reads all will not
be able t» think, wllhoat which it i.s impertinent to read ; nor.to «ci,
witheut tvAkh it Is impertinent to think ;' " We are bound to obey,
the Dicint laio, which we can not do without Divine aid ;" " The
maa was said to be i/t/iocent^ which he was not."
160. Relative pronouns are of two kinds, Sim}^e and
Compound.
107. Thp simple relative pronouns are t^jAo, ivhtch,
ifiaf and what. That and ivhat are indeclinable, and
used only in the nominative and objective. Who is
masculine, or feminine, "and which is masculine, femi-
nine, or neuter. They are declined thus : —
Singular and Plural. Singular p7id Plural.
Norn. Who Which
Fobs. Whose Whose
OhJ. Whom Which
1G8. Who is applied to persons only; as, ^' The boy
'icho reads."
1G9. Whieh is applied to inferior animals, and things
without lifo; as, *' The-dog ?(?AicA barks"—*" The book
which was lost."
170 The relative, as in Latin, sometimes, for the Rake of greater
p«r«plcui*y, has its antecedent repeated after it; ai, " I gave him
an ivcry handle, icAioA A/(j/e he fltili has." this construction, hew-
iver, is inelegant, and should he avjoided.
171. Which is applied also to collective nouns, expressing collec-
tions of persons, when the reference is to the collection, and not
to the persons composing it ; as, " The committee which was ap-
pointed." Also to names of persons considered only as a word ; as,
''^ Nero ivhich is only another name for cruelty,"
172. IFAwA has for its possessive, wAos^; as A religion icho$e
origin is Divine." Instead of " whose," however, the objective with
ETYMOLOGY — rKOXOUXS. 41
of before it is more common ; a?, " A religion the origin of which
is Divine."'
iT^'i. Tiifd is npi lied to botli ]^ol^sol1^^ an»J tliinrr'^; us,
'Mhc./>07/ that reads; <'• tlic aog ih-if larks;" "the
look Ihaf was ]orI'.''^
'74 What is ap-died lO Z,^////;;-: on]}-, and is rover
nr-cd but. when fhe antere(]e;!t is ornitlc.J ; as. *' This is
irliat I wanted-''
im}'^^- ^° the aI)Ovo e:?amplp, pr perly ?p?aklng, 7r/m/ neither t^ic^ff^f"?
♦he antecetlent, norbns it ucflers l.io(l, in the oniinary oense of that
.expression. If it includrd (be anteoeJeut, then nlmt woiilil be of
two ca^es at the same time^ wbirh, if not absurd, is an anoma'y
not to be read .ly admitted. If the anttce-eDt were .unilerstood, it
pfuld J)e Fiipplied, ajid th<n thp sentence wtuld siand, "Ihia is the
/7/?"7»«7 jf/m/ I wanted." J\x\i this is notlngU-h. The truth is, ic/ur/
is a fiajple rehiti^e, havijic:, wht never npeil, like^ nil other relative?,
but one rase; Int yet il has this i)rculisTiiy of usage, that it always
refers to a gpneral antecedent,* oniittn), JMjt ear.ily £\;p|.li*d by the
naicd, and to which belongs the other r.-i.^e in the eorstiuction. _ The
nnteredcnt leferrod to is aiw^ys the word " thine f ox " ihinfjf)," or
some gentval or indefinite term, obvious from the sense. M'hen thii'
anteeedent is exptcssed, the relatiA'e folloTning nan?t be vJiieJi or that
but never 7cJint. Thus, "'Th's is what I wanted," is equivalent to
•' This is fhiit wliuh, or the ihhui whi<h, I wanted." Henee, though it
is trno that vhnt is equivalent in.rceaning to thni uhivlt or ///« thrit<t
■irliich, yet the error to which 11 ishfjs imprreeptibly led, \'.7..,\\\fiiv:hnt
is a omnound relskivr, ai d inclu-^"-- the a!\teepdent, should be eare-
fully avnid-d.
17*». Tlie onieo of the reiriiive i.s twofold : —
V '
.1. It, is somelimos moroly <';(/</,7,'/v,.r.n(] conr.eels itf ('laur:.e ^it.h
the nntercdent, for the purpose of lurtiier describing, without mod-
ifving it ; thiif? used, it ia a more ronnectivp. nearly equivalent to
and with a pfr^.onal pronoun he, .v//^ ;7, kc : " Light is a l)ody n-hivli
•moves with great releiitv"r='-'Li/7lit ir a body, and it moves with
great celerity."
2. It is more commonly resiridivc. and connects its clause, a? an
a<ljunct. with the antecedent, in order to modify or restrict its mean-
ing. Thus used, the relative with its Cinuso is equivalent to an nd<-
A
^2 EN*GLTSII GRAilMAK.
jfctive ; as, " Kvery thing ichich has life is nn auimar'=' Even-
livhif/ thing fs^n nnimal.'" . Whea used Iq this way, the relative
can not be resolvej into and with a personal pronoun, lor we can not
say, "Every thing is an animal, and il ha^life."
177. The relative w/io and 2t7i?c7t are used in both senses. That
13 used in restrictive, more commonly than in descriptive clauses.
178. Which is sometimes used as a demonstrative adjective pro*-
noun, equivalent to this or these, and agrees with a substantive fol-
lowing it ; as; " Which things are an allegory"=" These fhings are
an allegory."
179. la English, a relative must always be in the same ssntence
with its antecedent, and, if restrictive, in cloSe connexion with it.
ISO. In 8uch sentences as the following: "Shun such ua are vi-
eiouB" — "Send such an you have"— some grammarians consiTler the
word n* a relative : in the first example, as tho nominative to ore ;
and in the second, .as the objective, governed by hace. Others, more
properly, regard it, in all such sentSncea, as a conjunction, and tho i
expressions as elliptical— to be supplied thus : '• Shun such as [those ]
who.] are vicious"--" Send such as [those which] you have." 1
COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
181. The relatives who, which, and what, with cva- or son-cr annex-
ed, are called comjmund relatictn. They are used instead of tho sim-
ple relative and a^general or indetiQita antecedent; as,** Whoaocvtr
commit'eth sin is the servant of sin j" that is, " A))>/ one or ev%ry oiu- •
n/tn committeth sin," Ac. * Whatever is evil should be avoide i ; '
that is. " Ecery thing which is evil," &,c.
1S2. Like the relative vhnt, the compound relatives are used only i
when the inaefioite antecedent is om'tted. Whenever that is ex--
pressed, tho simple lelative *t//o, ?(7n>/(, or ^//a^, should be used as in )
the preceding examples.
18'}. It is therefore not correct to tay, either that these relatives
include the antecedents, and so have two cases, or that the antecedent
is understood. The same rea3-»ning triat is applied to theirelativo
iti^a^, is equally applicable to the compound relatives, only it must
be remembered that the aniecedent referred t-j in these, and to
which one of the cases properly belongs, is always a general or in-
defioite term.
184, In old writings the antecedent word is sometiaaes expressed,
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS. 43
cither before or after the compound relative, fur the sake of greater
eraphasia or precision; as, •* Blessed is he, ichosorver shall not be of- ,
fended in ni.e." — Eng. Bible. **" Whoiioevcr, will, let him take the wi-
ter of life." This usage, however, is now nearly obsolete, except
with (he word whateoer ; as, *•*' Whatever -yoxx do, let it be done well."'
185. Whoso, formerly used in the sense of whoever or v:hosoever, is
now obsolete.
186. Whatever, whatsoever, whichever, and mhichsoe.^er, sve often
used' before substantives, as a Fort of indefiaica adjective j as,
" Whatever course you take, not uprightly." Whea thug used, the
noun is sometimes placed between ichat, which, or u-hose, and soever ;
as- " What course soever"-- '' Into whose house soever ye enter."
PARSTNCI.
187. The relativo is parsed by slating itB gender,
number. case,anj antecedent (Ihe gender and number)
being always the same as those of the antecedent ;
thus :
*' The boy loko studies tchat is useful, will improve."
Who iis 9. relative pronoun, masculine in the nominative singular,
and refers to "boy," as its antecedent.
What is a relative pronoun, neuter in the nominative singu'ar, and
refers to '''thing," or ''that," as its antecedent, omitted : if
supplied, ii/m/; must be changed itiio which ; thus, the thing
uhich, or that which.
The pupil may assign reasons for the atateraenl? maie in parsing.
EXERCISES ON THE RELATIVE.
1. Write on the blackboard a list of nouns, arr.inged in a column
on the left side, and write after each its ] roper lelative j thus, "The
man— who ;" " The bird — which."
2. In the following eentencos, point out the relative, and the ante-
cedent, or word to which it relates. Alao state whether it is addi-
tive or restrictive (175 )
A man who is generous will be lionored. Got!, by
wjiose klnduess we live, whom we worship, wlio created all
thing?, is eternal. That is the book which I lost. He who
44 KN-GTJr.TI GRAMMAR.
steals my purse, steals trasli. Thia is the boy whom we
met. Tlii-<isiiie man who did it. The>ft aro the books
ihat 3'oii bonpljt. The person \\ho dcQ^ no ^^ood, do03
harm. The woman who was Innf, is wol!. Tlii/5 is the cat
thjt Iviiled the rat, tlint nte t!io mab, that \f\y in the house,
that Jack built.
y>. In earii of the following Fentenoe?, print out the compouDd rel-
ative— mention the auti-cedent omitted.to which it refer.s. Icsertihe
iinteceilenf in each soutence, and make the necessary change iu the
reUtive (St )
AYho-oev( r stcal.s my piirae, steals trash. Whoever does
no ,£;ood, does bivm. Whatever piiiilles the heart. fortifio'B
ir. \Vliat>oever ye would th.-^it men should do to you, do
ye to them also. VVli never sins, will suffer. I love who-
c\^r loves me Now wbatsoever God hath raid to thee,
ch>. Whatsoever I command yon, do it.
4, In the follovfing sentences, wherever it can be doud, change the
relative aud anfc^csuent for the compound rel.ilive: -
Bvinir with 3^011 everj'thing which yoii see. Any one
who told Rucb a, story, has been misinTormed. Any-
thing that is wortb doing at a'l, is worth doing well.
Anything tliat gives pain to others, deserves not the
name of pleasure, li^very one who lovt.s pleasure, will
be a poor man. From eveiy one, to whom nmcii is
•riven, shall much be reqniied.
Til INTEKHOOATIVE PROXOT'NQ.
188. WhOy loliifh, and what when nsed in asking ques-
tions, are railed Interrogative, Pronouns; aa, '* Who is
there ?" — " Tl'A/cA will you take ?''— " ^Vhat did he say :"
189. Who and xchich are declined like the relatives.
190. In questiong, wAo is'equivalent to u-hai perscn ; uhich and
u-hat have a noun following, to which, like an adjective, tl.ey belong.
^ ETYMOLOGY — PliOXOUXS. 45
•V:
or refer to one understood, but easily supplied ; thus, '• Who [what
person] is there?'" — '-Which [book] will you take?" — 'What
[thing] did he say V
191. Who applies to perconG only ; ivhich and what to per^^ons cr
things.
192. As applied to p«3rsous ; u-fio ioquires for the name; wJiich for
the individual; »'7io< for the character ^r ocoupatijn; as, ''Who
wrote that book ?"—" Mr. Webster,"—'* W/tic/i of of theui ?"— " Xoah.
Webster" — " What io he?--" A Ivxicographer."
VJ'.i. The Kame pronouns used responaively, in the beginning of a
dependent daut'C, or in what is cal'ed the indirect question ( i. e., in
a way which, in an ir.dcpcndeut cliuso, would be a direct question),
are properly neither intcrrof/niicca nor rcltitiveti, but a sort of iudejl-
iiite pronoaus. This will b» best illustrated by an example: —
Jnlen-ogative — '* ITAu tcrotc that letter?"
Eelative.—'[l'kQO-y the person who wrote that lotterT'that is, I
ata acquainted with him.
Indefinite' — "Iknowu7ij wrote that letter;*' that i?, I know by
whom the letter was written.
194. It id necessary to these words bein^ regardt^d as indeliniti.'S —
, That they beg'u a deptudeut clause ; 2. That fi^^y do not ask a
question ; 3. That an anteooiicut can not be supplied without changing
the sense ; and 4. Ihat the whole clause be cit>»er the subject of a
verb or the object of a verb or preposition. These remarks will ap-
ply to all the folloTWDg examples ; '• I know who wrote that letter."
Tell vxQ viho wrote that letter." "D) you know v:ho wrote that
letter?" "Nobody knows who he is." " U7io he is, can not be
known." "Did he tell you a-uy he io?" *• We cannot tell whkh is
he." "I know not wliat I shall do." It is uncertain to whom that
book belongs. " Teach me what is tru'.h, aud vshat is error."
PARSIXG. ,
195. Interrogative pionouDS, in both the «JirccL aud
the indirect questions, arc parsed by stating thtir gen-
der, numhflBt/'and cas3 ; thus :-- -
" Who comes ? I kno'wnot I'ho comes."
Who is an interrogative pronoun, masculine or feyji.,in8 in the
nominative singular.
46 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Who itf an indefinite pronoun (or an interrogative pronoun ufed re.
epoutj'.vfly), maeculine or feminine, iu the nominative singu-
lar.
Reasons may be assigned for each statement, as exemplified (162).
EXERCISES.
1. Point out in which of the following eenttnces, u^Jio^ which, and
trhot, are i-ekitivcn ; and in ■which, iiirfr/inlteft.
AVho steals my purse, steals trash. To Avhom did you
give that book ? What I do, thou kiiowest not now.
Who you arc, Avhat you are, or to whom you belong, no
one knows. What shall Ido ? Who built that house?
J)o 3-ou know by whom that house was built ! Is that
the man who built that house '/ Which book is yours ?
Do you know Avhich book is yours? I saw a book
which was said to be yours. I know which book is
yours- What in me is dark, illumine. What is crook-
ed, can not bo made straight. Wha^t is wanting, can
not be numbered. AVhat is wanted? I know what is
wanted.
2. Write sentence?, ench of which shall contain one of the pronouns
in one or the other of these diflferent senres.
QUESTIONS.
What is n. relative pronoun? What niaj the antecedent be?
TIow many kinds ? Name the simple relatives. Decline them.
How arc they ppplied? When is w/'Wi applied to collective nouns?
Is 7'-'/?f//'. a simple, or a cornpo^ind relative? (1V4). What are the
oRice5 of the relative ? Stato the difference between the additive and
the restrictive relative? When is i&hich a demonstrative adjective pro-
noun? Is rt5 a relative? What are compound relatives? What
kind of an antecedent have they? When are whatever, vt'hichever,
*c., indefinite adjectives? How is ft relative parsed? What are
interrogative pronouns? How are they applied, \ybftt do they
enquire for when applied to persons ?• How may the indefinite pro-
noun be known ? (193), How are interrogative pronouns parsed ?
ETYMOLOGY— PRONOUNS. 47
IV. ADJECTIVE PrvOxXOUNS.
196. Adjective Pronouns are words used, sometimes
like adjectives, to qualify a noun, and sQmctimes Ike
pronouns, to stand intead of nouns.
191. Adjectives used as notins, or willi a noun understood, com-
monly take the article (he before tiioni ; as, f/ie young ; (he old ; ifie
good, &c. Adjcc'ivc pronouns do not.
193. Of the adjective pronouns, the Possc^sivcs clearly hare a
double character. As an adjective, they qualify a noun, and as a pro-
noun, stand inftead of anoun. The DisfyibutU-ee, Dcmonstmiircs, and
IiidejhiHes, a*adjcctivcs, qualify a noun expressed or u.nderstood. or
they Etand instead of a noun, and thus may be regarded eouietimei?
as adjcctiTcs. and sometimes as pronouns. Hence they are classed
by pome grauitnaTians as adjectives, and called y>ro»o/;<(»<7/' orZ/cc^iVrs ,•
and by others as pronouns, and oslled ctdjertive jjrovouus. The latler
classification and name are here preferred, because they have been
admitted into the grammars of almost all languageg ; and' because a
change o' established nomenclature is an evil of so serious a kind
that it shouM not be incurred unless for the mo;t urgent reasons.
190- Adjective Pronouns are divided into lour class-
es : rosscssivr, Distril)utit*e, Veuionstratlvc and Jndefiyiite^
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
200. The Possessive Pronouns -arc such as denote
possession. They arc mij, thij, hi^, her, ifs, — our, your
their, — own. ^ '
201. The possessive pronouns are derived from the personal, anl
ccmbinothe office of the adjective and pronoun, for they a'ways lim't
one noun denoting the object posfefsei-t, and stand instead cf another
denoting the possessor. They agree viVh the pos-e68;ve cape of the
personal pronoun in mea-ning, but diff.r frcm it in construct'on. The ^
possessive pronoun, like the adjective, is always followed by its n'un •
as. "This is >H//book;" tho possessive case of the personal is never
follow'ed by anonn.bH refers to one known or previoue'y expresred;
a.", "This book is mine." The possessive ease of nouns is used botlx
ways; as, " This is Jolm's book ,; " or, " This book is John'e."
48 EXGLISII GllAMMAIl.
202 Former'^ ;.i.';;c and f/i!';ie were u-cd before a vowel, or the let-
tor /<,, iostBad of my aiid- thi/ ; as, ''B'.ot out all mine iniquities j '*
'• Commune wih- i/ific heart." TLio fo'm is still in use.
20,j. Hie, Ii"'-, and itn, when fuUowod by a subotautive, are posses-
eive pronouns, not f I'lowed by a substative, his is thu possessive
case ot he ; hir. tHeobjecti\e case of o/ie y a::d it«, the posteij.sire case
of it. Iq theE jg'ith liiblo, h'a is neuter^aa well as masculinp, and is
used wliere iis now would bj u>eJ- Sjc Fruv. xxiii. ;U , /«. Is. 22.
204. Orn is not used "a^ a possessive pronouu by itaelf, but is ad-
ded to the other posec-ssive pronoijnb, or to the possessive case of
Doun.->, to render the poso'ea^ion^eipresscd by tbtm emphatic ; as,
<' My oif;) book ;" *' The possessive proQuuu, with uuii, following it,
may have it3 eubitantivo uadcrctood; m, *' This boyU iis utij own." .
JJlBTRlBUTIVE rilONOUI.'G.
205. Tliie Distr[buriue''Y>vouonnH ropresont objects us
taken soparatoiy. They arc each^ everj/, either, neither.
206. F'lch deuoles two or more objects taken separately.
207. Eccry denotes each of more ih in tvyo objects taken individ-
ually, and coiuprebeuds thfem .Ml.
208. £Uher means one ol two, but not both. It is sometimes
used lor each ; a;, '-On eUhcr side of the river."
209. Tbe distrihutivco are always o! the lliird person singular,
even when Ihcy relate lo the persons s[i«rtkia;;, Or to tlt^se spoken
to ; as, "Each of </6— eacll ot _//o«— each ul' /A';.!};i— has his faults,'
DEMUNSTUATIVE I'UONUU^Isfi.
'JlU. The D^moii6trattoe proiiouia.a point out objects
defiiii cly. They ;irc f/?/'5 ami ///t,/,^^ with thoi** plurals,
' %lie&e and,//io5c'.
2 J. I. Yon and whi< h, before a nuiir ^ bceui more properly to beloug to
this class of wnrda than to any o' j^gr- as," Yon trembling coward ;"
•• }'e» tall cliff;" " Whivh things^ „,ye an'al egory :".--.*' These lUiogs,'
Ac.
2:2. Fanner and latter, Ji ^^^f ^ud lant, with ihv prefixed, though of-
ten used like that and th]^^ rcferiing to wndt ^OLtiafctcd^ arc prop
ejly adjectives. - . •
KTYMOLOGY—PRONOUNS. 49
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
213. Tlie liidejiiiite pronouns designate objects indef-
initely. The}' arc, noney any, all, such, whole, some, both,
one (used indefinitely), other, another. The three last
are deciined like nouns.
214. To these maj' be added, vo, much^ viany, few^ several, BXi^WiQ
like; also, who^ whic/i, and whaf, used responsively (102.)
215. One, denoting a definite number is a numeral adjective ; as«
" One man is sufficient '' Bui one, referring indefinitely to an indi-«
viJual, is an indefinite pronoun. Thus used, with its noun following,
it is indeclinable like the adjective ; as "One man's interest ia not
to be preferred to another's," Without its noun following, it is botht
singular and plural, and is decliiiable, like the substantive ; as, " Ona
is as good as another ;" "One's interest is as good as another's ;" " Ho
took the old bird and left the young ones." " One might say."
The same remark is applical)le to the«indefinites, other and another..
216. None [no one) is used in both numbers, and is never fol*.
lowed by a substantive ; as, " None is so rude;" 'Among noM
is there more sobriety.
217. (So we is used with numerals, to signify ahoiit ; as, ^* Som^
fifty years ago.'' This should not be imitated.
218. The expressions, each other and one another, form what may
be called reciprocal pronouns, and express a mutual relation betweea
different persons. They have this peculiarity of construction, that
the first word of eaeh pair is in the nominative, in apposition witk
the pluiral subject, which it distributes, and the second in the ob**
iective, governed by the transitive verb or preposition j as, " They
loved each other," i. e., They'loved, each the other ; "They wrote to
one another," i. e., one to another. Each other applies tO two; one an-
other, to more than two.
219. Some of these indefinites, and words of similar signification,
are sometimes used adverbially with the comparative degree ; ag,
** Are you ttfiy better?" '* I am some better ;" *' He is none the bet-
ter ; -all the better," i. e. ; •' Are you better in any degree V[ Ac.
PARSING.
Aijjective Pronouns are parsed by stating the
class to which they belong^ and the word whiQh they
qualify, thus : —
6(J KTTGLTSH GRAl^mAK.
irsrr.f~rr
L
I f^ Evfry day brings 77' nun duties."
JCiery \& a distributive adjective pronoun. i|ualif)ijif^ " i/oi/."
//* is a possessive adjective pronoun : eiuphiitic, qualit^iug " rft*.
tUt."
Own is a dependent possesgive aJjcctive pronoun joined with its,
(^ to render the possession expressed emphatic.
^ ' . EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVE PRONOTXNS.
)'
1. Point out the adjective pronouns in the following phrases and
^lentences; and parse them :
Every man is, to some extent, the areliitcct of
Jiis own fortune. ^Do good to all men— iiijury to
Jione. All things coiy.^ alike to all. Your own friend^
and your father's friend, forsake not. This one, or
that one, will answer \nj purpose; both are good. —
^orne men love their money more than their honor.
I EXERCISES ON PRONOUNS PROMISCUOUSLY.
In the following phrases and sentences, point out the pronouns,
jiu'd parse them, as already directed:--- ^
Train up a child in the way he should go, and when
iie is old, he will not depart from it. Eemember th}^ '
Creator and thy Redeemer, in the daj'S of thy youth,
Peeble are all those pleasures in. which the heart hag 1
XiO share. >
EXERCISES ON ALL THE PRECEDING PARTS OP SPEECH.
' Id the following Sentences, point out the nouns, articles, adjec.
iives, and pronouns, in the order in which they occur, and parse
them: .,«! --, .^i,
My son, forget not my law ; but let thy heart keep
my commandments: For length of days, and long life,
and peace, eball tbey add to thee. Let not mercy and
ET^YMOLOGY — VERBS. 51
ti-utli foi'8iike llicc : biiul them about tliy neck, write
them upon the tabic of tli}' iicavt. Honor tlie Lord
with thy substance, and with the first-fruits of all
thine increase : So shall thy barns be filled with plen-
ty, and thy presses shall burst out with new wine. — ■
Happy is the man that findeth Wisdom. Length of
daj's IS in her right' hand, and in her left hand, riches
and honor. Her w^a3's are ways of pleasantness, and
all her pat lis are peace."
QUESTIONS.
Wlmt are Adjective Pronouns? Do they take an article be-
fore them ? What are the two characters of the Possessive? Into
what classes are Adjective Pronouns divided ? AVliich are Pos-
sessives ? Can they be used without a noun? How were minr
and thine iormcrly used? Wiiat is said of hi.s, Iter and its in No.
201 ? How is ou-n used ? What are Distributive pronouns ? Wtjat
are the words and what does each of Ihem.niean? What are De-
monstrative pronouns? What words? What is said of ?/6?/,
what, former ami latler ? What are Indefinife pronouns? Name
thera? What is said of £)«<• .? What is said o\ none Kt\(\ some? —
How are Adjective pronouns parried ?
THE VERB.
220. A Verb is a w^ord used to express the act, being,
or state, or its subject; as, "John runs -/' "The bo}'
sleeps;" '^\Sq are;" ''lie is loved." Hence —
A word that expresses the act, heing, or slate of a thing, is .i
verb. Thus, w^ say runs is a verb, because it expresses the act of
Jqhii,
221. The subject of a verb is that person or thing, whose act, heiug,
or state, the verb expresses. Thus, ia the preceding examples, ** runs"
expresses the act of John" — "sleeps/' the state of *' ho^" — "are,"
52 EXGLTSTT GRAMMAR.
the being or existence of" //v," ami "is loved," the state of "he" as
the object acted upon. In like manner, in the sentences, *' Let him
come;" "I saw a iiiau < »7^'».7 wood;" " Zc^" expresses the act of
thou uQderstood, denoting the person addressed— " mmr," the act of
"him," and *' onttinij" the act of *'/»«»."
222. Verbs are of two kind.S; Transitive and Intrans-
itive.
223. A Transitive verb expresses an act done by
one person or tiling to another; as, ^' James strikes
the table."
224. An Intransitive verb expresses the being or
state oi Ms subject, or an aci not done to another; as,
''I^m;" Vlq sleeps-/^ '< You runj'
225. In this division, Transitive (passing over,) verbs include all
those which express an act that 2)a8fic>i over from the actor to an ob-
ject; or the n caning of which has such a reference to an object, a«
to render the expression of it necessary to complete the sense ; as,
'^ lie LOVES ns ;" "I HEAR i/ov :" "James RESE^fBLES /<("'< brother;"
*' He HAS a hook."
Intransitive verbs include all tly)se which are not transitive
whether they can express action or uot*; as, " I ain .-" " You valk ;"
" They rnn."
226. These two classes of verbs may be thus distinguished : —
1. Transitive veibs ic the active voice require an ohject after them
to complete the sense; as, " James {<</'j7.(?8 the tahlc ;" — Jntrausitive
verbs do noti require an object after them, but the sense is complete
without it ; as,," He '•/Vs ;" ''You ride:" The wind hlovs ;" " Ihe
wheel tnrnn."
2. As the object of a transitive active verb is in the objective case^
any verb which makes sense with me, thee, him, her, it, them, after
it, is transitive. A verb *hat does not make sense with one of these
words after it, is intransitive; thus, xtrihei is transitive, because we
can say, "James strikes mr ,-" sleeps is intransitive, because we can
not aay, "James sleeps ?»<>." Hence —
When a verb in the active voice, has an object, it is transifice :
when it has not an ^bject, it is inlransitice.
3. In the use of trausiiive verbs, three things are always implied —
the actor, the art, and the ohjcet acted upon ; in the use of intransitire
verbs, there are only two— the s»/yVc^, and the heiny, state, or act,
a<;cribed to it. ,
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS. 63
227. Intransitive verbs are sometimes rendered transitive —
1. When followed by a noun of the same, or similar significa-
tion, as an object; as, intransitive y '■^l run ;' transitive^ '■'■ I
run a race."
2. By the addition of another word ; as, intransitive, "I laucfh;"
transitive, " 1 lauf/h at."
228. The same words are sometimes used in a transitive, and
sometimes in an intransitive sense. Thus, in the sentence, "Char-
ity thinkcth no evil," the verb is transitive. In the sentence,
" Think on me," it is intransitive.
329. So also verbs, really transitive, are intransitive, when
they have no object, and the sense intended, being mcre)y to denote
an exercise, is couaplete without it. Thus, when we say, " That boy
reads and inritcn well" — " rendu" and '' writes," are really transitive
verbs; because a person who reads and writes, must read or write
aomHhiu'j. Yet as the sense is complete without the objfect nothing
more being intended than simply, " That boy is a good reader and
writer," the verbs, as here used, are intransitive.
EXERCISES.
In the following sentences, tell which words are verbs, and why —
which are intransitive, and why.
That boy studies grammar. The girls play. Grass
grows in the meadows. The former ploughs his field,
and sows his grain. Eomuhis bnill Eomc. The sun
shines. The winds blow. The tree fell. Biing your
books, and prepare your lessons. Have you recited 'i
Who read last? God created the heavens and the
earth. Columbus discovered America.
QUESTIONS.
What is a verb ? What is the subject of a verb ' How man/
kinds of verbs ? What is a transitive verb? What is an intransi-
tive verb ? Do intransitive verbs express action ? What do tran-
sitive verbs require alter them ? How may a transitive verb be
known? What three things ore required in the use ol transitive
verbs? How are intransitive verbs rendered transitive? When
may transitive verbs be used intransitively ?
54 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
DIVISION (tF VERBS.
230. In respect of form, vcrb.s arc divided into Ecouhir,
Irregular, and Df/'trfire.
2ol. A REGi LAR verb is one that forms its j}((sf fmse in
the indicative actUc,and its j>«.s7^>«/7ic ?)>/(;, by adding <f or cd
to the present 3 as, present, love ; past, loved ; past partici-
ple, loved. ^
232. An IRREGULAR verb is one that docs not form its
2'>ast tense in the indicative active, and its j^ttaf participle, hy
adding d or cd to the present ; aS; present, /crile ; past, tcrotc ;
past participle, vriltrn.
233. A DEFECTIVE vcrb is one in Avliich some of the
parts arc wanting. To this class belong chiefly, Aux-
iliary and Impersonal verbs.
AUXILIARY VERBS.
201. Auxiliary (or helpina) veibs are iliosy by the
help of which othor verbs are iuflecieJ. They are do, hare,
be ; — shall, will ; — may, can, must : and except he, they are
used odI}'' in the present and past tenses; thus,—
Present. Do, have, shall, will, may, can, must.
Fast. Did, had, should, would, might, could, .
Be, do, and hai:c, are alto principal verbs.
ShaIl and Will, expressing resolution, purpose, <j-c.
235. Will denotes the purpose, resolution, or inclination, of a per-
Bon, in reference to his own acts; and aliall, his purpose, Ac, in ref-
erence to the acts of vthcrs over Avhom ho has authority or power.
236. Fixed purpose or determination is expressed in a more positive
and absolute manner in the first pct^on by sludl than by «:<7/, because
in this way, the person, as it were, divests himself of will, and puts,
himself entiroly at the disposal of another. Thus, a person may say
*■ I nhalt go, though much against my inclination."
For this reason, s//((;ns more polite and. respectful iu a promise,
and more olicnsivc in a throat, than wili.
ETYMOLOaY — VERBS, So
Interrorfatively.
237. Iq asking questions, these auxiiiaries in this sense, ht4
used with reference to the will of the second person, to whom a ques-
tion is always supposed to he addressed, and hence arc used as iii
the second of the above forms; thus-r-
Shall I write ? Will you write? Shall he write :•'— Equivalent to--
Is it your purpose that I ehall write ? — you wilt write ? — he »Ao?A
write ?
Shall and Will exprossinr/ fuluridj,
■ 238. In regard to simple futurity, the \is(i[of ghull and o-i(l is di-
rectly the reverse of what it is in the expression of resolution : that
is, will takes the place of shali, and shull takes the place of icilF,
In other word?, when a person in reference to himself foretells whafc
is future," «^a// is used: and in reference to others, icill is used.
33y. But when the thing foretold is regarded, either as pleasing oc
repugnant slwll is used with reference to the first person^ even whea
others are repr«jsented as foretelling.
Interrogatively respecting' tlu future.
240. Shall is used interrogatively in the first and the second per-
son, and 11- ill in the third.
241. Shall is used, instead of v:ill, after the connectives, if, "provided,
(hou'fh, unless, Ac. ---the adverbs ichen, tohile, nutil, after, bi'fove, Ac— W
and also after nhofoncr, or a relative pronoun in a restrictive clause*'
242. Should, the past tense of '■^hall, a,T\d notdd, the past tense of
icill, are auxiliaries of the past potential; and in dependent clause*
are used in the same manner after a past tense, that shall and mil
are uFcd after the present or future.
M'li/^ C(in, must — mighty could — to be.
213. ^Uig denotes present liberty or permission; can, ptyeaent abil-
ity ; and must, present obligation or necessity.
244. Jlay sometimes denotes mere possibility.
245. J/t'.y, before th^ subject of a verb, is used to express a wish or
prayer ; as, " Jlay you bo happy ["
246. Jfiijht iind could express, ia past ticne, the same ideas genay-'
a.11^ that a^rc expressed by ma^i and aut iu the present. f ■''v.;9'j\'; .
56^ ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
247. Might, before the subject, is also uEed to express a wish ; as,
*' Might it but turn out to be no worse than thiaJ"
248. The verb " to be," in all moods and tenses, i^ used as an aux-
iliary in forming the passive voice. Also in the progressive form of
the active voice ; af<, " I a;>» writing;" "He //rr* writing."
249. All these auxiliaries are sometimes used, without their verb,
io express, by elipais the same thing as the full form of the verb, to-
gether with its adjuncts, when that is used immediately before, eith-
er in the same or in a dilVerent tense; thus, "Ho writes poetry as
Tfell as I do."
, 250. The verb do (not auxiliary) is sometimes used as the su^-sti-
tute of another verb or phrase previously used; as, "We have not
•yeifoxmd them all, nor over shall do."~ -Milton.—'" Lucretiiis wrote on
the nature of things in Latin, as Empedocles had already done in
.Gre'ek." — ActQu.
EXERCISES.
1. Correct the errors in the following sentences, and give a reason
for the correction : —
I will be a loser by that bargain. I will be di owned and
Jiobody shall help me. I will be punished if I do wrong. —
You Bhall be punished if you do not'reforui. It shall prob-
ably rain to-morrow. If you shall cooie 1 shall come also. —
I will be compelled to go home. I am resolved that I ebail
do my duty. I purposed that if you would come home I
should pay you a visit. I hope that I will see him. I hoped
that I would see him. You promised that you should
"write me soon, lie was of opinion that we should hear
^ good lecture, lie shall come of his own accord, if encour-
agement will be given.
2. In the following, tell which expressions are right, and which
are wrong, and why :- -
It is thought he sliall come. It will be impossible to
get ready in time. Ye will come to me. He shall have
. your reward. They should do as they ought. We are re-
solved that we will do our duty. They are resolved that they
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS. 57
shall do tlieir duty. 1 am determined that you will do your
duty. I am sure you will do your duty.
QUESTIONS.
^, What is a regular verb ? An irregular ? A Defective? What
are auxiliary verbs ? Nutne them. Give the present^an(l[past teuse
of each. Which are also principal verbs? What docs n<VMe-
nDte? What docs sliall denote? How is fixed purpose expressed ?
How are shall and will used in interrogations ? How are shall and
«v7^ used in expressing futurity? When is shall used with the
first person ? What is the rule for shall and ivill used interroga-
tively? What is the rule with ?T./i/()('/(/r(/, &c., ? What does 7«r/y
express? Might? How is the verb to be used? Ho^ man^ aux-
iliaries be used ? For what is do sometimes used?
INFLECTION OF VEEiBS.
251. To the itiflcctiun of verbs belong, Voices^ 3IoOds,
Tenses, JShimbcrs and Persons.
01- VOICE.
252. Voice is a particular lorni of the verb, "vvhich
shows the relation of the suljcct or thing spoken of, to
the action expressed by the verb.
253. Transitive verbs have two voices, called the
Actice and the Passive.
' 254. The Active voice represents the ^subject uf tUc
verb as actmj/ ; as, ''James strikes the table.''
255. The Passive voice represents the subject of the
verb as acted upon -, as, " The table is struck by James."
In other words, the verb, in the active voice, expresses the act of
its subject — in the passive, it expresses the state of its subject^ as
affected by the act. In the active voice, the subject of the verb
acts — in the passive, it U acted upon.
OB
58 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
256. IntransiUve verbs can have no distinction of voice, because
they have no object which can be used as the subject in the pas-
sive. Their form is generally active ; as " I stand ;" I runJ'^ A
few are also used in the passive form, but with the same sense as
in the active ; as, " He is come ;" "They are gone :" equivalent to,
" He has come ;" " They hat^e gone."
25Y, Intransitive verbs are sometimes rendered transitive, and so
capable of a passive form —
1. By the addition of another word thus, " 1 lovgh^' is intransi-
tive ; I hiurjh at (him)" is transitive ; passive, "He is laughed at
(by me)."
2. Intransitive verbs are transitive, when followed by a uoim
of similar signification as an object ; as intransitive, " I run;"
transitive, " I ruji a race;" passive, " A race is run by me."
3. Intransitive verbs become transjlive, when used in a causitivc
sense ; that is, when they denote the causing of that act or state
which the verb properly expresses ; as, " Walk your horse round
the yard." " The proprietors run a stage coach daily."
4. Many verbs in the active voice, by an idiom peculiar to the En-
glish, are used in a sense nearly allied to the pa.ssive, but for which
the passive will not always bo a proper substitute. Thus we say,
'' The field phmr/hs well"- " These lines rrad Fmoothlj"' --"The fruit
ins/es bitter." When used in this sense, they may properly be ranked
with intransitive verbs, as thay are never followed by an objeetive
case.
^>UEST10Ni5.
What belong to the iiilleclion of verbs V What i.-^ voice? How
many voices? What does the active voice represent? What does
the passive voice represent ? Have intransitive verbs any distinc-
tion of voice ? What form have they? What are the three ways
by which intransitive verbs are rendered transitive? What pecu-
Ifar form of the verb is sometimes ii^ed?
MOODS.
258. MooLt is the /node or iiiiiniier of exprcs.sitig the sig-
uiScation of ihe verb.
ETYMOLOGY — MOODS^ 59
250. The moods in English hKe' Jf^e; namely, the Tiu
dicdfioe, Potential, Subjuncfive, Imperative, and hifinitive.
2G0.;/nie Indicative mood declares the fact expressed by
the verb, s«my</ and without limitation; as, "Hez5"— «'
*' lie loves "— " He ?6- loved''
261. The Potential mood declares, not the fact expressed
by the veib, but only its possibility, or the liberty, power,
will, or obligation, of the subject with respect to it ; as " Thd
wind may blow "— " We may walk "— " I can swim "— ^
''R^ would not 5^a?/ "—*' Children should obey their pa-
rcDls."
In other words, the potential mood expresses, not what the Sub-
^ ject does- or is, &c., but what it maif, can, must, might, could, would, ov
should do or be, &c.
262. Both the indicative and potential mood are used interrogoth-dy*
at), "Dies helovt?" Cau he write?" They are also used without
dependence on another verb, and express a complete idea ia
themselves. "James writes a letter/* and "James can writo a let-
ter," are equally complete and independent sentences.
263. Tho b'lEJU.N'OTivE mood represents the fact express-
ed bv the veib, not as actual, but as conditional, desirable,
or oontingct^t'; as, " If he study, he will improve." — '* 0 tha(;
thoM v't'rt asjny brother!"
2'U. TLis'mood, as its uamo implies, is always subjoined to, aud
dependent on, another verb expressed or understood. "Jf he etudy,
he \cill iinpyocc.'^ " 0 [I wish] that thou u.-ert," &c.
?65. The condition a- ity or contingency^&c., expressed by thif mood,
i<^ usual'j" intimated by guch^conjunctions as if, though, lest, unlett, to,
itc , pn fixed, which however, make no part of the verb.
2(10. ^Thi same tling is eomefcimes expressed without the conjuno-'
tioa, by mrrely putting t1)c verb or auxiliary before the subject or
uomioativo ; as, *' Had I," for " 1/ I had." " Were he," for " 1/ he
irfi.re.:' <' Had hp gone," for " Tf he had gone," &.C.
207. The Imperative mood comwanc;?^, exhorts, entreats
ov permits; as "Do ibi^ "— "i?6mem66r thy Creator"—
■''fcvT/-, O my people "'— " Go thy way for this time/'
60 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
tf 2^8. The Ij^FINitivb mood expresses the raeaniiig of the
verb in a general manner, without any distiuction of person
or number ; as, to love.
260. The infinitive is often used as a verbal noun in the nomina-
tive case, as the subject of a verb ; as, ^^ To jjIhi/ is pleasant.' On
in the objective, as the object of a transitive verb in the active
voice, or of a preposition ; as, " Boys love (o jihn/' — " He is oboi/f to
^o" — " What went ye out /or to sec? "
270. The infinitive mood generally has no subject ; yet tho art, be-
"luf/, or ttafr. expressed by it, is referable to some word connected
■with it. Thus, in tho above examples, to ploy is referable to boi/a,
JBut when the infipitive as a subject has its own subject, it is in the
objective case, introduced by /o/- ; as," For n» ^WfV, is base." But
■when the infinitive with its subject is the object of a transitive verb,
that subject in the objective case needs no connecting word; as,
*' We believe him to be sincere." Here, Inm is the subject of to be.
271. The infinitive active, by an anomaly not uncommon in other
languages, is sometimes u9ed in & passive sense; as, "You are to
hlomt," (to be blamed). "A house to hf." "A road to make."
1^' Goods madQ to sell." " Knives to <jri»d," &c.
QUESTIONS.
What is mood? How many, and what are the moods? What
distinguishes the indicative mood ? How docs the potential de-
clare a fact ? What does the potential express ? How does the sub-
junctive represent a fact? Upon what is this mood always depend-
ant? What indicates the contingency of this mood? How may
contingency be expressed without a conjunction ? Describe the im-
perative mood. Define the infinitive. How is the infinitive often
iiscd? D«es the infinitiveJiave a subject? What anomaly occurs
in the use of the infinitive.
TENSES.
2^2. Tenbes are certain forms of the verb, which- serve to
point out the distinctions of time.
2'73» The tensea in English are six — the Fi'esentj the
ETYMOLOGY TENSE. 61
■Presents-perfect, the Past^ the Past-perfect, the Future^ and
the Future-perfect.
274. Of these, the present and the past only, in the indicative
mood, and the present in the subjunctive, are simple tens»s, consist-
ing of the verb only ; as, " T h,vr " — " I hjrcd." AH the rest are com_
pound, consisting of the auxiliary aid the verb; a"s, "I have loved.'*
» TEN6ES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD.
27a. The Present tense expresses what is going on nt the
present tiaie ; as, " 1 love " — '• I am loved."
276. This tense is lued also to express what is Ixihlttrol or f^ln-aijf:
true ; as, " Virtue in its own reward." It is used, in anima«cd Darra-
tiop, to express past events with force and interest, as if they were
present; as, "Cassar Icai-rf,' Gaul, cros>it8 the Rubicon, and (ntera
Italy."
2?7. It is used sometimes, intead of the ]>i cacitt per/f't iensc, \n
speaking of authors long since dead, when reference is made to their
works which still exist; as, "Moses ^t//«us who wtre the descend-
ants of Abraham."
2*78. The Present-perfect tense represents an action or
event as completed at the present time, or in a period of
which the present forms a part ; as, " I have sold mv horse"
— •' I have walked six miles lo-day " — "John has heen busy
this week.
279. The sign of the present-perfect is //arc— inflected, h(is(, h-Jt, or
hath.
280. This tense is used to express an act or state continued through
a perioi of time reaching to the present; "He ho8 nfndicd grammar
six months."
281. It is used to express acts long since completed, when the refer-
ence is not to the ac\ of finishing, but to the thing finished and still
existing; as, "Cicero hus aritttn orations."
282. Sometimes this tense is used in eflfect to deni/ the present ex-
istence of that of which the verb expressesHhe completion ; "I have
hten young "—meaning, this is now finished — I am young no more.
283. The Past tense exprssres what took place in past
time ; as^ " In the beginning God created the heavens"—
62 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
'' God said, Let there be light" — " The ship saik^ when
the mail arrived."
281. The time expressed by this tense^is regarded ae entirdy past'
and, however near to the present, it does not embrace it: as, "I saw
your friend a mf mentago."
285. This tense is used to express what w.i3 customary in past tiuce :
as, " She attended church regularly all her life."
286. The Past-perfect tense represents an action o^
event as completed at or before a certain past time ; as, " 1
had walked six miles that day '' — " John had Jbtcn busy
that week."
287. Thcsjgu of the past-perl'ect is had : second pcrscn, liud^il.
288. The Future tense expresses what will take place
in future time; as, " I will see you again, and your hearts
shall I'c/'oire."
2F9. The Bigna of the future arc .<*/;«//. I'i/f.
2U0. The FuTURE-PERFF.(T tense intimates that an ac-
tion or event will be completed at or befoie a certain time
yet future ', as, " I shall have (jot my lesson by ten o'clock/"
— *• He icill have finished hi.s letter before you are ready. '^
291. The signs of the future perfect are ihull have, uill have.
TENSES OF THE POTENTIAL MOOD.
292. The Potential mood has ./'"t tenses — the Frcrent^
the Present perfect, the Pasty and tbe Past-perftct.
293. The /'/•ef«'«^ potential C'ipres&e.s inescnt* liberty, power; or
obligation. The signs of the Present are, mai/, can^ must. '
294. The signs of the Present perfect iMitcnIiar aire, via^ have, (.(at
hnvf, muHf hnre. ' .., ^^
295. The signs of the Past prtentijil nre. uni/h'f, could, KOuld, shovid,
290. The 8ij|Tifi of the Pa>it-perfect potei Jial "are, iiti^/ht ,yffn e. ci>ii/d
lace, woidd hare, shovid hare. v^:.:"l'^ ■ '^' ' ^ ''-^'-' ■' ^' ^^ ^ •^•' "-
297. The F>/fin->' atiil Fnhirc-ph-ftd arc wanlinjr in tlurrulcudal.
ETYMOLOGY — TENSE. 63
TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
29^ The Subjunctive mood, in its proper forno, has only the
Present 'tense. The verb " to be" has the present and the past.
299. The Present subjunctive, in its proper form, according to
present approved usage, has always a future reference; thus, •' If he
write,^' is equivalent to, " If he should write," or, " I( he shall write."'
Uncertainty or coutiugency respecting a supposed presait action or
state, is expressed by the present indicatire used sulfjunctively; as,
" If he writes as well as he reads, he will succeed."
300. The Present-perfect subjunctive is only the same tense of
the indicative, used subjunctively.
301. The Past subjunctive is used in two senses —
1. It is used to express a past action or state, as conditional or
contingent; as, " If he u-rote that letter he deserves credit, and should
be rewarded."
2. It expresses a suppooition with respect to something present
and implies a denial of the thing supposed ; as, '• If I had the money
now, I would pay it," implying, I have it ugt.
TENSE OF THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
302 The Imperative mood has only the present tense, and thakhas
respect to the time of the command, or exhortation.
TENSES -OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD.
308. The Intinitivc mood has two tenses, the Present
and the Fer/'ecf. These do not so properly denote the
th/ie of the action, &c., as its sfafe ; as, " To write " — '•' To
have written."
304. The Present inhnitivc expresses an act or slate not finished,
indefinitely, or at any time referred to, expressed or implied ; as, " I
wish to write'' — '' I wished tn go'' — " Apt tn teavh.-^
;^.0i>. The sign of tlio pre.sent infinitive 'i9, (<>.
:i06. After the verl» to t,i\ the present infinitive is " sumotiiues used
to expres-s a future action or event: as, " He is to r/o;"' "If we were
to fJO."
04 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
307. The Fii/tTt iufiuitivo expresses an act or state as perfect or
finished, at any time referred to, expressed or implied; as, " He is
said (o have ivritlen." ',
308, The sign of the perfect infinitive is, to have.
H09. In the use of the infinitive, it* is necessary to observe, that
the Present must never be used in circumstances which imply a, jinish-
ed act; nor the Ptr/x-t in circumstances which imply an act not fin-
ished.
QUESTIONS.
What are tenses ? How many, and what are they? Which of
them are simple tenses? Explain the uses of the present tense des-
cribed in Nos. *27t), 2Y7 ? What does the present-perfect represent?
W^hat is its sign ? What is its use in Nos. 280-1-2 ? What does the
past tense express ? What other uses has it ? What does the past-
perfect represent? What is its sign ? How many tenses has the
potential mood ? Name thera. What does the present express?
What are the signs of each of the tenses? .How many tenses has
the Subjunctive ir^ood, properly? Give the substance of 299.
What are the two senses of the past ? How many tenses has the
imperative mood ? How many has the infinitive ? What does each
of thera express ? What are their signs ?
PARTICIPLES.
olO. A Participle is a word which, as a verb, express-
es an action or slate, and, as an adjective, qualifies a noun ;
as, "J/e came seeing'' — •' Having finished our task wem^y
play."
311. Verbs have three participles — ihQ present^ the 7)«sif
and iha perfect ; as, loving^ loved, having loved, in the active
voice ; and being loved, loved, having been loved, in the pas-
sive.
312 The present participle active always ends in ruff. In all
Teibs it has an active signification, and denotes an action Or state
as continuing and progressive; as, "James is building a house. ^
ETYMOLOGY — PARTICIPLES. 65
313. The Present participle passive has always a passive signifi-
cation, but it has the same difference of meaning with respect to the
time or state of the action as the present indicative passive.
3lt. The P'ist participle has the same form in both voices. In the
active voice it belongs equally to transitive and intransitive verbs-
has always an active sense forms, with the auxiliaries, the Present-
perfect and the Past perfect tenses and is never found but thus com-
bined ; as, "has loved," "had loved," k^, In the pnsaive voice it has
always a passive sense, and, with the verb to he as an auxiliary,
forms the passive voice; as, "lie is loved;" or without it, qualifies
a noun or pronoun : as, "A man loved by all, hated, by none." The
difference between Ifee active and the passive participle will be seen
in the following example, viz. Active "He ha? comenled a dagger
under his cloak;" PAssiVE---"He has a dagger co/icta/rd under his
cloak."
."US. The r<yf<et participle is always compound, and represents an
action or state as completed at ihe time referred to. Ithas always an
active sense iu the active voice, and a passive sense in the passive :
as, AcTiTji: ''Huvinyjinished our task, jtc may play." Passivk : "Our
task hariiuj been finished, we may play.
3l<!. The Prf5f;i^ participle active, tind the Fast participle pas-
eive, when separated from the idea of time, become adjectives, and
are usually called /?(/;'^jt7/)mi adjectives; as, ^^ An amusing sioxy^' —
" A bound book."
3 IV. The participle in m^ is often used as a verbal /?own,having the
nominative and objective cases, but not the possessive. In this
character, the participle of a transitive verb may still retain the
government of the verb ; as, " In keepinfj his commandments there is
great reward ;''" or, it may be divested of it by inserting an article
betore it, and the preposition o/ after it ; as, " In the keeping o/hia
commandments." When q/" follows the participle, Me should precede
it. But o/can not be used before a preposition.
NUMBER ANJ3 PERSON.
318. Every tense of the verb has two Numbers, the Singular and
the Plural^ corresponding to the singular and plural of nouns and
pronouns.
66 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
319. In each number, the Terb has tbree Persons, called the
first, second, and ihird. The first asserts of the person speakuvj ; the
eejond, of the person spnhpn tn ,- uud the tliiril (•(' I lie person or
thing spoken of.
A'lO. The subject of the verb, in the fir^t peraon lingular, is al-
ways 7, in the plural we : in the second person singular thou ; in
the plural, >/e or j/oii : in the third person, the su\iject is- llie name
of any person or thing spoken of, or a pronoun of the third per-
^jou, in its stead ; a^so it may be an inlinitivc mood, or a claus,^ of
a sentence, or any thing of which a person can thiiik or .speak.
32 J. In ordinary discourse, the ini[ierative mood has only the^
second i>crsou, because a comnittml, cxftordilion, &c., can lie address-
ed only to the jicrson f<}>vlc/i to.
32?. In such expressions as ' f.'i 119 fort"--- ' L>i him A. »■-•"-. -"./c«
///.cw;t /ut-e"- -phrases by which the first .and the third person of the
imperative in some languages are rendered' --let is the proper imper-
ative in the second person, with tJioa or ^utt as its subject underPtocd,
and loie the infinitive without the si^n. Thus, "Let [f/ion] us love," '
<tc.
3211 This mode of expression is sometimes used, when no definite
individual is addressed; as, " Lot there be li^bt."
.H24. Among the poet?:, however, we' sometimes fiud a jlr.'^t and a
third in the imperative : as, '** Confide tre in ourselves alone" -
" With virtue we be armed."'— -//'/^t's Ta^so. "And refit ^'-rhere, Ma-
tilda said."- --/S''■o^^ . \
825. Such oxprcssutns as *' Hallowed ba thy uama'"- — '* Thy king- j
dom come,''---" Bo it enacted"---" So be it," Ac, may be regarded \
cither as examples of the third person iu the imperative, or as ollip-
tioal for " '/"^/' or " Let ii bft enacted"-- " Let it bo so," Ac.
826. The zp_//»(7itc', because it usually has no subject, has neither
number or person.
CONG LIGATION.
327. The CON (u;< J ATI ON of a verb is the regular combi.
nation and arrangement of* i(:s several voices, Dmnds, teiut^.
numbers and pcrwn^.
ETYMOLOGY — COXGUGATION. 67
328. In the active voice iiioat verbs have three forms — the Com-
mon, the Progressive, and the Emphatic.
1. The Common form expresses the simple existence of the tact ;
as, "He speaks" — "She tcrites" — "They (xlk.''
2. The /'roy7T5«u' e form represents an action as begun, and in
progress, but not com})letcd^ It is formed by annexing the
present participle to the verb *7o be,' through all its moods
and tenses; as, ^'■I am tvriling," &c.
3. The Eiitphaik expresses a fact with empliasis. It is formed by
prefixing do in the present and did in the past ; as, "7 do
learn" — ^'I did leurn,"
329. To these may be added, the nofciim form of the third person
singular, present indicative, ending in (h, or <;'/', instead of the lu/*/ -
vion, in s or c«. Thus — solemn fornc, lovcth, hath lorn/; common,
lofr.8, has loccd.
330. The tenses of the verb, iutiected without an auxiliary are
called Simple tenses, those inflected with an auxiliary are called
Compound tenses.
331. The only regular terminations added to the verbs are —
1. The tejisc^ndings : dov cr/ of the past tense ; andm^ of the present .
participle.
2. The personal cndinys ; si, or est, of the second person singular;
. and *, <^6', or c^/i, of the third. The other changes are made
by auxiliaries.
332. In the present and past tenso, when xi will easily coalesce
with the final consonant, it is added in the s:imc syllable ; as, miidnt,
lovedst. But when it will not easily coalesce, or the verb ends in a
vowel sound, cut is commonly added, and forms another syllabic; as,
icishcst, (eacheat, lovcst, ijoest, draiorst, sai/cnf, vcjcsf, bleHnext, &g.
33J. In the present indicative, the endings of the third person sin-
gular, H or en, are subject to the rules for tbe plural number of nouns ;
as, Kits, reads, xcishcs, teaches, lovcn, (joes, draics, carrtci, suijs, <tc.
32^4. In the solemn style, instead of s ores, the third person singu-
lar ha^ e'h, which always ad^s a syllable, except in doth, hath, naitlt
for doeth, harefh, saycth.
335. The verb need is often used in the third person singular of the
present tense, without the personal ending; as, 'The truth «ec(^ not
be disguised" — **It need net be added."
o30. The principal parts of the vcrlt arc llic Prescul
indicative^ the Past indicative and the Fast participle. lo
08
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
parsing, the mentioning of these parts is called congu-l^
gating the verb. Thus : — i
Present. Past. Past particiflc*
Reguhtr Love, loved, loved.
Irregular' AVrile, wrote, ^ written.
237. The irreguhir and intrHnsitive verb "^ 6r," is used as a prin-
cipal verb, and also as an auxiliarj in the passive voice, and in the
progressive form of the active voice. It is thus inflected through
all its moods and tenses.
CONGUGATION OF THE VERB TO BE.
Present., ».m. 7'<^6/, was, Past pa rticij)le, been.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Sinf/ular
1. I am.
2. Thou art.
3. He is.
rUESENT TEXSE.
Plural.
1. We are.
2. You are.
'.J. Thej are.
1. I have been.
2. Thou hast been.
3^ He has been.
rUEtJEiNT-rERFECT TENSE.
Sign. have.
1. Wo have been.
2. You have been.
3. Thev have been.
1. I was.
2. Thou wast.
3. He was.
PAST TENSE.
1. We were.
2. You were.
3. They were.
I>AST-1'EUFEC'J
Sign, ?ia(f.
. I had been.
2. Thou hadst been!
3, He had been.
1. We had been.
2. You had been.'
3. They had been.
ETYMOLAGY — CONGUGATION. 60
FUTURE TENSE.
Signs, s/<«//, loill, — Inflect with each.
Singulars Plural.
1. I shall be. 1. We shall be.
2. Shon Shalt be. 2. You shall be.
3. He shall be. 3. They shall be.
PUTURE-PERPKCT TENSE. '
Signs, shallhave, willhave. — Inflect with each.
1. I shall have been. 1. We shall have been.
2. Thou sbalt have been. » *2. You shall have been.
3. He shall have been, 3. The}' shall have been.
POTENTIAL MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
Signs, may, can, must. — Inflect with each.
1. I maybe. 1. We may bo.
2. Thoumaystbe. • 2. You may be.
3. He may be. 3. They may be.
PRESENT-PERFECT TENSE.
Signs, may have, can have, or munt have — Inflect with each.
1. I may have been. 1. We may have been.
2. Thou mayst have been. 2. You may have been.
3. He may have been. 3^ They may have been
PAST TENSE.
Signs, might, could, would, sho>uld. — Inflect with each =
1. I might be, 1. We might be.
2. Thou niightst be. 2. You might be
3. He might be. 3. They might be.
PAST- PERFECT TENSE.
Signs, might have, could have, would have, should have Inflect with
each.
1. I might have been. 1. Wgrnighthave been.
2. Thou mightst have bepu, 2, You might have been.
3. He Bttight have been. 3. They mighthave been.
72 ENOLTSIT OTIAMMAR.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PKKSKXr tenSe.
Singular. Plural.
■•1. If I be. 1. If we he,
2. If thou be. ' ' 2. If you be.
3. If he be. 3. If ihey be.
PAST* TENSE.
1. If I were, 1. If we were. 1
2. If thou wert, or wore. 2. If you were.
3. If he were. 3. Iflheywere.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Siuguhtr. Plural.
1. Be, or be thou 2.. Be, or be ye or you.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. PERFECT TENSE.
To be. To h.ave been.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, Being. Past, Been. Perfect, Having been,
1:538. All the tenses of the indicative, and also of the
potential mood, are used siibjunctively, by placing the
conjunction before them, thus : Present — *'lfl am," "If
thou art," ^'Ifhe is," &e. Prcaenf perfect — "If I have
been," &e. Past—'-lil was," &c.
'..'59. The verl) to //<• followed by an inflnitive, forms a particular
future tense, which often expresses </"/.'/, ii'-res^ili/, or ^<»/7)o»c ; as,
.'Government is to be .suppi rted." — "Wemr to pay onr debts."
T^ARSTNG.
340. A verb is parsed by stating irs class (transitive
or intran?;itive), its /orm (regular or irregular)^ conguga'
ETVAroT.nriY — PK^po^TTT^>^^i^. 71
ting it^Sind staling its t^isfi, moo(f, voice, person^ an»i num-
ber, and also the snhject of which it affirms ; thus,
'•He ii " — h is a verh, intransitive, irregular— «»?, was, been — f«)und
in the present, indir-ative, active -thini person, singular, and nffirraa
of its subject, Ir.
M\. Parsinu; witli llic reasons :
Is — a vcrh, because it afTirms being or existence of " ffi."
intraiisitire — it has no object.
in-rrjular — Its past tense and past particicle do not end in eJ—
am, iiuifi, been.
present — it refers to present time.
7'H/^//oa^"re— it declares simply and without limitation.
active — its subject is not acted upon.
third pcrfioii — its subject in spoken of,
singular — -it asserts cf but one, "He,"
PROPOSITIONS.
;M2. Every proposition must liavc & snhject tiwd predL
cafe. Tlie subject may be a noun , pronoun, or j^^^^^^j^^^
must always be in the nominative case. The predicate
must be a verb, in the indicative, subjunctive or poten-
tial mood. Ifllie predicate is the verb "to be," it will
be followed by a noun, pronoun, adjective or phrase^
which is called the (lescriptive.
^ EXERCISES,
1 Stato^the innee, moody fu-Ron and nuinler, of the terb "to bi<," in
the following examples : thus, "Am," present indicative, active, Grst
person, singular.
Am, is, art, I was, we were, tliey are, you have been,
she had.been, he was, he will be, they shall.be, we had
been, htist been, hadst been, wast.
We may be, they may have been, he might be, you
might have been, you must be^they should havebe^n
72 ENGLISH r.KAMMAE.
if I be, thou wert, though lie were, if I luid been, though
I were, if we coukl have been, they might be.
13e, to be, do ihou be, be ye, to have been, being, been,
having been, be thou.
2. la tae following propositions, tell the suhject, predicate and
descriptive, and parse each word carefully.
Snow is white. Soh)nian was a wise man. Time is
preeious. Trutli is powerful. Falsehood is base. Al-
exander was a great conqueror. You shou d be dili-
gent. The telegraph is a useful jnvention. If you be
attentive, 3'ou will be a good scholar. If they had beeji
diligent, they would have been wiser. Be careful.
Honesty is the best policy. " Wisdom is the principal
thing." " Counsel is mine, I am under.-tanding."
CONJUGATION OF THE REr,ULAR VERB, " TO LOVE."
o43. The regular transitive verb " To love'' is Inflect-
ed through all its moods and tenseSj as follows : —
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pre3e?it, love. Past, loved. Ftiftt pariici/jle, loved,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRKSENT TENSE.
Singular. Plural.
1. I love. ], We love.
2. Thou lovest. 2. i^ou love.
3- He loves {or loveth). H. They love,
PRESENT- PERFECT TENSE.
Sign, hni'^.
1. I have loved. 1. We have loved.
2. Thou hast loved. 2. You have loved/
9. He has loved. 3. They have loved.
*v- ^^•^i■ic^•■::'s^-s«!p:^^f .
I
ElYMOLOGY — CONJUaATION, ^^
PA'^T TENSK.
1. T loved. 1. We loved.
2. Thou lovedst. 2. You loved. .
i. He loved. 3. They loved. , J
Past PERFECT tense.
Sign, hud.
1. I had loved. 1. We had loved.
2. Thou hadst loved, 2. You had loved.
3. He had loved. 3. T^hcy "bad loved.
future tense.
SigQF, shaU, will. — Inflect with each.
1. I shall love. 1. We shall love.
2. Thou Shalt love. ' 2. You shall love.
3. He sh ill love. 3. They shalUove.
FUTURE PERFECT TKN.SE.
Signs, shall have, will have. — Inflect with each.
1. I shall have loved. 1. We shall have loved.
2. Thou shult have loved, 2. You shall have loved.
3. He shall have loved. 3. They shall have loved.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
o
PRESENT TENflE.
Sign-?, mat/ can, inuf.i. — Inflect With each.
Singular. Plural.
1. I may love. 1, We may love.
2. Thou mayst love, 2. You may love.
3. He may love. 3. They may love.
Present-perfect tense,
Signs, may have, cdn hive, must have. — Inflect with each,
1. 1 may have loved. 1. We may have lovac"
2. Thou mayst have loved. 2. You may have JO^^d.
9t He may have loved. 3< They may have loved.
EXGLL^n ORAMMAB.
FAST Tf:NSE.
Signs, iiii'jht, co'uldj irunhl, sJinvld. — Tnllect with CAch.
, 1. I might love. 1. Wc might love.
2i Thou mightst love. '-. Voii might love.
3. He might love. 3. They iuii^'hl love.
PAST PFRVKCT tt:n.sf:.
UignS, might have, couhf hare, v^^nhl hare, ahorilif have. — loflicivvith
each.
1. I thigbt have loved. 1. We might hojie loved.
2. Thou mightst have loved. 2. Von might have loved.
3. He might have loved.. 3. They miglit have loved.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TL'KSE.
/Singular, rUiral.
1. If I love, 1. If we love.
2. If thou love. -. If you love.
3. If he love. 3. It they love.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
l^hiijuhir. riural.
Common form ^ 2. Love, &/• love thou,- 2 Love, or love ye o;- yoil
Emphatic prm. 2. Do thou love. 2. Do ye o;- you love.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Prksent, to love. I^krfkct, to have loved
r
. PARTTCTPLES.
Present, loving. Past, loveil. Pr.uKKrT, having loved.
T'ARRTN(K
344. John loves learning.
*'L(fve8." — db verb, transitive, reijHhir, coajugated ^orf, loced, hv-
•fd — f9UU4 IX^ ti)a,9 J>rQ8eiit indicative, avtlv», third jierio'i, Bingularp and
tTl'MOLOGt — PARSING <5
■"..'■ »
exp^egse^ the act of "John." This is called parsing, iu which the
pame order of statement should always be olse ved.
' 315. This may be extended, by giving tbo reas ns of each state-
ment, as follows : ,
• 'Loves."— a r^rb, because it expresses an dct of ita subject.
trAnaititf, because it has an object — feaniuifj.
reijiilnr', because its past tense and participle ends in eci.
coiiJu<ja\ed, lov*, love J, loved.
prt^^eiit, it exprofises what Joha does 'iiov;,
iiidirnticc, it expresses the act aimjjfjj,
liciiiti, it represents the subject as mtiog.
third person. \U subje<?t is spokeo of.
HI ny alar, it ass rts of only o;i*,
T^XERCISE T.
Inflect the following irregular veibs in tie same n: at nerae the verb
' to love" :
Present. Pusl. Pasi participle.
Go went gone
Write wrote writtea
Do - vdid . done
Fall IVll fallen
Give gHve giveti
Have had bad
ITJCERCISE TT.
Name the parts of each proposition, and parse all the words.—
The auxiliaries are not taken separattlv : thus, 7/«* loitd, is a verb,
•fee, mUfht have loved is a Verb, Ac.
He lovos. Wo have loved. lie l.ved. They had
loved. You shall love. The}' may ht vo Ic.ved. Wo
might love. Love thou. To love. You had gone. — ■
They will go. To have gone. We will write. They
may write. They should go. lie has fallen. You had
given We might have gone. James has written.—.
Robert loves to write. To write is useful. Having
written. We gave. They have given. They will give,
76 ENGLISH QRAMMAJl.
316. A transitive verb in the activQ voice, must havo a noun Oj
pronoun as its t-bject, wliich is always in the objective case. Hence
a transitive verb ui;\kes a tran?itivo proposition. In the following
exercise, name the parts of the propositjori, and parse each word.
lie lovcR US. I Will love him. Good boy? stiuly
their lossons. Cli'ldicn love to play. God created iho
world. Uemcinbci* thy Creator. Do goo^l to all men.
Forgive your enemii'S. You slioitld stud}'' grammar. —
AVe should read the best books. Bad books injure the
character. War makes rogues, peace hai.gs them. —
ChiUlrcn obe}' j^our parents. A good cause makes a
strong arm. Time flics. Evil communications corrupt
good manners. Punctuality begets confidence. Co-
lumbus discovered America.
317. The verb is made to deny, by placing the word not after the
simple form.
348. In the infinitivo and participle?, the negative is put first : as,
« Not to love^'— "Not loving."
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PllKSfiNt. 1
I do not love.
2.
Thou dost not love, kc.
PbK3-Pi:u. 1.
I have not loved.
2.
Thou hast not loved, &c.
Past. 1.
I did not love.
2,
Thou didst not love, &c.
Past-Picr I.
I had not loved.
•2.
Thou hadst not loved, &c.
Future. 1-
I will not love.
2.
Thou wilt not love, &c.
FuT Pkr. 1.
I shall not have
2.
thou Shalt not have loved,
loved.
&c.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Present. 1. I can not love. 2. Thou canst not love, &o. • «
Pues-Pkr 1. I may nothave loved. 2. Tliou raayst not have lovedjj'
2. Thou mightst not love, &c. . ' j
Past. 1- I might not love.
Past Pi R. 1. I raigljt not have
2. Thon mightst not have iov-'" 1
loved.
ed, &c. ■ ' ■ '^ 1
„
^1
ETYMOLOGY — CONJUGATION. 77
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. 1. 1/ 1 do not love 2, T^tboudo not love, &c,
lAJPI^RATlVE MOOD.
Singular. Plural.
2. Love not, or do not thou love. 2. Love not. or do ye not love,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present. Not to love. PaiiFECx. Not to bvivc lovtd,
PARTICIPLES.
Pretext. Not loving. Past. Not loved.
Perfect. Not having loved.
Intcrrogat lie form o/ the Tcrh.
319. The verb is made to ask a question by plating the nomina-
tive or subject after the simple form ; as, "Lovcst thou? " and be-
tween the au.xiliary and the verb in the compound forms ; " Do I
love?" When there are two auxiliaries, the nominative is placed
between them; as, "Shall I have loved?"
350. The subjunctive, imperative, infinitive, and participles, can
not have the interrogative form.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
Do I love .'
o
Dost thou love.' &c.
Pres.-Per
Have I loved .'
2
Hast thou loved .• &c.
Pa'T.
Did I love'
')
Didst thou love.' cS:c.
Past Per.
Had I loved .'
2_
Hadst thou loved .' &c.
Future.
Shall I love.'
O
Wilt thou love.' kG.
Fut,-Per.
Shall I have
Q loved ,'
2.
Wilt thou have loved .' &c.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Preseivt.
1.
May I love ?
Pre8.-Per.
1.
May I have
loved .'
Past.
1.
Might I love ':
Pabt-PkR
1.
Might I have
loved '
Canst thou love ' &.C.
Canst thou have loved ? &c.
Couldst thon love.' &c.
Couldst thou have loved .' &c.
78 ENGLISH GRAMMAE.
851. lutorrogativc sentences are made negative by placing the
negative either before or after the nominative ; as," Do 1 not love ?"
or, " Do not I love ' "
Proijressive fori)} of ihe Acfh-e Voire.
352. The PiiOGREbi-ivK form of the verb is inflected b}' prefixing
the verb to be, through all its moods and ten&cs, to the present
participle ; thus —
Presetvi'. 1, I am writing. 2. Thoxi art writing, kc.
PRKs.-rER. 1. I have been wri- 2 Thou h;i:^t been writing, &c.
ting
pA(*T. 1 I wa:> writing. 2. Thou wast writing. &c.
Past-Per. 1. 1 had been wri- 2. Thou liadst been writing, &,c.
ting. .
FrruE. ] I bhall be wri- 2. Thou shalt be writing, &c.
ting.
Fut.-Per. 1. 1 shall (>r will 2. Thou shalt or wilt have been
have been writing. writing, &c.
353. EMPHATIC FORM.
PRESKiNT TEXSK.
1 I do love. 1. We do love.
2. Thou dost love. 2. You do love
3. He does love. 3. They do love.
PAST TENSK.
1. I did love. 1. We did love.
2. Thou didst love. 2. You did love.
3. He did love. 3. They did love. '
EXERCISES. O
1. Change the following verbs from tho simple into the progressive
and emphaHc form.s : —
He writes. They road. Tliou. tt^acliest. W.o. have
learned. He bad written. They go. Y« u will build.
Iran. John has done it. We taught. He stands.
ETYMOLOGY— CON JUG AT roN"; ^79
Ho .slu(xl. Tlioy will stand. They may read. We
c »n sew. You should study. . We iiiigbt have read.
2. Change tbc followiog, from the progrtvji-, o into the simple and
emphatic fbrins :— '
We arc writing. They were Fingiog. They havo
been riding. We might be walking. I ma}' have been
sleeping. They are coming. Thou art teaching. They
have been eating. He has been moving. W^o havo
been defending.
9. Parie tKe'Ke verbs, in each lortn ; thus," We nr<' n-riting" — "arti
vritiiiq" is a verh. tranBitive, irregular — n:ritc, irrote, nridev — in the
pre»er»t, indie itiv.\. active, first i>crson, plural, pregressive form.
f»AS.SIYE VOICE.
.3^4. The Passive voice is inflected b}' adding tho
past partiQJple to Uie verb '' /o te," as an auxiliary,
through all its moodts and tenses, thus : —
TRINCIPAL TAUrS.
Pffscni, Am luvcd. Past,, Was loved. Paf^t participle, loved,
INDICATIVE M<)')D
. . , rUtSENT TKNSi:.
Singular Plural.
1 I am loved. 1. We are loved.
2. Thou art loved 2. You arc loved.
3. He is level. o. They are loved.
rRKSi:N T-1'KKH:CT TENSi:.
1. T Imve been loved. 1. Wc have been loved.
2. Thou hast'^ been loved. 2. I'ou have been loved.
8 Jle lias been loved, 3. They have been lovef].
so ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
PAST TENSE.
1. I was loved.^ 1. We were loved.
2. Thou wast loved. 2. Vou were loved.
;). lie was loved. 3. They were loved.
PAST-PERFKCT TEN"»E.l
Sign, had.
1. 1 had been loved. 1. We hnd been loved.
2. Thou luidstbeen loved. 2. You had been lovfedii-
8. lie had been loved. 3, Thej had been loved.
FUll'UE TENSE.
Signs, shall, will. — Inflect with encb.
1. T shfill be loved. 1. We shall be loved.
2. Thou sbalt be loved. 2. You shall beloved.
3. He shall be loved. 3. They shall be loved.
FUTURE-PERFECT TENSE.
Signs, iJiall have, uill have. — Inflect with each.
1. I shall liave bccu loved. 1 We shall have bee)CJ loved.
2. Thou sbalt have been loved. 2. You shall have been loved.
3. He shall have been loved. 3. They shall have been loved.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
Signs, may, ran, nmst. — Inflect with each*.
Singular. Pltual.
1. I may be loved. 1. We may be loved.
2. Thou mayst be loved. 2. You may be loved.
3. lie may be loved. 3. They may be loved.
PRESENT-PERFECT TENSE.
Siprns, may have, can have, must have. — Inflect with each,
1. I may have been loved. 1 . We may have been loved.
2. Thou mayst have been loved 2. You may have been loved.
6. He may have been loved. 3. They may have i>een lovedt
ETYMOLOGY — ^^C()NJIJ(JAT10N. 81.
PAST TENSE.
SignF, might, could, ico'uld, «Aoj«?c/.— Inflect with each.
1. I might be loved. ' 1.. We might be loved.
2. Thou mightst be loved. 2- You, might be loved,
Sf. tic might be loved. ' 3. They might be loved,
PAST-PERFKCT TENSE.
Signs, might have, could hare, tcdttld have, should have. — Inflect with
each.
I. I might have been loved. 1. W6 might have been loved.
I. Thou mightst have been loved. 2 You might have been loved.
3. He might have been loved. 3. They might have been loved.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular. Plural.
1. If I beloved. 1. If wc be loved.
2. If thou be loved 2. If jou be loved
3. If ho be loved. . A. If they, be loved.
P.\ST TKNSE.
1. If I were loved. 1. If wc were loved,
1. If thou wertt»/ were loved. 2. If you were loved.
3. If he were loved. . 3 If they were loved.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
iiinf^ular. Plural.
2, Be thou loved. 2. Be ye o/ you loved.
. INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present, To be loved. Perfect, To have been loved
PARTICIPLES.
Pres.. Being loved. Past, Loved. Per., Haying been loved.
4b
82 ENGLISH GKA31MAR.
PROGRESSIVE PASSIVJE.
355. Nearly all gratnmarians condemn the use of the
progressive passive as improper ; but if the practice of the
best speakers and writers, is a legitimate standard, such
forms must be accepted. "The house is heivg huih;"
'' The money teas beivg raised," are samples of this form.
EXERCISES.
1. In the following txercisee, tell the tpnsr mnod, vo'cr, nvnihcr and
person, and always in thie order, viz : "Is loved " — present indica-
tive, passive, third person, singular.
They are loved ; we were loved ; thou art loved; it is
loved ) she was loved ; he has been loved ; you have been
loved ; I have been loved -, thou hadatbecn loved ; we shall
be loved ; thou wilt be loved ; they will be loved ; I shall
have been loved ; you will have been loved.
He can be loved ; thou mayst be loved ; she must be
loved ; they might be loved ] ye would be loved ; they
should be loved; I could be loved; thou mayst have been
loved ; it may have been loved ; you might have been loved ;
if I be loved ; thou wcrt loved ; we be loved ; they be
loved. Be thou loved ; be ye loved ; you be loved. To be
loved ; loved ; having been loved ; to have been loved ; be-
ing loved.
2. Put the above exercisep, first in the negative form, and then, ia
the indicative and the potential mood, in the interrogative form.
QUESTIONS.
Conjugate the verb to he through all its moods and tenses. Give
all the signs of the tenses. AVhat is a tense sign ? How are the
indicative and potential moods use subjunctively ? What parlicn-
Jar future is formed by ^o 6e .^ How ie a verb parsed? Parse is
ETYMO^LOGY — VERBS — IRREGULAR.
83
both ways. How many parts hns a proposition? What may the
subje.ctbe? What case? What runy the predicate be ? What
m6od? When the verb to be is predicnto, what mnst follow? Con-
jugate the verb to love. Parse loves both way?. When a transitive
verb is predicate what n^ust follow? How many parts has a transw
itive proposition ? Give the negative form of the verb. Give thft.
interrogative form. Conjugate fhe progressive form. The emphat-
ic form. How is the passive voice formed ? Conjugate the passive.
What is said of the passive progressive "i* -
LREEGULAI^ VEEBS.
35G. An IRREGULAR vcrb is cue that does not form itk'^
past tense in tlio ttidicalivo active, and its past partici-
ple by addin;;- rd lothc ]!rof?cnt.
457. The following Hat couijjrisfs nearly all the irregular verbs
in tbelanguago. These conjugated regularly, aa well as irre|rular!y.
aretnarkod with an R. Those in >'UrI>c^ are obsolete, or obsolescent*
and DOW but HI tic used •• •?
Present.
r.Mt.
I'asl Farik'q>ie^
Abide
abode
abode
Am
was
been
AriiiC
arooc
ai'iseu
Awake
nwokc; U
awaked
Bake
bakod
baked, bakcn
Bear, to ht ifig frrt/i
bore, hair
born
Bear, (o carrj/
boro. bare
borne
Beat
beat
beaten, beat
Begin
began
begun
Bend
bent, R
bfeut. K.
Bereave
bereft. R
bereft, R
Beseech
besought
besoi!g!-it
Bid
bid, bade
bidden, bid
Bind, un-
bound
bound
Bite
bk.
bitten, bit
Bleed
bkd
bled
Blow
blew-
blown
Break
broke ;6r«/ie
broken, brok^.
S4
ENGLISH GEAMMAB.
Tresent,
Past,
Past Participle.
Breed
bred
bred
Dring
brought
brought
Build, re-
built, R,
built, R.
Burn
burnt. R.
burnt, R
Burst
burst
burst
Buy
bought
bough t
Cast
cast
cast
Catch
caught R.
caught, R,
Chide
chid
chidden, chid
Choose
chose
chosen
Cleave, to adhere
cleaved, clave
cleaved
Cleave, to split
cleft, clave
cleft, R. cloven
Cling
clung
clung
Clothe
clad,R.
clad. R
Come, Ac-
came
come
cost
cost
cost
Creep
crept
crept
Crow
crew, R.
crowed
Cut
cut
cut
Dare, to venture
durst
dared
Dare to challenge,
R. dared
dared
Deal
dealt
dealt, R
Dig
dug, R.
dug, R.
Do, mis- un-
did
done
Draw
drew
drawn
Dream
dreamt, R
dreamt, R.
Drink
drank
drank, drunk
Drive
drove
driven
Dwell
dwelt, R.
dwelt, R.
Eat
ate, eat
eaten
Fall, he-
fell
fallen
Feed
fed
fed
Feel
felt
felt
Fight
fought
fought
Find
found
found
Flee
fled
fled
Fling
flung
flung
Fly
flew
flown
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS — IR REGULAR.
85
Present.
Past.
Forbear
forbore
Forget
forgot
Forsake
forsook
Freeze
froze
Get, be- for-
gotj gat
Gild
gilt, R.
Gird, be- en-
girt, R,
Give, /or- mis-
gave
Go, under -
went
Grave, en- R,
graved
Grind
ground
Grow
grew
Hang
hung
Have
had
Hear
heard
Heave
hove, R.
Hew
heved
Hide
hid
Hit
hit
Hold, be- with-
heid
Hurt
hurt
Keep
. kept
Kneel
knelt, R.
Knit
knit, R,
Know
knew
Lade, to load
laded
Lay
laid
Lead, mis-
Led
Leave
left
Lend
lent
Let
let
Lie, to recline
lay
Light
lighted, lit
Lose
lost
Mflkc
made
Mean
meant
Xlcet
met
Mow
mowed
Past Participle.
forborne
forgotten, forgot
forsaken
frozen
gotten, got
gilt, R.
^vi, R.
gi^en
gone
graven, graved
ground
grown
hung
had
heard
hoven, R.
hewn, R.
hidden, hid
hit
held, holden
hutt
kept,
kjjelt, R.
kni*^ knitted
known
laden
laid
led
left
lent
let
lain, lien
lighted, lit
lost
made
meant
met
mown
86
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Present.
Past
Past participle.
Pay, re-
• paid
p"aid
Ton, to enclose
pentjR.
pent, R.
Put
put
put
Quit
■ quit, R;
quit, R.
Read
read
lead
Rend
rent
rent
Rid
rid
rid
Ride
rode, rid
ridden, rid
Ring
rang. rung
lung
Rise, a-
rose
lisen
Rive
rived
riven, R.
Rot
rotted
rotten, R
Run
ran. f ftn
run
Saw
sa'wed
sawed, R.
Say
said
snid
See
saw
seen
Seek
sought
sought
Seethe
seethed, sod
seethed, sodden
Sell
sold
Fold
Send
sent
sent
Set, Ac-
set
get
Shake
ebook
shaken
Shape, mis-
eliaped
shapen, R
Shave
thaved
shaven, R
Shear
sheared
shorn, R*
Shed
shed
shed
Shine
shone, R'
shone, R.
Shoe
shod
shod
ShoDt
shot
shot
Show
showed
shown, R
Shrink
shrunk, sh) aiik
shrunk
Shred
shred
shred
Shut
shut
shut
Sing
sang, sung
<-ung
Sink
sunk, sank
sunk
Bit
sat
sat
Slay
slew
slain
Sleep
slept
slept
ETYMOLOGY — VERBS—
-IKREGULAR.
Present,
Past.
Past participle.
Slide
slid
slidden, slid
Sling
slung, slang
slung
Slink
slunk
slunk
Slit
slit
slit, slitted
Smite
smote
smitten
Sow, to scatter
sowed
sown, K.
Speak, he-
spoke, spake
spoken
Speed
sped
sped
Spell
6pe?t. R.
spelt, R.
Spend, mis-
spent
spent
Spill
spilt, R.
' spilt, R. .
Spin
spun, span
spun
Spit, be-
spit, spat
spit
Split
split
split
"Spread, be-
spread
spread
Spring
sprang, sprung
sprung
Stand, with-. &c-
stood
stood
Steal
stole
stolen
Stick
stuck
stuck
Sting
stung
stung
Stride, be-
strode, strid
stridden, strid
Strikc
^ truck
struck, stricken
String
strung
strung
Strive.
strove
striven
Strew, 6c-
strewed
strewed, strewn
Strow, Re-
strowod
strewed, strown
swear
swore, sware
sworn
Sweat
sweat, R.
sweat, R.
Sweep
swept
swept
Swell
swe'led
swollen, R.
Swim
swam ur swum
swum
Swing-
swung
swung
Take, 6c-, &c,
took
taken
'J each, mis- re-
taught
taught
Tear
tore, ^rt re
torn
Tell
told
told
Think be-
(■bought
thought
Thriye
thrived, throve
thriven, R.
8T
88
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
,, . y
■ '{TA
Present.
Throw
Tlr ust
Tread
Past.
thiew
thrust
trod
Past participle.
thrown
tlirust
trodden, trod
Wax
wuxed
waxen, R.
Wear
•were
worn
'' ''
Weave
wove
woven
Weep
Wet
wept
wet, R,
wept
.wet, R.
Whet
whet, R.
whet.R.
Win
Wind
won
wound, R.
won
wound
Work •
wrought, R.
wrought, R.
Wring
Write
.wrung, R.
wrote
wrung
written
DEFECTIVE VEKBS.
358. A Defective verb is one in which some of the
parts are Avanting. The following list comprises the
most important. They are irregular, and chiefly aux-
iliary : —
Present.
Past.
Present.
Past.
Can
could
Shall
should
May
Must
might
Will
Wist
would
wist
Ought
Quoth
359. Ought,
origin
quoth
Imperatii
ally the y
)asi
Wit, )
Wot 5
-Beware.
t teusc of owe,
U
wot
now used to
signify present
duty,
and must,
to
denote present
obligation or ne»
cessity.
IMPiJRFONAL VERBS.
360. hvjycrsonul verbs arc thok' which assert ihe ex-
ETYMOLOGY — EXERCISES. 89
*
istence of some action or state, but refer it to no par-
ticular subject. They are always in the third person
eingufar, and in Englisli are preceded by the pronoun
k '; as, ''It rains"— It hails"— ''It hehooves,*' &c. ■ '^"^^ "
361. To this class of words belong the expressions, /n^TAin^*,
methought ; nusectns, ?iiesccvicd ; someiimes used for ''Jt seems
to me"— "It appears to me" &c.
EXERCISES.
1. Cpnjugato tho following irregular verba, and tell which are tran-
»itive, and which are also regul.ar,
Take, drive, creep, begin, abide, buy, bring, arise,
catch, bereave, am, burst, draw, drink, fly, flee, faJI, get,
give, go, feci, forsake, grow, have, hear, hide, keep,
know, lose, pay, ride, ring, shake, run, seek, sell, see,
fit, slay, slide, smite, speak, stand, tell, win, write,
weave, tear.
EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING PARTS OF SPEECH.
Tell what kind of a preposition and give the parts ; parse each
word carefu'lj-,
[The words in Italics are/'ro/'osi7io;?cS, and the nouns oriiroripuns
following them are in the objective case.]
The wind f^hakes the trees. The apples fell ^o the
grou' d. Cod created all things. The heavens are the
work of his liands.
Alexander the Great conquered many countries. The
sun shines. The fields are covered with grain. The
crops are excellent. The rivers run into the sea. A
good man shows pity to the poor. The fear of the Lord
is the beginning of wisdom. Eemember thy Creator in
the days o/ thy 3'outh. Time flies. All things come
foanerid. A bad man can not be happy. Redeem
time. Do good to all men. Truth is mighty.
90 ENGLISH GRAAIMAR.
ADYEEBS.
332. An Adveri; is a word, j'^ined to a i^erb, ah «<:?-
;>(:?ii;e^ or another mhuiih, to inudify it,, or lo denoie
some ci rciinistanpe respect ini;- i L ", as . '* A n r. speaks dk-
tinctlff ; she in remar/uibly diligent, and rcadn very car-
recthj,"
'^^?>. Anadrerl) li geneT-ally rnuivulent to fi modifying pbrapp. or
a-^juDct of the wori to wbich it is joined. Thus, in the i re'«cding
example, ' ditilinclfj/" mettni^, in a dint'w.-l vnuincr ; "rcmoihnhhf," i'» a
rtiu'ii ktible decree. Ilenco, a-'verbs ard adv rbial a<)juiicts are often
u»ed indiscriminately in modifying verbs, adjectives, aiid adver'be.
864, On the eaiuo }irinciplo that an jidverb modifies another adverb,
it somotirnes also modirt^a an a'lju'^ct, a phrase, or a s'onteno, ; as,
* I met your brother far front, home." ,■
365. An adjunct, .without tiie word to which it belongs, is called
an adverbial j^hrase ; as, in $h<or t, in vain, «" ffentral, a( most, at least,
al all, on hiyh.
CLASSIFICATION OF ADVEUBS.
366. Adverbs have been divided into various. chis^ies,
according to their signitication The chief of tliesoare
the following : —
1. Adverbs of ncanner ; ii$,Ju:stli/, hravdy, soJ'Ui/, kv.
2. Oi Place ; as, here, there, where — hither,- thence, k\:,
3. OfTme ; &B, now. thert, tohen, soon, often, never, &c.
4. Ot Direction ; &^, uptv ard, downward, forward, kc.
5. 0( Affirmation ; as, ye*, verily,' certainly, doubtless, &c.
6. 0^ Negation; as, nay, no, not, nowise, kc.
T: Of Interrogation ; as, hdxo ? why ? mlien ? where ? whither ? &o»
-8,' Of Comparison ; as, more, 7nost,hss,as, so, thus, &c^'''liju. u
9. OL Quantity ; iks, much, .some, little, ".aoujhjSiilficienlly ,&,<!.
lo. Of Orde,r ; as, Jirst, fieco'tdly, thirdly, nccf, &c.
367. There, commonly used as an adverb of place, is, often used as
an inii'odiK'for}/ 4' .ptfiiiu- to the ve'l)'} lo hf, to cnnr, to nj,pcar, and some
others, wh n the subject, ia de.daratory aantonees, follows the verb ;
sbSf as, "Tl^ora is no.doul^t qX the fs^ot."
ETTl^ULOGY — ADVERBS,
91
• Then Joes not always rcfar to time, but it is used to indicate a cer-
tain cirru-nkancc, or a case supposed ; a?, "If you will go, ihen [that
is, ih that case] say so."
Nqv: is 6 '.n?.© times used without reference to t'me, merely \o indi-
cate the trangitibn from r>n^ sentence to another ; a?, "Not this man,
bat Barabbas. Now liarabbas uas a robber."
?6S. The words io day, to nlijhi, to utorroir, i/cHlLidt>i^ used ae ad-
juncts, ttiBy be called adveibs oftjme, or they may be regarded as
nouns in the objective caPC, without the governing word.
369. In comparison, f«8 aud*o, in the at teoedent clause, are usual-
ly reckoned advc.b?, because they modify an adject' ve or an'ther
adverb. The corroppontsing f»« and «*>, sometimes called conjunctions,
are properly adverbs also, because resglvable into an adjunct.
H70. Therefore, ic/icrcj'orc, aho, sometimes called conjunctions, are
more prwperly adverbs, because used for the a.<iyiiicli-, fur thin reason,
for which re((:-'ju, in additio),.
CONJUNCTIVE ADVERBS.
371. A Covjii nctive Adi-erbH QWQ ih^i stands for two adjuncts,
one of which contains a relative pronoun, and the other its ante-
cedent ; thus, "I will see you iL-hcn you come.*'
These adverbs perform a double office; they mo ify ti^o d fferftnt
words, and connect the clauses to which they belong. They are when,
where, while, whither.
FORMATION AND UElilVATION cF ADVERBS.
372. Adverbc are formed and derived from other words tn various
ways : —
1. A few adver'^'s are primitive, or dcrivei from no other words in
the language : aP, ye.v, no, noi, here, there, nov, then, Sec.
2. Many adverbs of quality or manner, are derived from adjectives
by adiinj? ly ; as dUiyent, diHyently ; hopjiy, hnjipily ; or by changing
le into ly ; as ahlt, »,bly ; Diinpfc] simply.
S Many coHfj;oi/jK)? adverbs are formed by combining words together,
60 as of two or more words forming an adjunct, (o make one com-
pound term ; as, indeed, hereby, thereby, n^hereuith, therefore, xihereso-
ever, nertrthdcss, <f-c. ,
4. Some nouns and other words are converted into odverbs by pre- -
fixiug «, signifying at, in, an, &c. j as, abed, ashore, aloft, ahead,, astern
af/round, apart, ad-sft, afrenk, alike, asleep, <fc';.
1^2 ENCJLISII GRAMxMAR.
'5. Circums^an 03 of time, pi ape, manner, Ac , aro <'ftcii cxfrccsed
by two or more words constituting an adrcrbiitl phrase ; as, at length
not At nil, hi/ no 7nraus, \n vain, in order l<>n</ ayo, hj-itnd hif, all over, \
to and fro, for ever, lie. ^ucb plirascs may bu takeu <<)</t-</ttr as one I
word,
COMPARISON OF Aini RBS.
373 Adverbs of qiialitj-, derived from udjepiives, and
a fcvy otherfei, admit of comparison like adjectives; as,
nobly, more nobly, most r.ohly ; soon, sooner, sooned.
The following are compaicl irregularly ; as —
Fos. Comp. Si'P-
Badly or ill worse worst
Far farther farthe.-t
Little less' least
Much more most
Well belter best
PARSING.
374. An Adverb is parsed by s'ating what part of
speech, — the class to which it belongs — the word which
it modifies — its derivation and comparison, if derived
and compared. Thus: —
"He speaks /Mg?2%." — Fluently an adverb of manner, and modi-,
fieg " s/ea^* ;" derived kom fluent ; and compared more flucnthj^ mo.^t
fluently.
EXEHCISES.
Tell to wkat to class the following adverbs belong— wbetber primi-
tive or derivative if not primitive, how f^cy are formed — compare,
if compared ; —
Justly, wisely, happily, beautifully, (iishionably, suf-
l^cientl3^ thirdly, nearly, almost, perfectly.
Here, there, anywhere, hither, thither, yes, no^ therice,
Somowhere — now, then, to-day, hereafter. •
ETyMOtO(3Y — I>REPaSlTiONS. 93
EXRRCISE3 ON ADVERBS. IRREGULAR VERB3, <SrC.
Parse the following exercise?, and tell the parts of the proposi-
tion : —
Peter wept bitlcrly. He is here now. She went
away 3^esteFcliiy. They came to-day. They will per-
haps'buy some tomorrow. Ye shall know heroafter.
She sung sweetly. Great men are not alwa3\s wise. —
Mary rose up ha^til3^ They that have enough may
soundl}^ sleep Cain wickedly slew his brotlier. Isaw
him long ago. He \» a very good man. Sooner or la-
ter all must die. You read too little.
QUESTIONS.
What isanadrerb? Adverbs are equivalent to what? Ex-
plain 364. Slate the classes of adverbs, t^ive cxaaiples of each
class. Explain there. What is said of then, jiioiv, to-day as and so
therefore? What is said of conjunctive adverb? Name them. —
Wbatis a simple adverbs ? A derivative, a compound ? How are
some nouns converted into a<lverbs ? WUiat are adverbial phra-
ses ? Are adverbs compared? How is an adverb parsed?
PREPOSITIONS.
375. A Preposition is a word wiiieh show^s the reta^
tion between a noun or pronoun following itj and some
other word In the sentence ; as, "The /ore of moneys ^-^
^^ Come 'TO me."
" ,376. Instead of a noun.or pronoun a preposition maybe followed
by an infinitive mood, or clause of a sentence, used as a substan-
tive; as, " We are about to Je^iart." — "Honored for having done his
duty." — "The Qv'xmo.oV being a young many
377 The preposition and ila object nnitel nre called an (tdptnct; —
aiijuncts are used to explain either substantives, or verbs, and hence
are equivalent either to adjectives or adverbst
94
ENQLtSil GRAM MA ti.
378. LIST Of I'KEPOSITIONS.
About
Above
Across
After
Agrtinst
Betwixt
Beyond
But
By
Concerning
Down
During
Except
Excepting
For
From
379. The prefix a in
To be got accaratcly by heart.
Around
At
Athwart
Before
Bt'hind
Along
Aii.id \
Atuid^t j
Among
Amongst
In
Into
NotwilhstandingR
Hound
Save
ince
Btlow
Beneath
■Boside ">
Besides. /
Between
rnderuenth
Vntil
Into
Tp
Upon
With
Within
Without
Of Through
Off Throughout
On Till
Over To
Out of Toui'bihg
Past Toward \
Regarding Towards j
Respecting Fnder •
the seoee of at, in, oti, &c., seeras-to have the
force of a prepoKitiop in such expressions as a vemliitf), a nmnifig, a
gciiiy, a huntinfj, dc, and may be parsed as such.
380. To, the sign of the iafinitivc miiuil, shA)ubl not be regarded as
a prepositioQ, but as a. sort of prefix bcdouging to the form of the verb
in that part.
381. When a piejoition has not an object, it becomes an «(//-fri ,• as,
«'He rides about." But in such phrases as cost nj,, hold out, fall on,
(i'c., up, out, on, should ba considered as a part of the verb to whii b
they are joined, rather than as preposi-ions or adverb.>».
382." All words used ii.s prepositions are followed by au objective
case, and may by this be distinguished from other words.
PARSING .
'183. A preposition is parsed by statlnf^ what part of
speech, and between what words it shows the rehition ; *
tinis, "■ The waters o/ Jonhm." O/is a preposition, and
shows the rehition betsveeii Jordan and ivatern.
Here Jordan is the rogimpn of the preposition of ; of Jordan U th«
adjunct of toafe/-»; an I iya<<;>-a is the principal tj which the a<ijanct*
belongs.
fit^MOLOGY — INTfeRjECTTONS. 95
EXEllClSifiS.
In the following sentenoea poiot out Ike prepositions, aud tbe wordj
between which it sbowd the relation. Name the f((//</«ct and jyrinci'
pal In what sentences has the principal m)re than one adjunct.
He went tVom Roston. He went tp WaBhington. —
He went from Boston to ^Vashiniiton. We renide in
the oouniiy. All rivnrs flow into the sea. He gave his
book to. me. He gave [to] me his boolc. Flowers bloom
in summer. In Bumnui flowers bloOm. He gave part
of his dinner to a poor man in the street. He was trav-
elling towards liome when. w^ met him at Milan, with-
out a single attendant.
QUESTIONS.
What is ft preposition? By what nuiy it b»^ followed? What is
an adjuiut'' What do adjuncts exphiin ? Thej are eqiiivKlent to
what parts of speech ? Uepeat moat of the prepogitions. What
is the force of the prefix </ .^ What is said of /o? When does
a preposition become an adjunct? Give some examples. By what
must apreposiiiou be followed? Howls a preposition parsed ? — *
Point out the subject and predicate of each proposition in the exer-
cises.
interjectio:ns.
384. An iNTERJEOTroN ifl a word used in exclama,
tions, to express an emotion of the mind ; as, " Ob I
what a fall was there I"
836. The Intfi-jf^'Hion ia so called, because it is, as it Were, ihrotcnia
fimou;/ the. words of a sentence, without an^' grammatical conaectien
w\tb them. Sometimes it stan<ls at the beginning of a Eentence,8ome-
times in the middle, and s!ometimes it stands alone, as if the emotion
were too strong to admit of other words being spoken.
A LIST OF INTEllJECTIONS.
386. The followirg is alitt uf ihe in erjections most commonly
y6 ENGLISH GRAMilAE. ♦
c- ' • . •
used. Thej express various kinds of emo'iou but in so vague find
indefinite a way, as not to adnut of accurate classiGcation : —
Ah! alas! 0! oh! ha! fudge! tush! pshaw! poh I pugh ! fie
avannl ! ho! liolla ! aha! hurrah! huzza! bravo! his! hush i^
heigho ! htjdaj ! hail ! lo ! welcome ! halloo ! adieu ! &c.
387. Also sonic words belonging to other parts of speoeh when ut-
tered in an unconnected and forcible manner, toexprefs omotii.n, are
called interjections J as, nonHcnne ! tstrai}<jc ! icuudo/ul ! Hhocliity !
irhat f hah old ! off.' a wo if ! harh : come! will done} tvelcohie ! 'd-c,
888; 0 is used toexprefs wishing or exclumation, and shou+d bo pre-
fixed only to a noun or pronoun, in a direct address; as, O virtue ! how .
amiable thuu art !" Oh is used detached from the word, with a point ,
of exclamation after it, or after the nrxt word. It implies an emo-
tion of pain, sorrow, and suprise ; as, "Oa ! what a ^^ght is here !"
PARSING.
389. An intnyctton is parsed b}- staling the part of
speech', wh}^, and the emotion expressed; as, "Oh!
wl^at a sight is here!" OA— an interjection, because
used as an oxelc'imatlon, and expresses an emotion o]^-
pain. ',
QUESTIONS. ','.^
What is an interjection? Why so called? Why are they tiot
classed ? Repeat tlieni. What other words are so used ? Explain
the use of O and oh. How is an interjeation parsed?
CONJUNCTIONS.
390. A CON^^NCTio^- is a word which connects wordi*
or sentences ; as, "lie and I must go ; hut you may aiay."
891. litre, and connects the words //t and /, and hut connects the j,^
sentences, ** He and I miiHt t/o" and, ''i/ou may ntcii/."
392. Cupjunctions aometimef begin Bentences, even after a full pe^
rlod, to show a connection between sentences in the general tenor of
discouise.
ETVM >LOGY — CONJUNClTOS. 97
I o3> Coiijiinotivnii are divided iuto two classes : Cop-
' 7'^ ///r<; and D'sj'unc'ive. ^
'•'i [. Copul.itive conjimctioas connect things, that are to be con-
si I 're>Vt;J!.i^'.nUei\ Thev are, and^ hoi/ij^as, heeause^for, if, since,tha&i
: I") I V / i^ tlie princip.il copulative, and connects what follows
H ^ h) that which pr'Ocedes. The oihers connect what
(uIImw.^ ;i:i w ■ yidltioii, 'f.fi^osUion , caus/", motive, Si'c.
; ' yp'D'y'ifirUec co'-^n'wAiom connect tliiag.j that are to be con-
> ; ;el st'poritely. Tu.t Jeading disjunctives are, or, nor, either^
. r, (hvi, I'lO'ij'i, aWi^i/h, i/'it, ha', excqH, whether, Icsf, unless,
.;'i''an ti.ij. nar-\ prori '(■^•1, ichereas. i
PAUSING.
oOT. A conjiiiciion i^ par.-ed by stating the part of
iiU; if J ( 1-IS3, an 1 the words or Gontcuces which it con-
rio 'ii'-I r nrnt g» ; '>;i' you imy stay/'
Ind—ii (■•.)[nilati vt." co* "ju'iclion ami connects Jle and /.
/; /.' — i fR jiinotivo <:oi)juMClion, nnd coniiect.? the sentences, *' He
ill f ^<l 1 ;t g),'' b.tf, '' yri nwy st.»y,"' j|
?,'.)d. onsr.isv.vTiONS.
1, Wbeu two nouns or pr-m uns arc ccnooo'.f rl.they are in (he same
V;!;,' , »itl i'l the fa-Jie «s>iistrm"tM»ii.
2. ^Vhf'i ( > > verbs aro onticcrrtl, they have the saiuo subject; as
•' .f i!'; r- :<;;.l; and writes."
li \Vlieii liv» a.lj !v.'t'ves are comcctHl, tlic^y ((tialify the fame noun
,. , or i.i' Ji.i'un.
4 Wh-Mj »>v'. ahcibs nro connected, <hoy nr dil'y the same word.
4» W!j-n <MM.j'i:!c!i>ns connect «t'»r:,»ccs, they do not conncrt indi-
, '^ vi<!o .1 w rds in t' c scntrneo.
■ 1. I'! the foil wirg fciitcRce^, ptint out the copjunctions, and etato
htit words, ..r s:5!\le:'!iei:. or phriso?, t'joy connuct. f'omstiuics the
order U S) iuvrle I, tie^ thy co'ij I'ictLv: clause stands Grst;
•5
98 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
2. Parse the words in their order.
Time and tide wait for no man. The evening and the
morning were the first day. The memory of the just is bless-
ed, but the name of the wicked shall rot. If thou faint in
the day of adversity, thy strength is small. Two and two
make four. George or John will go. They will succeed
because they are industrious.
QUESTIONS.
What is a conjunction? How many classes? What is a copula-
tive? A disjunctive ? What is said ol andl What of the other^ ?-»
>'ame the copulatives. How is a conjunction parsed ? Repeat ac-
curately the live observationB (398.)
PARSING. ':
399. Parsing is the resolving of a sentence into its el-
ements or parts of speech.
400. Words may be parsed in two ways: Etymologicdllify
and SijntacttcaVi/.
1. Etymological parsing consists in stating the parts of
•speech to which each word in a sentence belongs, its uses
and accidents, its inflection, changes, and derivation.
2. Syntactical parsing adds to the above a statement of
the relation in which the words stand to each other, and
the rules according to which they are combined in phrases
and sentences.
EXERCISES IN PARSING.
401. Parse the following exercises etymologically as di-
rected un^ler the various parts of speegh, in tb« r^receedin^
part of the book,
ETYMOLOG^Y — PARSING* 99
1 State what kind of a proposition tlie sentence is ; point out the
subject, predicate and object or descriptive, where these two latter
Bzist.
3. Read the proposition without any qualifying words, that you
may see the essential parts more clearly; thus, Servant tvill study in-
tereat. Cloud overhamjn city.
3 Observe that all other words in any proposition directly or re-
motely qualify the essentials, viz. subejct,predicate, object, or discrip.
tive.
4. Articles, adjectives, adjective pronouns, participles and ad-
juncts belong to nouns and pronouns ; verbs can be modified by ad-
verbs and a'^juncte. Nouns in the possessive case, and nouns iu ap-
position modify or explain the nouns to which they refer.
6. State what words refer to the subject, predicate, object or des-
criptive.
Note. Every proposition has both subject and predicate; if the
predicate is a transitive verb there must be an object; if the predi-
cate is the verb to he, there must'be a descriptive.
6. Study carefully the explanation over each exercise.
7- Parse each word accurately.
EXAMPLES.
I. Two or more atljectives in succession, either with or without a
conjunction qualify the same word ; us,
1. A wise and/aithful servant will always study his master's in-
terest. 2. A dismal, dense, and portentous cloud overhangs the ci-
ty. 3. A steady, sweet, and cheerful temper affords great delight
to its possessor. 4. He has bought a fine new coat.
2. When an adjective precedes two nouns, it generally qualifies
them both ; as,
1. They waited for a// /me and T^Z^/rf. 2. I am delighted with
the sight of green woods and fields. 3. He displayed great pru-
dence and moderation, 4. He was a man of great wisdom and
moderation,
3. When an adjective comes after a verb intransitive, it generally
qualifies the nominative of that verb; as ,
1. John is wise. 2. Thcf/ were temperate. 3. The sky is very clear.
4. These rivers are deep and rapid, 5. The apples will soon be
ripe. 6. We have been attentive to our lessons. These mountains
are very high,
4. Whatever tb« verb to he serves to unite, referring to th« saoiQ
100<r ENGLISH GRAMMA.R.
tbiog, most be of ihe sam« care: as,
I. Altx'indcr ia a student. 2. Mary is .1 beautiful paiiiior. 3. HiiTpei
is the balm of life. Content is a great Ijlessinj:^, envy a ^reat ciirs^.^
f) Knowledge is ppwer. 6. His meat wai lociidts and wild honey."
T. He was the life of the company.
5. iJ^ouns Bod pronouns, placetl together f.r Ihn s.iVe of cmph»8i8
or explanation, ami donating the same obj'ct, aresiid to be ia nppn-
ttition, and always agfie in chec; as,
1. Alexander the coppersmith, was not a friend to the Apostle raid ^
2. Hope, the balm of life, is our greatest friend. 3. Thompson, the
author of the Seasons, is a delightful poet. 4. Teniptiruuce, the
best preserver ol health, should be the study of all men.
NoTK. In parsing s-'ch sentences as those above, a re^aUve and a
verb may be inserted between the words in appositim. JAy«f'{/', thif'
ielf, hinus<tf, &c , ott-m Stan 1 at a considerable distanco from llie
words- with which they ajreo; a?, •
5. TViowai dispatched tiic letter /»m«f//. G. They gathered the
flowers in the garden themselves. 7. Ann saw the transaction lier-
self, and could not be mistaken.
U. Mifse!/, thi/»et/, hhtiHrlf, <tc., nft'-n form the objeclivo a Her aclivo-
♦ramsitive verbs, when tha words they reprcent arc tbfi S'lhj-ct or
lawwinative. They are in Euch cases g-^nora ly called Rrtitxict pro •
XMxans; ad,
1. J hnrt mt/self. 2. //e wronged /<?/H.yr'//', to oblige us. 3. They
i\'ill support themselves by their industry. 4. She endeavored to,,,<
show herself off to advantage. 5. We must confine ourselves more . rj
to our studies. 0. They hurt themselves by their great anxiety. .}
7. Adjectives taken as noutiS, and used in reference to person*, are
generally of the plural number ; as,
1. The valliant never taste death but onCe. 2. The virtuous
arc generally the most happy. 3. The diligent make most improve- f
ment. 4. The sincere arc always esteemed. 5. The inquisitive '•
are generally talkative. 6. The dissipated are much to be pitied. ••
8 Nouns and pronoans, taken in the same onr.ection, mnst bo of
the same case ; as, . ' '
1. The master taught him and i7ie to write. 2. He and she wer0
schoolfellows. 3. My^ brother and he arc tolerable grammarians.
4. He gave the book to John and Thomas. 5. I lent my knife and '
pencil tQ Qqc of the scholars.
ETYMOLOGY — PARSING, 101
1) A relative generally precedes the verb that govoths it; as,^
1. lie is a friend u-hom I greatly reapcct. 2* They whom luxury
an» litis corrupted, cannot relish the simple pleasutes cf life. 3. The
I Looks vvliich 1 boiight yesterday, 1 have not jet received. 4. The
lifis \vliic)i he pljjnted in the spring have alldicd.
10 Wlicn Imth n rolptive r.rid its ovitectdent Lave fath a verb he-
ir!' -I'lingiag to i', the relative is coinmonly noiniiiative to the first verb,
aud (he antecedent to the sicond , as,
I. IIb loho aits wisely deserves praise. 2. He who is a stran-
ger to industry may possess, but cannot enjoy. 3. They who
art born in high stations are not alwavs the ii;ost happy. 4. The
man who is faithfully attached to religion may be relied on with
confidence.
»• ■
II. ll'Aa/ always refers to an an tec dent omitte<1, and may be re-
garded as equivalent to that trhk'h, or ilf> ihhxj nhirh, and in parsing
iii..y be so rcsofvf d. It lUHy represent two cases, ciihcr both nomi-
li.aivo, or both objective ; or, the one nominative, and the other ob
j joliv.c : as,
1. This is precisely ichai was necessary. 2 \Vhat can not be
prevented, ninst be endured. 3. "We must not delay till to-m'onow
wiiat ought to be done to-day, 4. Choose what is most fit ; cus-
' torn will make it the moSt agreeable. 5, Foolish men are more apt
to consider what they have lost, than what they pessess. 6. What
he »aineil by diligence, he squandered by cxlravigancew .
\'Z. ^yhncccr and uJionoerer are equivalent to a simple relative, and*
:i gener;il or indefinite antecedent, and in ])irsir^ may be so resolved;
I litis, ichoerct'^niii/ one irho. The :Si me is ihe case with uhalerer and
' /, tm)erc)- ; irhntero^^cic ytliin'j which ; a?,
I. Whoever told such a sttiry, must hare been misiwiormed. —
2. Whoever is not content in poverty, would not be perfectly happy
in the midst of plenty. 3. Wlioever pa his
make but little improvement. 4. Whatever gives pain to others,
doserves not the name of pleasure. 5. Whatever is worth doing at
;ill, is worth doing well.
NuTR ir/taV'fTr is m' at frequently u ed, as ivhut sometimes is»
.•^iiiijdy t<j (lualif}' a r.oun ; as,
G. Aspi:c at perfection, in whatever date of life you may b» plac-
ed. 7 I forget V(hat words he uttered. 8 By what meaus shall-
102 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
we obtain wisdom? 9. B^ whatever nrls we may attract attention,
we can secure esteem only by an amiable disposition.
13. Though pjtrtirip'es DeVer directly declare, yet they always im-
ply somctbiDg either done or doings; and are used in reference to Bonce
noun or prun< un ; as.
1. Admired and applauded^ he became vain. 2. Having finished
6ur lessons, we went to play. 3. Proceeding on his journey, he
Wiis seized with a dangerous malady. 4. Being engaged at the tidoe
of my cull, he had not a moment to spend wtih me.
14 The past participle of a few inti-ansitive verbs is sometimes
joined to the verb * to be," which gives such verbs a passive appear^
ancj ; as, ' .
1. I am coce, in compliance with your desire. * 2. If such max-
ims and practices prevail, what is become of decency and virtue ?
3. The old house is fallen down. 4. John is gone to Boston.
15. lutransitive verbs are often followed by prepositions, making
what are sometimes called compound transitive verbs The verb and
preposition may, in such cases, be parsed either together or separate-
ly in the active voice In the passive voice, they must be parsed to-
gether ; ap,
1. He laughed at such folly. 2. They smiled upon us in such' a
way as to inspire courage. 3. He struck at his friend with great
violence. 4, He was much laughed at for such conduct.
16. A noun or pronoun is often used with a participle, without be-
inf( connected in grammatical cnn8truct.on with any otber words of
the sentence. It is then called the nominative absolute; as,
1. f\\e father being dead, the whole estate came into the hands
of the eldest son. 2. He destro}ed. or won to what may work his
utter loss, all this will soou follow. 3. Whose gray top shall trem-
ble, he descending.
17.. 7o, the 8ign of the infinitive , is omitted after the verbs hid,
dare, need, muhe, set; hear, feel and let ; and sometimes after j)erceive,
behold, observe, have, know, Ac. in the active v< ice, but is retained af-
ter the same verbs in the passive ; as,
1. Let me /ooA; at your portrait. 2. \\q hade me: go with him. —
3. I heard him assert the opinion. 4. I like to see you behave so
well. 5. Let him apply to his books, and then he will make im-.
ETYMOLOGY— PARSlKa. 103
proveoient. 6. Let us make all the haste in our power. 7. I.saw
bim ride past at great speed. 8. I have observed some satirists
use the term.
18. Verba connected by coDJunrttions,-are usually in the same mood
and tense, but in the compound tenses, the sign is often used with.
the firot oaly, and untlerstood with the rest ; as,
1.. He can nehher read nor lorilr. 2. He shall no longer tease
and vex me as he has done. 3. He ^commanded theta that they
should not depar. from Jerusalem, but wait for the promise of the
father. 4. His diligence should have been commended and reward-
ed.
19. N»uns and pronobns are often 'governed by a preposition un-
derstood; nou 8 denoting time, value, weic/hf. or iiuasin-e, are used to
restrict verbs or apjecfvcs, without a governing word ; as,
1. He gave (to) me a full account of the whole affair. 2. Will
you lend m<? your knife? 3. It ia not time yet to go home. 4. He
returned home at a very inconvenient season. 5, He travelled on
foot, last summer^ as far as London.
*20. The conjunction tJmn and as, implying comparison, have the
same case after them as bafore them ; aod the latter casa has the same
construction as the former; as,
1. He has more books than my brother (has). 2. Mary is not so
handsome as* her rister (is). 3. They respect him more than ^ii.iey
respect) us. 4. James in not so diligent as Thomas^ 5. Tliey are
much greater gainers than I, by this unexpected event.
21. The class of words, or part of speech to which a word belongs,
dcpatids of>eu on its application ; as,
1. (7i//m was the day and the. scene delightful. 2. We may ex-
, pect a calm after a storm. 3. To prevent passion is easier than to
calm it- 4. Better is a little with content, than a great deal with
-anxiety. 0. The gay and dissolute think little of the miseries whicu
are stealing soltly after Ihcm. 6. A little attention will rectify
BOpie errors' 7. Though he is out of danger, he is still afraid.-
8. He labored to ttill the tumult. 9, Still waters are commu
deepest. 10. Lamp air is unwholesome. 11. Guilt often casts .
^♦damp over our sprightliest hours. 12. Soft bodies damp the souna
much more than hard ones.
104 EXGLI?il GRAMMAR.
^'Z.ff>», have, nriHiho, arc principal vrba when used by themselves,
bnt auxiliaries when connected with other verbs : as,
1. He (Joes all in his power to gai>i esteem. 2. He did bis utmost
to please his friend. 3. We must do nothing that will sfllly oor
leputation. 4. She has a strong claim to our re.<?pect. 5. The man'
who has no sense of religion is little be trusted. G. He who docs
the most good has the mo.=t ploasiue. 7. He is at home. B. They
arc all well there.
!i3. An infinilivc, a pnrti'^iplo n^cd «.«' a noun, or a mrmbfr of »
sentence, which may bo callod nsnh.^faiifirr phra/t", is oftm the nomi-
native to a -verb, or the objective after an ■ active transitive verb or
preposition; a.s,
1. Xominalive. — 1. To study hard is the best way to improve. —
2. To endure misfortune with resignation is the characteristic of a
great mind. 3. To advise the ignorant, relieve the needy, and com-
fort the distressed, are the duties incumbent on all. 4. John being
Irom home occasioned the delay. 5. His having neglected oppor-
tunities of improvement, was the cause of his disgrace.
2. Objeclioe. — 1. He that knows how to do goo>i nnd does it not,
is without excuse. 2. He will regret his having neglected cpporta-
nities of improvement when it may be too late. 3. He declared
that nothing could give him greater plcai'ure. 4. Of making ma-
ny books there is no end. 5. You will never repent of having done
your duty.
2't. When a substantive phrase is govrrnfd by a verb orprepoai-
tiop, this regimen does not affect the case of indiviJual notins or
pronouns in that phrusc, but leave.'! them subject to tha inlliience of
other words within the phrnso itself; a?,
1. He had the honor of being a director for life. 2, By being a
4liligent student, he soon acquired eiuiienco in his profe.^^sion. —
v.. Slany benefits result to men from being wise and temperate
(men).
2.25. It often refcrs^lo persons, or to an irfinitivo coming after; os»
1. // is John that is to b^arae. 2. It wns T that wrote the letter.
V,. It is the duty of all to improve. 4. It is the business of every
Bian to prepare for death. 5. It was reserved for Newton to dis-
cover the law of gravitation. 0. It is easy to form good resolutions
but difficult to put them in pravticp. 7. It is incumbent on the
ETYAtotOGY — PARSING. 105
young to love and honor their parents.
20 Words, especially in poetr'-, are much transposed; a?,
1. Grcrtt is Diana of the Ephesians. 2. On yourself depend for
aid. ?>. Happy the man who puts his trust in his Maker. 4. Of
night the gloom was dark and dense. y
5. Or -whefe the gorp-eons pastrwirtfrtpbest hand, ^'
Showers on her kiosrs, liarbarie, pearls and gold,
fi. No hive hast thou of hoarded sweets.
7. A tranhient Ciilin the happy '^ccncs bestow.
i
bn
106 SNQLISH QRAMMAR.
PARTIIL
SYNTAX.
402. Syntax is that part of Grammar whicli treats of
tlie proper arrangement and connection of words in a sen-
tence.
1. A SEXTBNCE is such Ati assemblage ot words as makes complete
lense ; as, " Man \<i mortal."
2. A PHRASE is two or more words rightly put together, but not
making complete sense ; as, " In truth" — " In a word" — "To say the
least."
3. Sentences are of different kinds, according to the nature oftbe
thought intended to be expressed. They are —
4. Declaratory, or such as declare a thing ; as, "God is lore."
[ ^5. Interrogatory, or such as ask a question ; " Lovest thou me?"
6. Imperative, or such as express a command ; as, " Lazarus, come
forth."
7. Exclamatory, or such as contain and exclamation ; as, " Behold
how he loved him I'
8. All sentences are either timpte or compound.
9. A simple sentence contains only a single affirmation ; as, "Life
is short." •
10. A compound sentence consists of two or more simple senten-
ces connected together; as, "Life, which is short, should be w«H im-
proved."
ANALYSIS.
401 A setitence may h€ ceraposed of many parts or clauses; from
one pUrlctUatioB point to another generally constitutes a "clause.
Note. Punctuation does much more than simply indicate pauses
for the reader ; it separates the whole sentence into clauses correal
SYKTAX — ANALYSIS 107
|)onding to the ideas of w'hich it is composed, and indicates their re-
lation to each other.
404. Clauses are named from the leading part of speech, or from
the office which they perform, and must be well understood before
the thought ot the writer can be fully and accurately comprehend-
ed.
405. Proposilion. Any clause that contains a finite verb, is a prop-
osition. There are four kinds of propositions.
1. Transitive. When the finite verb is tiansitive, it makes a transi-
tive proposition. Tbia proposition has three essential parts, viz,
gubject, predicate, and object. See No. 337. "The good man lorc^
his enemies." (502.)
2. Intransitive. When the verb is intransitive, the proposition is in-
transitive, and has only two estential parts, viz, subject and predi-
cate. The obedient shall lire long in the land.
Passive. When the verb is passive, the proposition will be passive^
and will have only t\To essential parts, viz, the subject and predicate.
Tha town icas captured by the enemy.
4. Descriptive. When the verb to he, or any equivalent is the predi-
cate, the proposition is descriptive, and has three essential parts viz,
subject, predicate, and descriptive (3.37) (499-500).
Note. Propositions denoting simply existence have no descriptive-
When the descriptive word is a noun or pronoun, it is in the same
case with the subject.
406. Propositions are Independent or Dependent. An indepen-
dent proposition makes complete sense in itself; a dependent propo- -
sition can be used only in connection with an other. We left when
the sun set. "We left," is an independent proposition ; "wl en the
«un set," is dependent. Every sentence must have at least one inde-
pendent proposition.
407. Propositions are Simple or Compound. A simple proposi-
tion has only one subject and predicate ; a compound proposition
has more than one. «
1. There may be two or more subjects with one predicate ; as, "Jvhh
and Charles were at home."
2. Two or more predicates with the same subject 5 as, ''The farmer
planted, tilled and gathered his corn." (669-670.)
3. Two or more subjects and two or more predicates ; as, "Z*« and
Jackson fouyht and conquered the enemy."
108 ENGLISH GRAlVtMAR.
4. Two or moreo''.ioot3 onloscTiptives ; as, •' The a>Qrcba!\tbaught *
corn And HiJieat, which, were sc/tre^ and ih.tr."
5. Two or more simple ]>ropsitions conncc'ed by a coi.junction ; gL9,\
•'John lenrnoil these rale8^ but did Qot /-evitf^f the u.
408. lidative Clauses. Every relative pronoun ami the wonls
connected with it, make a relative clau.^e, lliouii^li not ahvaya aepA-
Tated frotn the proposition; a3, " Qcn. Hoke, icho ctijjlure<l Phimoulh;'
is a brave man." "The man iv'ii *.•*.'' i.<.l(, deserves praise." (006 ) "*
409. AfJJrctivc Cluus,'. When ■ .-jictivc and the words explain'-"*
jng or modifying it, are scparat'jd lioni the noun to which it refers,
ihey make an adjective clause ; as, 'LMrd Halifax, rich in nil (lie grd-^
ces and culture of life, zealously defended the Ijishons." "('n2 ) *■' ''*
410. Parliciplr Clause. When a particijile and tho^words depend-,
jng upon it, are separated from the proposition, thr'y make a |):»rVi-
«:iple clause ; as, Tiie Albemarle, Imcinfi hern seriously diiiiuiyed b]i
a round shot, retired up the river." (672.) , ,^
411. Adjunctive Clause. A preposition and if.s case with the words':
depending thereoDj may make at: adjunctive clau.se ; a.«, ^'Chaile^,
in the hurry and confusion of I lie accidi^iit, lost his pur.se-" ^0^/.)
412. Connected C'ausc. A proposition connected to anothf-r oener-
ally has one or more wordi understood, .and makes a cornected
clause; as "Mary came to town, and departed the same dayj' (Go8 )
413. Ajppositiunal Cl'tusc. A "houn in apposition, with its depen-
dant words, makes an appositional clauBo ; as, "Thompson, ihs au-
thor of the Seasons, is dead.""^62) i i^»>j v^ft y;- .
414. Cumulatioe Claucc. Several words of the same purt of speech
governed in the same v,-i\y. make cumulative clauses; as, 'A dar/:,
dense, and portentous cloud everhangs the city. "(OCO)
4l5.» Independent or Absolute Clause. This is made by a noun in
the nominative case independent or absolute ; fts, " Thomas, lake
this letter." (CG^)
416. Conditional Clause. This is formed by any conjuiiction or
adverb separated fr m the words in the sentence (C65.)
417. An Infinitive Clause is formed by tlie infinitive mood and its
dependent word3,,when separated tVorn the rest of the sentence ; as
^■''To find out the iruth of the report, I sent a mcsSeagor to the army."
(671.
SYNTAX — ANALYSIS. 109
418, DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYSIS.
1. ISUilc wLat kuid of « seutence, and whether simjile or com-
pound.... . i,. iy
2. If compound, tell what kind of ft compound it is, arMJtliie;'a5t>\
ferent members'. - '■:. '^^'
3 State what kind of a clause each one in the sentence i3, and.
shoAv what word any subordinate chiuse modifies.
4. Tell what kind of a proposition you have, Jiow many essen-
tial elements, and what they are.
5. Show to which of the essentials, all the other words in the
proposition belong.
QUESTIONS.
Wh:it is syntax ? ^Vhat is a sentence ? A phrase ? Flow many
kinds of sentences ? What is the use cf j'unctuatioh ? Whvt is u
chiu?e? From what are they named ? How many kinds of propo-
sitions ? What is the test of each? How in my essential parts
has each ? What projKjsitions have have no descriptive ? What is
uu independent [)ro})Osition ? A di [»eiiuant ? How many kinds ot
cwnipound propositions ? Ni>n;ie t o ch*-. 'icter of each. What is a
relative clause? Anadjecti\o cl; use ? A participle clause ? An
adjunctive clause? A cumulative claase? A connected clause? —
All Hp[tositional clause ? An iudejiendent clause? A conditional
clause? An infinitive clause ? Wliat is the test ot each clause?
Kjtdte the live directions for analysis.
EXAMPLES FOR ANALYSIS.
>^<)lomon, the son of David, built the temple at Jerusalem. Jose-
phus, the Jewisli historian, relates the destruction of the temple. —
That picture is a tolerably gootl copy of the orig^inal. Pride, that
never-failing vice of fools, is not easily defined. The author of Ju-
nius's letters is still unknown. Pride and (^nvy arc the first two of
the seven sins — gluttony and libidinonsness the last (wo. Truly
great men are far above wo«ldly pride. Few men can be. said to be
truly great in all things. That which is most diflicult in perform-
ance, is most praiseworthy in execution.
All things tliat are durable, are slow in growth. Human knowl-
edge is progressive. A mind open to flattery is always in danger
110 ENGLISH GRAMMAil.
Our knowledge of a future world is imperfect. Time is money.
Righteousness eialteth a nation. A soft answer turneth away wrath.
He that despiseth his neighbor, sinneth. He that hath raerc-y on
ihe poor is happy. Do they not err that devise evil.
According to some ancient philosophers, the sun quenches his
flames in the ocean. Sincerity and truth form the basis of every
virtue. The coach will leave the city in the morning at sunrise. —
The Spartau youth were accustomed to go barefoot. The attrocious
crime of being a young man I shall attempt neither to paliate nor
deny. Trusting in God implies a belief in him. His pretence was
that the storm prevented his attendance. His intention was to de-
stroy the fleet. Time flies rapidly. I confess that I am in fault. —
William has determined to go. I wish that he may succeed in his
enterprise. Theysaid, "Thouhast saved our lives."
Ignorance moves our pity, and that modifies our aversion. If we
hare not always time to read, we have always time to reflect. The
poer is hated even of his own neighbor, but the rich hath many
friends. The eyes of the Lord are in every place, beholding the
evil and the good. Righteousness exalteth a nation but sin is a
reproach to any people. Pride goeth before destruction, and a
haughty spirit before a fall. Death and life are in the power oftho
tongue. Though he slay me, yet I will trust in him. The slothful
man saith, "There is a lion in the way." When the righteouis are
in ftuthority, the people rejoice.
COHSTRUCTION OF SENTExVCES.
419. Words are arranged in sentences, according to cer-
tain rules, called the Rules of Syntajc.
420. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
. tn every sentence there must be a verb and Its notnindltve.
3. Every article, adjective, adjective pronoun, or pariicip'e, must
have a substantive expressed or understood.
3. Bvery nominative or subject has its own verb, expressed or un-
/sr-^i^J-Ii
SYNTAX — APPOSITIOI^. Ill
derstood.
4. Every finite verb (that is, every verb not in the infinitive)
has its own nominative expressed or understood.
5. Every possessive case is governed by a noun or substantive
whose signification it serves to limit.
6. Every objective case is governed by a transtive verb in the ac-
tive voice, ora preposition, or denotes circumstance of time, value,
weight, or measure.
7. The infinitive mood is governed by a verb, adjective, or lioun
The exoeptioDS to these general principles will appear in the Rules
of Syntax.
PARTS OF SYNTAX.
421. The Rules of Syntax may all be referred to three
heads, viz , Concord, or agreement, Government and Poii-
tion.
422. Concord is the agreement which one word has
with another in gender, number, case, or person.
428. Government is the power which one word has in
determining the mood, tense, or case, of another word. — •
The word governed by another word is called its regimen.
424. Position means the place which a word occupies
in relation to other words in a sentence.
43&. In the English language, which has but few inflectiuns, th0
meaning of a sentence often doponda much on the position of thd
words of which it consists.
SUBSTANTIVES IN APPOSITION.
426. Rule I. — Substantives, denoting the game person of
thing, agree in case ; as —
" Cisero the orator.^' — *• I Paid have written it.'* — " We^ the peo-
ple of the United States." — " Ye woods and wildn,'^ — " This was said
to us men>"
112 EN0LT<?I1 GRAMMAR.
427. The word annexed is said U bo in tippn^ltion Avith tVie other^
and is added to exprc-s some attribute, det cription, or appcllati- n, be-
longing to it- The word so related must a'wnys ba iu the same u.t m-
ber of the ecnteuce— that is, both in the subjtct, or in the diucriptive
or object.
428. Two or nr ore words forming one comp'ex name, or a name and
a title prefixed, though really in apposition, are propvrly inflected
and par-sed as one worJ; a?, ' Oeori/r ]Va>ihiiii/i<j,i' — '(itiwrnl Wush-
iiHjton's tent. '
429. A noun is cometimcs put in apposition with a sentence, nn<l a
sc! tence or infinitive mood sometimre in apposition with a noun ; as^
*' 77te ireathcr forbids icalking, a 2>roJtibition hurtful to U3 both."
430. A plural term is somfctimes used in apposition with several .
substantives singuiar,to cnjliiue and give thtni cmphanis; as," Tinie
labor, woiKij, all were lest.''
4S'. Distrilutive words are sometimes put in apposition with a plu-
ral substantive ; a"?, ** T"!"'.'/ went enth of them on hi.s. way."
i'^'l. Of this character are such exprassitns as the following : "They
stood ia eacli other's way" — that i?, ilny stood cocA in the ether's way.
Throughout the exercises in syntax— first correct the
errors; secondly, analyze orally the sentences so corrected;
thirdly, parse any word etymologioally ; and last, j.ane syn-
tactically the word or words to which the rule refers.
EXERCISES.
qiTM puB 'uoiiisodJxr ni OitJ spjoii -jutiAi 'saouaiuas Suimohoj eq-^ ai
what? lu what case do they agree? Give the rule ; —
Religion, ilie support of adversity, adorn,^ piosperity. Byron, the
poet, the only ECU of Captain John Byron, was born in 1*788. Cole-
ridge, a remarkable man and lich iuiaginalive poet, wa3 the f.iend
of Worddworlh. My brother William's estate has been sold
''And on the palace floor, a lifclesi c- rse she Isty."
EXERCISES TO BE CORRECTED.
As the nominative and the objective cas«>.s in ncuns are alike in
Ecigliah, there ia no liability too.ror under this rule, except 'n the
case of pronouns.
£*tYMOL0GY — ADJECTIVES. llB
t*lease give that book to ray brother William, he who stands by
the window. The gentleman has arrived, him whom I mentioned
before. Do you spf ak so tome, I who have so often betriended you ?
I speak of Virgil, he who wrote the ^neid.
QUKBTIONS.
How arc wor-.ls arranged ? What mn-^l be in every sentence?—'
What of f'very article, Ac ? What of every nominative ? Of every ti*
iiite verb? Of every posEessive Y Of every objective ? Of the in*
finitive mood ? To what he.id3 may the rules of syntax be referred ?
What is concord ? What is government? What does pdsitioti
mean? What is Rule 1 ? What is the use of apposition ? What
ofa conplexname? Explaio 429. What word expl .ins 430 ? What
governs each in 4:52 ? What direction is given for the exercises?
AN ADJECTIVK WITH A SUBSTANTlVJi:]
48o. Rule II. — I. An mljectlvp nr partinple qualifies
the suhatnutive to vhich if heloriys ; ap, "A good m&n."
2. Ailjectives donotivg ONE, qu^klifi/ nvvns in thesmgular :
adjectives denoting MORE THAN ONE, qualify nnun^ in the
plural ; as, " This man." — These men." — "aS'/:/ feot."
434. Wben ony of these is Joined with a plural noun, the whole i
regarded as sre aggregate ; as, 'The first hco ii:ee/:i"—"^verytfH
miltit" — The last four linen" -"The last dai/v of aummer," JlO. But tha
verb after aoob subjects is usually plural.
435. Two or more adjectivep, expressing qualities that belong each
to diffe ett objects of the same nam'', and that name expressed ou\y
with the last, should hav« an article bifore eaob ; as, *• The red aijd
the white loEc" — that is, tiio rises, the one icd aui the i.ther while.
So, *Tbe first and the second page."
43ft. Atljectives without a substantive expressed, are often used as
nouns ; a.", " The rich and the poor meet together."
437. An adjective aometimes qualifies the subject, not considered
simply as a fubslantive, but as a subbtantive afl'ected by the action
of the connecting veib ; as, " That ti/pf stands low." "'this fruit tastes
bitter.'*
114 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
438. Adjectives should not be used as adverbs ; thus, " mUerable
poor," should be, ^'■miserably poor'" — "sings elegant^^ should be,.
^^ sings eli'ffantlt/.^' So also, adverbs should not be used as adjec-
tives ; thus, " He arrived safely," should be, " He arrived safe.'^
Afi9.' Thin here, that there, them books, aro vulgarisma, (nr this, that
those hooka.
440. Sometimes an a<lJ6ctive modifies the meaning of another ad~
jective; as, " reil hot iroo," "a Iriyht-reil cjlor."
441. Several aijectives frequently qualify the same substantive ; as
"A lor<je, stroiKj, hluck horse.'.
This, that — these, those.
442. When two or more objects are contrasted, this refers to the
last mentioned, //«// to the first; as, " Virtue and rice are opposite
qualities ; that ennobles the mind, thi.t debases it."
443. Farmer and latter are used In tho sxme way. So also the one,
the other, referring to words in tho singular.
444. When no contrast is expressed, this refers to things near, or"
just mentioned, and that to things mora remote, or formerly men-
tioned. ■ ,
CONSTRUCTION OF CO.MPARATIVilS AND SUPERLATIVES.
445. When one object is compared with another of the name
class, or with more than one of a different class, individually, or in
the aggregate, the comparative is used ; as, " James is the ioeaker of
the two" — "He is taller than his father/'
4 40. When one object is cotnpared with more than one of the
same class, the superlative is used, ami commonly has the prefixed ;
aa, "John is the tallest araongsl us" — "He is the best scholar in a
class of ten."
447. When tho corapara ivo is used, the latter term of comparrison
muit always cu-< Utile the foimcr j thus, "Eve avas f;iirer than any of I
her daughters "
448. When the superlative is used, the 'atter term of comparison i
must always cxo/«(ie the form r; as, " Russia ia the largest country
in Europe."
449. Double comparitives and superlatives are improper.
eTYMoL0(5V— ADJECTIVES. 115
460 The double comparative ^€«'*er, however.is saBciiuuid by good
authority; as, "Lesser Asia" -"Every lesser thirg."— A\ }'. liiview.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES.
451. An adjective is commonly placed before its substantive ; as,
" A ffood man" — " A virivous woman."
* 1. Adjectives ah-ubi be placed as noar as possible to iheir s .bstan-
tives, and so that it may be ceituin to what noun they belong; thus,
"A new pair of shoes," should be "A pair of new .shoes."
2. When an adiective qualifies two or mor© substantives, connect-
ed by and, it is usually cxpres.scd before the first, apd ULdtraood,
to the rest; as, "A man of </i€<i( wisdom and uihdtvatlcti."
An adjective is placed a/fcr its substantive —
1 Generally when it qualifies a pronoup ; a», "We saw him fain
and ir ary."
2. When otbcr words depend on the aljcctive; as, ** A man sick
of the palsy"— "A p(de ten feet long."
3. When the quality r<tiulls from the action expressed by a verb ;
as, " Extravagance makes a mun poor" — " Virtue makes a poor
man happy."
4. When the adjective is prelicated of the substantive; as, " (Jod
is (jood" — ' We are fcppy."
EXERCISES TO BE CORRECTED
Correct the errors in the followirig sentences, and g've a reason Lt
the cbanee: —
These kind of books can hardly be got. I have not been from
home this ten days. We walked two mile in half an hour. I or-
dered six ton of coal, and tbes§ makes the third that has been de-
livered. This lake is six fathom deep. The garden wall is five rod
long; T measured it with a ten-foot pole. Twenty heads of cattle
passed along the road. It is suid that a fleet of six sails has just
entered the baj'. That three pair of gloves cost twelve shilling —
A man who is prudent and industrious, will, by that means, increase
his fortune. Charles formed expensive habits, and hy those means
became poor. If you are fond of those sort of things you may have
them. There was a blot on tte first oi- second page. The first
-16 ENOLL^H GRAMMAR.
and second verse arc better tlinn the third ami fourth.
(438.) . Come quick and do not hindir us. Time passes s\viff>*^
though it appears to move plow. Wo jrot home sntily before daik,
and found our friend.^ sitlinp; comfortably around Ihi' fire. Ti'ieboitt
plides smooth over the lake. Magnesia r( els ?mootl:ly. Oj-on the
door widely. Tlie door i.= painted greenly.
(4'.0.) Hand nie.that there pen, for lhi.=; here one i? worse LhnnalL
Them books were sold for a Jojser price than they cost.
(H2 ) •' For beast and hi d ;
These to Lhcir grassy couch, those to their tests, repai'."
** Night'jj shadows h- nee, from tho ce tho mor ings shine;
That bright, this' dark, this earthly, that divine."
(414) That vej-y su^je ;t which we are now discussing is s'ill in-
volved in mjstery. This vessel, of which you spoke ofjesierdny,
sailedMn the evening
(4;T.^ That merchant is the wealthiest of all his neighbors. —
China has a greater population than any nation on earth. That
ship is larger than any of its class. Theie is more gold in Cali-
lornia Llian in any part of North Am'-'rici*. The birds uf Brazil are
more beautiful than any'Jn South America. rUiUidelphia is the most-
regular of any city in Europe. Israel loved Josepli more than all
his children. Solomon was wiser than any of ihe ancient kings.
(410-50.) A more worthier man you c:innot find. The nightin-
gale's voice is the most sweetest in the grove. A worser evi) yet
awaits us. The rumor has not spread so univer.'ally ns we snjipos-
ed. Draw that line more perpendicular. This fiigure is n more
• -perfect circle than that is. He is far from being fjo ])eifeet as h®
-tllinks he is,
QUESTIONS.
What is the rule for adjectives? When should the adjectives be
expressed belorc each noun? What of adji'ctives without a sub-
stantive? E.xplain 4'J>1. Miiy adjectives be used a.s adverbs ? Can*
■ one adjev live modify another?. How nuir.y may the sanie noun
b.a;ve? K.xpiain the use uitkks, tluil, thef^e, those. When is, the com-
piu:ilive used? Wlien the superlative ? Which excludes? Wiiat
of »h)uble comparatives? VVli.it is the position of the rttljecfive?-
W hen may it lie placed after the noun?
ETYMOLOGY — ARTICLE. 117
THE ART CLE AND ITS NOUN-
452. Rule III. — 1. The article a or an is put be /ore
common noiim^ m the aivgnlal' nmnher^ ichru used INDEFI-
NITELY ; a3, " A man"— ".l/i apple;" that is, ' an^ man',
— *'a??// apple/'
2 The art iele 'ill r. is j)nt h ./ore cornmon noiina, cither
sifujiilaror^yhiral^ichfnusejl DEFrxiTELY; as, '^Vftsua
rise."— ''7'Ae city ot llilei^li.''
433 A common noun, in the siiignljir number, without an article
or limiting word, is usu;Uly tuken iu its widest sense; as, '■'■Man is
mo'.tal"
404. Every article belongs: to a noun, expressed or understood
except IS in (l^Sand 4r)t>).
45). When several rouiis aro combined in tbe same construction
the articlo ii commonly expressed w'tb the li:s?, and understood wi«h
the rest; ap, 'Tbe men, wonin, and children, aro rxpeefcd."
~liG. But when several n'uns in tbe same c< nslructicn arr dig*''
junclivcly connected, tbe nrtide luu-t bo repeated; a?, "The mcr, or
the woiMjjr, or the cbi'dren, aro expected "
4o7. The is commonl)' put before an adjective used as a noun ; as, .
" Tlie ritjldcoux i s in >rc e.vcolb.ut than bis ne'ghbor." Also before ^**
a'ljcctives io the Fuperlative degree, when comparison is implied.
But when comparison is net implied, the iurerlativo is ei lev with-
out an article, or has a or un preceding it ; us, < A mo.«t rxf'ellent
man.*'
458 T!.e is somctimt s put iytrnnice^i/ before rdjoctive^ and adverbs
in tbe comparative degree; as, " The higher the mountain, tht; colder
its top."
ih'J. An adjective placed aTt-.r its poun rs an (pitbet; commonly
hns tVe arti-le ihe bef.re i(; as, "Alexander the Great "
460. ^ orara is somelimrs put before the a''j'.-ctivcsyV*'-, hiiudro/
thovmoidf^qllovnd by a plural noun ; as, " A fen- meii" — "A hundtxa
acres"- "A /hotiscmd miles.'
4fil When two or more adjectives bclorg to flje s-'me noun, the ar-;
tide of the noua i.-^ put with the first adjective, but not with tbcreet;
as, * A red upd uhilc roMc," that is, vitc rose, partly red and partly
tchiit.
118
ENGLISH GRA3rMAR.
4^2. When two or more adjectives belong each to a different object
of the same name, the article of the noun is put with each adjective ;
aji, " A red and a white roso''=r-"A red rose and a white rose," that
is, Uno roses, one red and the other white.
463. So also when two or more epithets follow a noun, if both des-
ignate the game person, the article precedes the first only. If they
designate different persons, the article must precede each ; an
"Johnson, the bookseller and stationer," means one man, who is both
a boekfeller and stationer; but "Johnson (he bookseller, and the gla-
tioner," moans two men, one a bookseller, named Johnson, and the
other a stationer, not named.
464. When two nouns after a word implying comparison, refer to
the same person, or thing, the last must uant the article ; as, '* He is
a better soldier than statesman." But when they refer to different
persons, the last must havf the article ; as, "Ho is a better soldier
than a statesman [would be] "
465. The article «, befcre the adjectives /<*« aud little, recders the
meaning positive ; as, "A few men can do that" — " He deserves a lit-
tle credit" But without the article the me&u'vag'xsneyative ; as, "/"'«te
men can do that" — "He deserves little credit."
466. The article is generally omitted before proper name»,ab$trae
nouns, and names of vlrtiiee, vices, arts, sciences, Ac, when not restrict-
ed, and such other nouns as are of themselves so manifestly definite
ae not to require it.
EXERICSES TO BE CORRECTED.
Change, or omit, or insert the article, where necessary, and give a
reason for so doing : —
(452.) The fire, the air, the earth, and the water, are four ele-
ments of the philosophers. Reason was given to a jman/.o controll
his passions. A man was made to mourn. The gold is corrupting.
The silver is a precious metal.
(455.) Neither the man nor boy was to blame. A man may be a
mechanic, or farmer, or lawyer, arjd be useful and respected ; but
idler or spendthrift can never be either.
(458.) We should ever pay attention to graceful and becoming,—^
The memory of just is blessed , but the name of wicked shall rot.
Best men are often those who say least, Your friend is a ipan Qt
ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUN. 119
the most brilliant talents. Keep good and throw bad away.
(4<>I.) A red and a white flag was the only one displayed from the
tower. A beautiful stream flows between the old and new man-
sion. A hot and cold spring were found in the same neighborhood.
The yonng and old man seem to be on good terms. The first and
second book are difficult. Thompson the wfttchmaker and the jew-
eller made one of the party.
(464.) A man may be a better soldier than a logician. There is
much truth in the saying that fire is a better servant than a master.
He is not so good a poet as an historian.
(465.) It is always necessary to pay little attention to business. —
A little respect should be paid to those who deserve none. Let tbe
damsel abide with us few days. Are not my days a few ? A, few
naen of his age enjoy so good health,
QUESTIONS.
What is rule third? How is a noun without an article taken ?
Must the article be used before each of the several nouns combin-
ed? Explain 457. How is the article used intensively ? When are a
and an used before plural nouns ? How rau!*t the article be used
with two or more acjectives. Does Branson the publisher and the
stationer mean one, or two men ? What is the force of a before
few V Before what nouns is the article omitted ?
A PRONOUN AND ITS ANTECEDENT.
367. Rule IV. — Pronouns agree with the words for
which they stand, in gender, number, and person ; as, "All
that a ?rt//n hath will Ae give for his life." — ^-A tre4X^
known by its fruit,"
SPECIAL RULES.
'""-iosTRuLE 1. — When a pronoun refers to in-o or more word* iakm
together, andof different per&o^nSy it becomes plural, and prefen the flrtt
person to the tecond, and the $€<:0T\d to the third ; as, John and you and
/ WJU do qur duty, .
120 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
•v->oiOK-:'ir
Rl'LK 2. — Warn a prnn.)uiir^]frrs to two or mtrc ironJ.^ in the sin-
■gnlar takenrSffava'tdif, or to one of Ihain exdHsicdfi^yil mMt he Hiigulax-; <,<:>
>as,'* A clock or a Wiitch moveij merely .13 il in niored."
f>i;i^l' 3;: — ]iu( if rifhcr of iM ivnnb referred to is plurcd. (he pro-'ir
nouti mist be jilural (Hio ; sis, " Neitlior he nor thrtj trouble them-'-*'^^
sclrrJ:'\ ' ' •'- ■:■'.-: dT
400. Nouns :iire tnken together when connecled by and— pop ^y>^
aratcly when connected by or or nor. 113 above : filso after each, ev^'' '^*
erylno, though connected by and ; as, " E.ich boot and eacH p^ipef)
is in //6- place." ../-""
470. When singular nouns of dilTjrynt genders *are taken scp rate-
ly, they cannot bo r-.-p-escnt© ' by a pr<»n<.>ua, for want of a J^ipguJar
jtroaoun, common gcnlcr, except by a clum?y rojtelitinn of pronouOii' •■
of corresponding Venders ; th'r?, "If any»j'f»i or woman sha'l ▼{•olftt*'
h\M or her p'edge, he or i<he shall pay a fnio." The us© of th9|>//(rf {
pronoun in fuoh cases, though somatiincs used, !s tmpr«j|ef.
, 471. Pronouns referring to singular n(iUi;S or other words, of the
<><)tumon goudcr, taken in a general s ;ri.^e, are c.)0)monly u\asculino :
as. "A parent shouSl love his child."
47?. Pronouns representing nouns jxrsonifiod, take thfl gender of
the noun as a jjimhoh ; as, "Au/hi. s..ble gt diess, fri^ui her cbisii
throiib."
4/3. It is iinpr"p^r in ihepr')gros: . ,' :i ientcvco (o dor.oto On- sa
mo
pers-'Ds by pror.ouns of different nnmbrr? : a.'', '■! lahrtrcd long to make
thee hai'iiv, aid now //o« rew-i'd ma ly iig" at i'ude." It sh- u'd bo
either ' t'« m-ik(7/-/« happy," or'' thou re.virdo.n."
EXERCISE.Vt > BJ" r iicjted.
Id cb.ch sen-CMce, state^ tho woKis' k^'whi h the pronouns rflPor,
change the prorjouns v.'biuh aio i^r.njr, aid give a reason fi^r t'.o
changf- : —
(4(3.0.) A persons succe-5 ill life depends on their exertions.; if ,.
th«y aim at nothinjr, they sb :'I certainly a<-hieve nothing. Ex-
tremes are not in its nature favorable to happinci^s. A man'.'? rec-
ollections of the past regulate their antit ipnlions of the future— r
Lat^evecy IJoy aqswer for themselves. I'^ach of us had more thiui -
w6>wanted!. Every one of you should attend to your own business.
;(fl67 1.) Dircontcut and gonow pmailcsted itself in bis counte-
Sl^NTAS— PAESIxa. 121
nance. Both cold and heat have its extremes. Yqu and your friend,
should take c;ire of themselves. You and I must b*3 diligedt in youi:
studies,
(46Y-2.) John or James will favor us with their company. Ona
or the other must relinquish their claim. Neither wealth n6r honor
confers happiness on their votaries. Every plant and every Howep
proclaims their Maker's praise. P^iich day aud each hour brings
their changes. Poverty and Avcalth have eaeh their own tompta-
tioBi. No thought, no word, no action, can escape in the judgment,
whether they be good or evil. > .
(467.) Let every man and every woman strive to do tlieir best. —
If any boy or girl shall neglect her duty, they shall forfeit theiir'
place. Nolady'or gentleman would do a thing so unworthy (rf
them.
(4'?0.) One should not think too highly of themselves A teach-
er should always coneult the interest of her pupils. A parent's
care for her children is not always requited. Every one should con-
sider their own frailties. Let each esteem others better than her-
self.
(471.) The earth ig my mother; I will recline on its bosom.— ^
That freedom, in its fearless flight, may here aunounce its glorious
reigu. Policy keeps coining truth in its mints, suoh truth as it caa
tolerate, and every die except its own it breaks and casts away. Aa
time advances, it leaves behind him the traces of its flight.
(472.) Though you are great, yet consider thou art a man. Caro
for thyself, if you would have others to care for thee. If thou wert
not my superior. I would reprove you. If thou forget thy friend,
eau you expect your friend will remember theo ?
QUESTIONS.
What is the rule for the pronoun.' When does a pronoun i^fer
to twe or more words .' If eithei* of the words is plural ? V/heii
ure words taken together .' When, separately ? AVhat, whonsia-
gular nouns of difl'erent genders are taken separately.' Explain.
17^. Wkat of pronouns representing personified nouns .' What
must must be erved in the progress of a sentence?
3^2 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
THE RELATIVE AND TrS'^&rKCEJDENT. '
474. Tlu-LE Y. — The rdative ag.rees,v^Uliii&MiiteGed,e,ii{,i
in number andj^erson ; as "Thou who speakost." — ••Tlua
book which was lost.''
475 The number of the relative can be determined only rtbm ta6'
number of the antecedent. * < > - - ■
O")
476. Who is applied to.pcrs'ons'or ' things ;^er^o}} ijUd ';' tf Ji',J
*^The man tvho^' — ^'Tha /btc lohS had n'^ior' seen k li'on.*''^
^ 477. Which .u applied to thitigs\a,HdJnferioffanimals,-:ty^
sonietimesHo children — to .collecti\^e nouns ju the lin-
gular, implying unity — ajid,oal&o to ])ci-&o!ns in asking
<XUCStionS. - :.i'j7. i:i:: "{
479. That as a relative, is used instead of jrZ/o or irhich —
1. After adjectives io the superlative diBgi^'eS—afiet the word^ ct<.,.
same, and all, — often after no; feo^t^ jin'd*'Vifrty~irand generally
io rcstrittivo clau-scs. :-,m:.-.; ..• .i .'. i"t;.
2. When the antecedent includes. b<>-th pctirsbiia and things; a^-
"The man and the horse that we savf."
3. After the interrogative who, and pften after tbo personal pro-
nouns; a.?, "Who that knew Kim could ,'ibia^ so'?'j'-—*'I'<7t('^
speak jn righteousness." ''*''' ^■''' ''' '""-*^- '■■ ■^'
4. Geaerally when the propriety ^fw// a or iohi(W\i Itfoilbled/'ft^,
"The little c/it"W f7to ^was placed in the miilfet.'*' '*=^J -'•'-'
479. The relative in the objective- cs[se'iS''6fteil'6inittoay''ks/'*'']^ro
as the book I promised you." • ■'; i.,'!t:' s/; no^ dgiu. 'i' ITl-
480. ll'Vmi should not be used, for t^e eoojxmctitvn that: "Wbue,' ''" I
can not believe la\xttchat it jp so/' shq^ild be,;'| Intji thai it iq.-ao.^: i >
EXERCISES ON THE RELATIVE,
481. The relative is <>:encrally ]>I:i('ed nUor its ai)le
cedent.
«42. To prevont ambiguity, the rolativ.o, should bo .placed as near
•its antecedent as possible. When the anlep.^/^|e^t,)cau Jvofc b,«: d«ter-
mined by the sen>ie, it should bo detcj,mtne4 bj;, tl«5; ufW'i^8%< <>^' .*!^9
relative. ' ' ' •'""'..-■•••■ ,' ..
SYNTAX— ^XOMINATIVE. 128
EXERCISES TO BE CORRECTED.
la the foliowiug sentenoea which are the relatives ? Whatislho
antecedent to which each refors':' Correct thr.se which are wrong,
and give the lule, or the reasn for the eh an go : —
(475.) Those which seek wisdoAi will certainly find her. This is
th« friend which I {oVo.~(47C) That is thfe Tice whom I hate. The
tiger is a beast Of'prey who destroys without pity. The court who
gives c6Tr«Jircy to- sach luAnners should be exemplary. The nations
who have the hcstrulera arc hajipy. Your friend is one of the coin-
mittee who was appointed yesterday. The family, with whom I
liV6d has left the city. Tils, father set him np as a meccluxnt, who
was what he desire,(|!.to be. ,If you intend to, be a teacher, who you
can not be without learning, you must study.
(477.) It is the best situation which can be got. That man was
the first who enter^t^.j . This is the* same horse which we saw yester-
day. Solomon was tho w iscst king whom the world ever saw. —
The lady and the Inpdog,- which we saw at the window, have disap-
peared, TJie man aiid the things which he has studied have not im-
proved his morals. 1 who speak unto you am he. No mAn who
respects hi-nigeif would doao mean an action. I can not believe but
whatydii have been sick. It is not impossible but what you Hre
mi.<5takeu.' : V'-'f " ' i' - . . -■ ; .
(481)'"''The'king'dismIssed h^sl minister without inquiry, who liad
never bcfot-e committed so unjust an act.
QUIESTIONS.
What is the rule for the relative ^ For who .' For which ? Give
the four rule.ri for the use of thftt. St^ite 471>. What should bo
the position of the relative.' Explain 481.
I
'VHE SUBJECT NOMINATIVE*
483. KuLK Vf. — The subject of a finite verb is put in the
nominative -; as,- ^'' / ain'^ — ^^ Thou art'' — ^'TTe is" — " They
are'' — ^'Timc flics.''
124 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
48 1. A ftnito verb is a verl> in tho indicative, potential, subjunct-
ive or imperative mood.
485. The subject of a finite verb may be a noun, a pronoun, an in-
finitive mood» a participle used as a noun, or a clause of a sontencw
All these, when tho aubjeet of the verb, are reg^arded as the »omiua-
tive.
4<6. It 13 improper to use both a noun and its pronoun as the nom*
inative to the same verb. The nominative, especially in the answer
to a question, and after than or «», often has the verb understood ; at
•' W7(o said 80 ?" — *'Hc [said so]." — "James is taller than /[am]
but not so tall as ynu [ar^]."
487. The subject is commonly placed before the verb. But in im-
perative and interrogative sentences, and in sentences inserted for tho
sake of emphasis or euphony, the subject in often placed after
verb ; as, ''Go fkou." — "Did he go ?"
EXERCISES TO BE CORRECTED.
Which nouns or pronouns in the following sentences are tho sub-
ject of the verb ? IfHotinthe proper case, change them, and give
the rule, or a leason for the change : — -
[■483.] Him and me are of the same age. Suppose yo»i and me
go. Them are excellent. Whom do you think has arrived? Them
that seek wisdom will find it. You and us enjoy many privileges.;
[486..] John is older than me. You are as tall as her. Who has
aknife? Me. Who came in? Her and him. You can write a^
well as me. That is the boy whom we think deserves the prize.
Virtue, however it may be neglected for a time, yet men are so
constituted as to respect genuine merit.
QUESTIONS. t
U'b»* is the rule for the subject ? What is a liuitc verb ? What
may th^if subject be.' Explain 480. When is the verb understood .•'
AVkere sbouid the subject be placed ?
THE NOxMIXATIVE INDEPENDENT.
4-8S, lluLE Vll. — A suhatantloe whose case depends on
SYNTAX — NOMINATIVE. 125
no other word, is put in the nominative. This occurs un-
der the following —
SPECIAL RULES.
489. KuLE 1. — A substantive iclth a 'participle whose case
depends on no other word, is jmt in the nominative also-
hite ; as, " He being gone, only two remain."
4^0. In this construction, the substantive is sometimes understood;
as, " His conduct, viewing it even favorably, can not be command-
ed;" that is, ice, a, person viewing it, &c. Pometitues beiitg and hao-
intj been are omiUed ; a.", "Iler wheel [/>t('»y] at re?t" — "He de$troyed
or won, rf'C. that is, "lie hnvtnr/ hccn dtstroyed or won," &0.
491. lluLE 2- — A person or thing addressed^ without a
verb or governing word^ is put in the nominative uidqicn-
dent ; as, " I remain, dear sir, yours truly" — '^ Flato,
ihou reasonest well."
492. Rule 3. — A substantive, unconnected in mere ex-
clamation, is put in the nominative indeiiendent ; as, " O,
the times .'" *'0 the manners .'"
494, Rule 4. — A substantive, used by pleona&m before an
affirmative is put in the nominative independent ; aii, "The
bog, oh where was he ?" — ''Your fathers, where arc
they ? — the prophets, do they live forever?"
exercises to be corrected.
Point out the noun or pronoun whose case depends on no other
word — put it in the case required by the rulo, and give the special
rule requiring it.
Me being absent, the business was negloted. lie made as wise
proverbs as any body, him only excepted. All enjoyed themselves
very much, us excepted. Whom being dead, we shall come.
- ' Whose gray top
Shall tremble, him descending.
The bleating sheep with my complaints agree ;
'J'hem parched with heat, and me inflamed by thee.
126 EN&LISH CtR-V^IMA^,
Her quick relapsing to bor Corracr sta^e.
Then hII thy gifts and grace? we display,
Thee, ouly thee, directing all our way, :
THE VERB AND ITS NOMINATIVE;
494. ^VrX'E.Ylll,--4.'VepJ)^qgrefis loith^ its n()mtnative^^\nf^
n umber aiHiiKrson,; ■. a^„ , ^*I, xmi,^' , "Thou rmd^sV^ otB<>
reads,'' <'We ;Ta<^/" &c.
SPECIAL RULES.
495. lluLE 1. — A aingulnr fiotcn used in a jf^^n^^al sehsc,
lias a verb in the^^lural ; as, "I'on snif ork ixi sight.''
496. llULE 2.'— TWo or iriore substantives, * singular, ta-
Icr.H tog ether,, have a verb lit the plural •' as]''-*^J^or»><?s khd
John are liGvo.'^ .-;.«,•"? /""f
{497. A singular nominative and an objective connected by 7t'j>«,
sometimes tavc a plural verb; as, "The ship witb'th9 crow ir^re ]o&t.''
This construction is incorrect, and should not be imitated-!
498. "When substantives connected by ami denote one person or
tbingf, the verb is singular ; as, **Why is (h)8t. and tJsAes ptoud ?"^'
* The saiiit, the father, and the /i utiha nd, prai/nJ'-'-Biimv.- ^ *■' \
49d. Singular nouns preceded by ^toA, ercr^, jiOjthougli fcorJ.no'Cted
by and, have the verb in the singular; as, "Each book and each pa/>er
ivaa arranged." When a verb,.having soVsval nomiualivos connect-
ed by and, is placed after the first, it agrees with that, and is under-
stood to the rest; as, -., , ,
"Forth in thp pleasing 8pri"g
Thy beauty loalhs, thy iciiderncix, and hcc"
500. When ^he substantives connected arq_ of dillereiit /^<?/fio/t.<!,
the verb in the plural prefers the first to, Jhe .second, and t|ie sc^con d
to the third, this can be perceived pnljr,,in the pifpftO^ii. ii„^, ^^ -. .
501. lluLE 3. — Ttoo or more substantives, singular, ta-
ken separatcli/, or one to the exclusion of the rest, have a verb
in the singular.
SY:nT.\Y — XOMTXATIVE. 12T
. 502.. Nouns ta^xense^yaiaifty^, are ponnected by or, nor, as wM a
and also, it'-?^ A noun taken so as to exclndcoVnQxs, is connected with
by such phrases as and not, hut not, not, &. In ?uch, the verb agrees
with the subjcctallirmcd Off, and. is,' understood with the others.
504. But whan two or raoro subdtailtivss, taken separately, are of
(liiforputaupih^rs, the verJ) agrees with the one n-ext it, and the phi-
rivl fcubJQGt is.,v^ui|ly.i)Iatied P9?t t^^Q verb ; as, "Neither the captaiu
nor the saiIyi;s:Jt'_tye ,suved.',' , ^, _
Jf^4^.^^1^\]ihz4:^-r^JYI\cnH^hM^^ separately, are
of dlfftir^M p(\rs-})iy,thc. c^iirhngvecs with the one next to it; as^
'•.Jaiiiocj.or, X.^/w iu.tlio wrong'.' — '^Either you or ho 2>
ftii^thkiepif^'-^*^! ckp then ort to bUimc."
.^(^5. 'fetTLV. t^.^^^ A collective noun^ejcpressinj mani/y as
ONt WilOLE, Ki'ix^avei'h'm the sing vJar ; as, '' TIic compa^
//// ivas lar.:(\ '
50G— ^. B lit iciieiKja.cpUective noun expresses mani/ as,
indiviihmhythc verb wui^t he plural; as, ^'^ly peoj^l^.do
not c'on,si(.l!er.'' ;^,,^ I.f,;?
i>:i7. It i^ S(7naotiw93 jlifllcult to determine] whether a col'etftire
tiuuaiQXuresses «/(/(y qj:,^il^raliiy. . It is now; considered gtneraily best
to US© the plural. wLere the.s,iag.aiar is manifestly required. ^ i
60,^. A'nominatlvoafter '^many. a" has a verb in the singular j a?*
EXERCISES TO EE CORRECTED.
■ '■'■/, '■.'.■'-■"'
"What is t'le verb in each of the following sentences ? What is the
Fubjcct'/ ceo. if they iugroe.. If they do, give the rule and show-
how it'kpplios-. If tbey do not, change .the verb so as to agree With.;
ii.s nolffihativo, andC give the rule.' 1?hus.^ores should be love, to agree
Avifc"Si''//ia Ihefit'st; ^'(ir^uii/'sin'gular.' ''i^jV^e--" A verb agrees," &c.'
'(^l04.f t'^tives JreadinV. "K soft answer turn away wrath.-T-.[
^Vo is bat of yesterday, and knows nothing. The days of man,
is as'giNfe^. •'Thrfii^s3e>'ho\v Vi'tlle ha^' been dWc. He dare hbt
act (Hh<¥T\Viso. Fifty pburtds 'of W'he'atpTodtfc.es forty pounds of ^
flour. ""^A Vari<ity 6f lilbii'sin,^ objects charm the eye. So mucli
oi' ability and merit arc seldom found. A judicious arrange-
128 ENGLISH GRAM^IAE.
'{C •
rcikni of studies facilitate improvement. Was you tliere ? Cir-
cumstances alters caj?es. There i? sometimes two or three of
las. I, whn are first, Ints the best claim. The derivation of
these words are uncertain.
(40Q.)- Forty head ot cattle was sold in one hour. Tlie horso
■was sent forward to c':ij:..ge the enemy. The foot, in the mean-
time, was preparing tor an attack. Fifty sail was seen ap-
proaching the coast, "iwo r^ozen is as many as you can take.
One pair was spoiled ;fjve pair was in good condition,
(496.) Patience and diligence, like faith, removes mountains.
Life and death is in the power of the tongue. Anger and im-
patience is always unreasonable. Out of the same mouth pro-
oeedeth blessing iind cui-:ing. Idleness and ignorance produces
many vicos. 'I'cmpc'ranco and exorcise preserves health. Time
nod tide waits for no mun. Our welfare and security consists
in unity. To proCoss re .jard and to act diflferently marks a base
mind. To bo good and to seem good is difierenl things. To do
good and to shun evil is equf4.11y our duty.
(498.) That able scholar and critic have died. Vour friend
and patron, who were here yesterday, have called again to-day.
(499 ) Every leaf, and every twig, and every drop of water
teem with life. Every man and every woman were searched.
Each day, and hour, and moment, are to be diligently improv-
ed. No wife, no mother, no child, soothe his cares. No oppres
Bor, no. tyrant triumph there.
(501.) Either the boy or the girl were present. Neither pre-
cept nor discipline arc so forcible as example. Our happinoss
or misery depend much upon our own oondact. When sick-
jjess, infirmity^ or misfortune, affect us, the sincerity of friend-
ship is tried. Neither ability nor inclination are wanting, A
man's being rich, or his being poor, do not affect his character
or integrity. To do good or to get good are equally neglected
■by the foolish.
'.(502.) His time, as well as his money and health, were lost
jn the undertaking. . He, and not we are to blame. James, and
«lsp his brother, have embarked for the gold region, Books, not
SYNTAX — I^OMINATIVE. 129
pleasure, occupies the niind. He, an«jt not they, are mistaken.
* (503 ) Neither the sciiolarft nor tjic teacher was preseat. —
Whether the subjects Qr the king isi responsible, makes no dif'
fere n CO.
(504.) Either he oc T are willing to go. Neither thoa nor
he art of ago. You o^ yoiij brother are blamed. Neither James
nor 1 lias had a letteo' tliis week.. Either Robert or his sons has
me« with great lossc^. Thou, or he, or John art the author of
tliat letter.
(505.) Stephen's party were entirely broken up. The meet-
ing \.ero larg^e .nnd a espuctable. The people often rejoices ia
that A'rhich wiU prftve iheir ruin. The British .parliament are
cooijiused of lofda and commons. Congress consists of a sen-
ate and house of ropre^otative!^. Never were any nation so in-
fiitaattid. The noble :wrmy of martyrs praisath ihee, O God ! —
A great nuci?)er of vvouien were present. The public is respect-
fully informed. Tho audience was much pleased. ThecouDoii
was not unaniHious. •Congress Iiave adjourned.
(508*) Many » one have tried. to bo rich, but in vain. Many a
broken ship hitv^ coimi to laud.
QUESTIONS.
Whnt i.s the rulv? for tlic verb .' For a singuUr noun used in a
plural sous- e .' '1 wo or more substantives singular taken togeth-
er ? A BinjuJaa* nQrumntive and with ? When can noun« connect-
ed by aT.d have a sint^^lar verb ? Ot* several connected nomina-
tive^ with which docs iJieverb agree? When the nominatives are
of ditfcront pers«n;s with whicli does tlic verb agree i* WI>at is
special rule 3 ? Hiovr are nouns connected separately, exclusive-
ly .' The rule for oouns of different numbers.' Tb« lules for
eolieetive nouns ? l^^xplaiu 507. Nominative after 7««7?y a ?
*■■ :\ (\- '■•■*
.' M.:ovr
THK PREDICATE NOMINATIVE.
i){)9^ ^Vh^lXtiT^ The desonptice ioor<7^ after a verb is
put in thg same, cfist an i]it subject l\e/ore it ; m^-'^
'♦Jt i» 1"^'*^' Hc^gh^ll be cfvUed Juku'^'-r-n" She walks a quettOi'
130 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
—'-Si took it to bo /«:»»"— -He seema t6 be a :?c%^/tfr-'^"The'
oipmion IB, that he willlive." HoAce —
Note. As th2 su'^joiit oi' tho vorb can he only in the nd-ioativiir
objective, tho descripiivo word eaa be ouiy iu tho nomidativo or'ob-
jective. " ^
510. Any v?rT> may be tho copula betw leu tbe subject and tbi des-
criptive word, exoaj.t a transit ve verb in the active v<.ice. But
tbose most commonly used in tbis way are tboWerbs to lie, to bevomtt
io sctm, to appear ; intransitive- verbs of iiiotiuu, position, Ac, and
passive verbs, denoting to cnV, name, ■*ti/If, appoint, choose, make, ««-
item, reckon^ ti,ii.<i the like.
POSITION.
511. The usual position of the descriptivG is after tho verb,
as that of the subject is boforo it, ami this is alway,9 the ovdav
of construction. But in both the direct and the indirect (ques-
tion, and in inserted sentences, its j^lace is often different ; as,
" Who is he f" — '-We know not who 7ie is '— '• l.s 7a' a,sTLT-
DKNTV'--"He is the srime that Ae Waa'^- '*=The dog if w.Vs
that died"— "A man 7a <i was to all the cohhtry xlear"'— '•F'ek't ''
was I to the lame" — 'Far other scenk in Tarasymene now."
EX2RCISES TO BE CORRECTED. •
In tbe following sentences, what is its subject? — wbat the descrip-
tive ? C:)rrec: whore it is wrong, and give tho reason for the corret-
ti.on. Thus, we id tbe dancriptive, and shou d ba /, because the sub-
ject it is iQ the uDminative. Rule -"The predicate," k'>i.
(509 ) It is mo. It was me who wrote tho letter, and him
who carried it to the post office. I am sure it could noi have
"been hei*. It is them, you say, wlio deserve most bli\n\e. Vfui
-would probably ilo the same thing it you were him. I under-
derstood it to be he. It may have been him,,, bui. there is no
proof ot it. , . , , . , /
Whom do you think he is? Who do you think him. to be :
Whom do men say thai I am X She is the per«6nN«'ho t under-
stood it to be. He is the man whom you said It was. Lot him
"be whom he may. Can yoa tell whom that man is ? Is it not
him whom you thought it was '\
PARSINOpTrY^RB. 131
THE OBJF.CTi V' E GOVERNED BY VRPJSS.
512. Rule X. — ,1 ..hsitive^ verh in the active voice gov-
ems (he ohJecUiecosc ; iis, *'Wc \o\Q Ji'wi." — "He loves
Ks"— " Whom did tluy send?"
513. Th'e infinitive moo i nr participle used as a noun, or pare
of a sentence, may be i'.>e object of a transitive vfti'b, as well as
a noun or pronoun ; bb, -'boys love to play."—'-'' I know lolio is
there.'' — " I wiaii that th^>j v^nr nvV-'." — ''You see ho^ few have
returned.
srECIAL RULES.
14 r Rule 1. — An fnfravsilive vrrh does not <jovcrn an
ohjec.tive caar. Thus —
" Repenting hivi othis design," blioukl be, " Repenting of bis
design " Still a fe-w anomalies of this kind are to be Tound ; af*
^Tbey laughed 7f/wi to scorn.' — 'The manliness to look the iu6-
Jcct in the face."' — '-Talked tho nnjht away
515. Rule 2. — Intransitive verbs in a transitive seme
(257) govern the objective, case ; as "He runs a race*' —
'^They live a holy ///."
r>lG. To tbid usage may bo referred such eypressions as tbefol'ow-
iug : ''The brook ran ntctur." "The Iro^s wept gum» and lalme."
' " Jler lips blush deeper mocetfi," &c.
h\1. To this rule also belongs the objective after caiiso'Vif^ ; as,
*'Ilo runs a nfcf/e. ''John walks bis horse " " He •works him harfi/
L &e. Such exprssiiion?, how-aver, as, *' yroicn corn," aro inelegant, ai;d
[i should be aroi'Ie 1,
h 518. •Rule 3. — Litrandtive irrhs do rtot admit a%ass've
voice, ejxept 7chen nsrd transitive/^. Thus —
I
k 'I am purposed"—'! am perished," should be/* 1 have pur,
'posed" — "■ I am perishing.' iJut we can say, "My race is run.i
becnu-c rvn is used transitively.
519. A transitive verb in the aotive vo^ce, without an object, eith-
er has an obj .ct understood, or is used intransitive'y.
520. Rule 4. — A traiuitive verh does not admit a prep"
132 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
tf9ki&n a/Ccr it ; tluiH, "I iDTist premi it a fow oli-
jservationsi." "I M'ill not allow of it." Omit with aad
521. Rult: 5. — Verbs si<jnijy.ing to n^me, , noosE, AP-
TOINT, COx^i' '.,: U/iC, (jeneralJi/' ^q\ Uvooh-^^
jeotives.viz., t.-.c I'iuLCT, (Uiioiinri the jiersoii oi' A'l^U o.cted
uipon,and fhri^'iiy-^'''': '^ffotin^ the result of fie avlxxj.)icss'
^d; as, ■■ . ^ iJp^iiiJ', ffTh,Q peapl,e fleeted
52'^. In such i.3ntano<?s/*'^i-t^e passive, vqic«, tha ilircet^ object is
xiiade the 8ulij:ct, aud cl-'' indireul, remains as the descriptiv.6 after
the verb, a.^cordiig to Eiilo IX. Thus, " Ho n^s named Johu." "lie
"was elected J)?■esn'k')i^" '"It w^ i^^-f^^ ^.l'S'^^\'
523. BcsiJestbei itnTneiiate cbjcet in the objective case, seme verbs
Ijaye a /•«mofe object bit vva^jj ^t1)ewwec/m'e and the verb, govwDcd
"by a oreposition understood ; as, *' John p>v8r'Ws o {loqk." But when
the ramota obj-jct conifcs bvst, the preposition must be expressed ; as,
*'John gave ji &oici?Jto :.rn'" Thb verbs thiis used are such .ae sigDify
to- Wsft, <^cA{ y^<^/'y provkli^y^iv^j ''2ittif,'uil, ulUw, dcft^/, an'd'Somo oih-
^,j- , , ., ,; .,...,..,■;,.,,.,,!■;« ...'• ...f,,. .,-.' >,■,..;,.,:-'•./..- '
rosiVipJf V
524. As t lie nominative and objective case of nouas are alike,
the arrang^amcnt of the sen;epcp shpulcl clearly distingpjgh th*)
one case from' tbc o'tuer. The nominative i'enerAi.]y»/'(t;cj2df!.v tlie
verb, and the ohjecCwb follows it. .• ;,,;;,,,••,.';
525. Wlien theobj^c'.ivo is a relative or interrogative pro-
uoun, ifcprc^ii'^'les, both the verb und its nominative; as, .'•' The
3tnan «v^o/«.,we'!5awi^.iddad."T'^" jr/i07» did you send ?^ * '
526. The objective sh on] u not, if pDSPibie, be separated Vroni ils
▼erb by iatcTVf^nintj'clauScJs. Thu:^, " We could hot discoLur, for tb>^
■want of proper tQ^,riitff<^lii^ of them tal.*' Better, "We could
japt, for the wiint of^pfoparvfejits, discover Ihc q^iality of the lutital."
iXEttWsfis TO PE COHIIECTED.
"^ tho foUor7ia«: semsxi'^es. c-errect thccrrora jiccordirj: to the rule.
SYNTAX — VERB. 133
and gire a reason for thie change: 'Parse the sentences corrected.-^ ""
Thus, / should b« //«c, because gover::ed by lovtu. Rule, *-A transit-
tiv9 verb,*' Jk«. :- . /ii <i.i .CJiM ^ - ■ . : , i 1 ' -^ 1 i.w( - .i li'i^
(512.) He lovGs I. 'He and they we know, but who art thou ?'
She that is idle and inischievoua. reprove sharply. Ye only-
have I known. He who committed ' the offenco thou shoulds^ "
correct, not I who am innocent. They that Imnor me 1 will »
hopor. Who do you thitik \ daw yesterday i Who did he mar-
ry } She who wo met at the Spring last giunmer. Who hav-
ing not seen, wo love. Who siiould f weee th-^ mher dsy buf^'*
myxoid friend ? Who dost thou take to De su(?!i a cnT.ird 7 -^ '
(514 ) You will have reason enoug'i to rppcfit you of your, "
foolish coiidiict. They.did nol fail to enlarge themeclyes m\ the
subject.. Go,.^e<? thee away into the land of Judoa. - ifupten.ij
thee home. Sit thee down and rest thee. • > ". ^va»»
(515 ) Several p .if-ons wore entered into atjonspiracy. Fi^'^
ty men are dq.scrted trom the army. 1 am purposed thftt I wiW''<T
notrtin. Hoi" ilnnst perished with cold. 1 am resolved to go.^
HGi8retirtH^to ' v '^■ -vS The plague was then entirely ceased^
Is your fatMr r^E'^r ie tv<is not returned, an hour ago.
I (52(J ) iVo\; ) nur;,' w>u allow of such aprftctice.. False accu-
sation cannot diminish from his real mofitv*.. His servants ve are
to whom ye obey. - He iogratiatos with some by traducing oth-
ers, Thsy shall nOt want for entjoura^^onient. We donot want
for fifnythin^. -OoVe't'^af nearly for ^he 'lj^j?t gifts.' ' * '' ' '"
(5'2'oy docket could ncit better discover, , tiiun by attacking^
s) powerful an interost, his resolutioxi to maintain .his rigjil. —
Tli^^troops j2,ar.3«Gi, without waiiing,l:p. r^st, the enemy to,, Ihfiix?
gate's. ' ' ■ ' '
Wliat is the rule for the transitive verl. : WhatfHkrt of speech
may thc./i^j ict be .' Th<? three ruks for ii^tran.sitiv.e verbs ?_ Ex-
plain .>1^^':T. Why may a transitive vc^b not h;^.ve a preposition ?
WI>WlVfrrb.%'^^ovei-h t'.vo objljcts .' HoW aV>J•!^ngcd iu the passive ?
■\V hat ocher form of remote obj'jci- .-' What id the vtpsition of tl»e
nomiaatiy9 .^nd objective [ ., Explain o'l-].
134 ENGLISH GRAMMAJl,
THE OBJECTIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS.
526. Rule XI. — A prepoaithn (jfoccrns tlte objtctivc cas^;
as, '* To whom much is ijivon, oi' him uiuvh tliail bo re-
quired."-mi i TDH. -ii JUfi) • '
Tha obje«i !df ftf'pripoiilion is ponjotimes an iDfinit're mood— a par-
ticiple u-ed as a nouu — part of a sentence— a pbraao, or dependent
clause, M well ae a noun or proaoun j as, ''lis is about to dtfart.'
* * ktT%Vi %ee cam:'" "Os rcceiviiitj hit dlftloiua." " Muoh depends on
«*A« art hit advitvKt.''
^27. As a general ru\e, it is considered inelegant to eonneot either
an active transitive verb and a preposition, ortwo prepositions with
the same object. Thus, "I wrote to, tkxnl icameU him." Better, "I
mrott to htm, and uonied him."
529, When ihe preposition to, at, in, stand btrfor* names of
places, the following usaj^e .••houUl be cirefully observed, viz :
1. To — 18 used after a verb of rootit n towards: as, " He went f*>
Spain," But it is omitted before home ; as, *' tto hmme."
2. At — is used before names of //".(«*«, viUag>:t, tomht, and /vreign
cities ; as, *'He resides at the Aluusiwii House." ''At SaratO|;«
Springs." "^< Lisbon."
.3. In is used before coiintrie* and Ivgo cities : as, " He lives in
England," * In Lond'm," " In N-» ar York." But at is used be-
fore the names of places ana lar^e ci'ios aftdr the verbs iouvhy
tirrive, lanil, and frequntly after the verb to he; as, ''We touch-
ed at Liverpool, and after a short rassiijre, lande i at New Or-
leans." "Iwas a( New York."'
4. In speaking of one's residence in a city, at is used before the
No., and iu before the street; as, " do resides at N ;-. — ." "He
lives in Stata street." Wtien both are mentioned together, the
preposi ion is conamooly understood b-^fore tbe last ; as, "He
lives «t No. , State street," or " He lives in State street,
No. ."
f»36. The preposition is froqiionily understoo.l. as follows : —
1. A preposition expressed with the first noun or pronoun of a se-
ries, may bo understood to tho rest ; a9, "Be kind to Juhn and
Jarneis and Mart/.''
2. When the reraoto object of aver>>, governed by a preposition, is
.placed between tjc verb and its immediate object, the preposi-
SYNTAX — PREPOSITION. 135
tion id ofteH omitted; as, *'Qivo ot« your, .l^tnid." *' Bring hip a
chair," "Get. 7<e ;i,book."''''- J '•::.'■••{ '!•" otly
3. y't» is commonly oinlt-ted after ^^A'*, ' »»««>•> nijfh'^'M, "£ikt hii
lathor," '•iW(</- a river," &e , and p/ I'requvatly after worlAy
aud untiiorthif, ,-,.,.
531. The ph^.l^e^, inrahi, in is«cr«t, at Jtrtt, at lait, inahort, on high,
and the like, luaj' eiiber bo pAtated toge'.her as adrerbs, Or the Uoun
may be supplied, ifid each word- parsed separately; as *'Iq a raia
manner,'' "Id a aectat plaet,'* Ac. Tf.e pbraiie in a teord, has the pre-
ceding tsrm or relation uoderiitood ; ai, "[lo say] ia a wurd."
SPECIAL RuiiB. '
532. Rule. — Xouns denotinn^ TiMs, value, weight, or
MEASURE, are coiiwionlt/ jmt in the ohjuativt cait without a
i/ovenLi'nr/ word ; aa- -
''kin vfti.6 ah^tfM iiix months \u»t year. '^ "It eost f^ shilling J"*
It is not wartb a cgnt."' "It vreigUs a pound."" '' Tlie wall is
&\xj't:€i liigl), and two feet thick."'
IMii.s may be called the objaciive of iimg, value, &c., as the
case may be.
583. Nouns den -ting timehom lo'-y are generally without a prepesl-
tioQ; at, " He is ten i/ears old." Alt'.* conus denoting time tfh«n, m a
gefoeral or indettnito \yny ; as," Me came last wttk." But nouns de-
nojjLag the time uhcn, deliuitely cr with precision, generally have tho
pr,ppoiiion expressed ; as, ''He came last weeJs. on W«dne»day, in
th4 er^ninij." . ,.-
POSITION.
534. Prepositions should be placed before the words which
they govern, and as near to tlicin us possible ; bui nev«r before
thai as a rehitive,
535. The preposition v/ith its regimen should be placed as
near as possible to the word to wl\ic)i it is related.
EXERCISES TO BE COIIRECTED.
In the following sentence*, point oat the preposition, and the word
136 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
sfoverned by it. Correct the vtrort, and gire^a rcasoa for the cbau^e.
Parse the sentoncss when Gorro ted :
(527.) To who will you give that pen I Th.ati^a smftU inat-
tcr between you and 1. lie came tilong with James (iDd I, He-
gj^ve the book.to some on&. I know not who.-^[524j VVhodoes.
it belong to? 'j'hat book which f read the story in is lost.
(529.) I have boen to Boston. They live at Saratoga Spring;?..
VY«..tA»ohed io Liverpot>l on oor way to New Vork. He ha*
been, to home for some d^>y^rt. Ho Ievks at Uudsou t^trcGt, in No..
42. ^Ve remained in a village in the vieinitj of London.
(530.) Bo 80 good as lend ta m-e your gmnimar. Get to him
a book like that. A.^k ot' uie that Cjueation again.. This ha*
tauglyt to me a lesson which i will ulwaj^ Ix? mindful of. t'ay
lome what yon owo to me. I shall be pleased to do to him a
kindness. Will yuu do to me a favor.
(53j.) The naiui-e of the undertaking was $uch as tp render
th« progress very slow of the work, l^eyond this perl^ tho artg
i^aw not be traced of civil society.
The wronR posUioii of the preposition and its regimen often pro-
duces very liidi«rotig senteDees. Ta« ft>ll.>Kying are a speciuien:
,VV,ante<i a yo«og mar^ to Jake cfvre of ^onie l^orses, of ft reljg-
io»is.turn of mind. The following vt^rses were written by «.^
y()Un<* man who has Ion*; lain in the grave, for his own amusLwIi"
mfeht.*' A public dinner wa? given to the inhabitants, ot roAi^^'^
beef and plui.a-pudding. 1 saw t!»at ihe kettle had been soou'r^ '
«d, with halt an eye. He rode to town and drove twelve cows,
on horsoback. The man was digging a well, with a Romaa
tio£e>
qn EST IONS.
What is tl'.e rule for i\\t preposition .' What uiiiy he governed
by a preposition ? State 52&). Narac the four dli-ecnonfj under 529.
Wlien may the prcpositior) bo tuider.stnoa .' Kipluiu the phrases
Vm vain, &c. What nouus have jio goY$riii»g wv»rsi ' Whi^-re sho^l.<J
fhepvepvisitoin bt> placec] ?
SYNTAX — PREPOSITION.
13T
539. Rule XII. — Certain words and phrases should he
foUewedhi/ ajiprojwiate prepositions.^^
j? J ^' The following ligt may be useful for refcreB«e:~
Abhorence e/./
Abound m, iciih.
Abridge ^orr.
Absent from.
Access to.
Aceommodate io.
Accord with.
Accui9 of.
Acquaint teith.
Acquit of
Acqwicsce tn.
Adapted ^0.
Adequate to.
Adhere to.
Adjudge to-
Admonish of.
Address to.
Admission (access) tc.
Admission (entrance) into.
Aspire io, after.
Aisociate with, seldom to.
Assent to.
Assure of.
Attain to.
Averse to, from.
Banish from, io.
Believe in. sometimes 07i.
Bereft of.
Bestow upon, on.
Betray io a person ; into a thing.
Boast of.
Bind to, in.
Blush a t.
Border upon, on
AdTRDtnge over, of.
Affinity to, with.
AffectioB for.
Agree with a person ; to a propo-
sition from «noth«rj upo* a
thing among thticselref.
Agreeablt to.
Allude to.
Alter to, alteraticn ii.
A mere© in.
Annex to.
Analogy to, wth.
Antipathy ?o agamst.
Approve of.
Arvstj teith, in.
Arrive at.
Ascendant ovtr.
Aik 0/ a person ; for a thing; after
what vft Irish to hear of.
Dtmand of.
Denounce against a person.
Depend, dependent M/on, on.
Deprive of.
Derogate from, derogatory /•.
Derogation from, of.
Despair of.
Despoil of.
Devolve on.
Die, perish of a disease; by an in-
strument, or violence ; for an-
other.
Differ, different/?ow.
Difficulty in.
Diminish /row, diminution 0/,
138 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Call on a person ; at a place. Disabled ./>o>?).
Capacity /or. Disagree with a person; to a pro-
Careful of, in. posal i
Catch at. • Disagreeable to.
Change (exchange) /o;-; (alter) Dis.ippoiiitfcd oAwhat we do not
to, into. get ; in what does not answer
Charge on a person ; with a thing. when got.
Compare m</i, in respect ofquul- Disapprove of.
ity ; to, by way of illustration. Discouragcy?ow; discouragement
Comply, compliance with. to.
Composed of. Disgusted at. with.
Concede to. Dispose of; disposed (;ulj.) to.
Concur with a person ; /nameas- Dispossess of.
ure ; <o an effect. Disqualify ybr,
Condescead to- ' Dissent from.
Confer on, upon. Distinct />om.
Confide in. Divested of.
Conformable, conformity to, with. Divide heticccn two, (niung more.
Congenial to, Eager in, on, of, for ^ after.
Congratulate upon, on. Embark in.
Consonant to. Employ in, on, about.
Consist (to be composed) of, .^to Enamored with.
be comprised) in. Encroach upo7i, on.
Consistent with. Endeavor after a thing.
Contrast with. Engage in a work ; for u time.
Conversant with men ; in things ; Enjoin upon,
about and ainong are less prop- Entrance into.
er. Equal to, with.
Convict of & crime ; in a penalty. Equivalent to.
Copy after a person; frovm. thing. Esponsc to.
Correspond (to be consistent) Estimated at.
with; (answering or suitable) Exception //o?", to.
to. Exclude, exclusion. /ro/«.
Correspondence with. Exclusive of.
Cured of. Expelled from.
Debar from. Exp#rt at (before a noun) ; in (be-
Defend (otbers)/ro/?i; (ourselves) fore an active participle )
against. Fall under disgrace ; from a tree ;
Syntax — prepositions.
139
iFarailiar to^ with ; a thing is fa-
miliar fo us — we w///t it.
Fawn upon, on.
Followed hij.
Fond of.
Foreign to, sometimes y)o7«.
Founded upon^ on, in.
Free /row.
Fruitful in.
Full of.
Glad o/something gained by our-
selves ; a( something that be-
falls another.
Grateful tea, person ;. /"or favors.
Hanker offer.
Hinder /ro?/i.
Hold of; as, "Take hold 0/ me."
Impose ujjon.
Incorporate (active transitive)
into ; (intransitive or passive)
with.
Inculcate on.
Independent of.
Indulge with a thing not habitu-
al ; in a thing habitual.
Indulgent (0.
Influence on, over, iciih.
I u form of, about, concerning.
Initiate into a place ; in an art.
Inquire. — (See ask.)
Inroad into.
Inseparable /ro?7i.
Insinuate into.
Insist uj)on.
Instruct in.
Inspection (prying) into ; (super
intemdence) over.
Intent upon, on^
Marry to.
Martyr for.
Militate against.
Mistrustful of.
Need of.
Obedient to.
Object to, against.
Observance, observation of.
Obtrude upoii, on.
■ Occasion for.
Oflfensive to.
Operate upen, on.
Opposite, opposition to.
Partake of; participate o/,tn.
Penetrate into.
Persevere in.
Pitch upo7i.
Poor in.
Prefer to, over, above.
Preference to, over.
Preferable to.
Prefix to.
Prejudice against.
Preside over,
Prevent /rom.
Prevail (to persuade)"it*<A, on, up-
on, (to Overcome) over, against.
Prey on, upon.
Productive of.
Profit bg.
Protect others from ; ourselves
against.
Pronounce against a person ; on t^
thing.
- Provide with, for,
Proud of.
UQ
ENGLISH RAMMAR.
Interfere with
Intervene between.
Introduce into a place ; to a per-
son.
Intrude into a place enclosed ; iip-
Purge of, ftway.
Quarrel with.
Reduce (subdue) under ; (in oth-
er cases) to.
Reflect upon, on.
on a person or thing not en- Regard /or; in regard ^o.
to
cloBed.
Inur«d to.
Invested trith, in.
Lame of.
Ltrel with.
Long for, after.
Look on what is
what i8 absent ;
distant.
Made of.
Made mue b of.
Rich in.
Rob of
Rule over,
Reckon on, upon.
Reconcile (to friendship)
make consistent) with.
Share in, of.
Sick of.
Significant of.
Similar to.
Sink into, beneath.
Skilful (before a noun) in
f«re a participle) at, in.
Strain out.
Strip of.
Submit t«.
Sent to.
Swcrv*' frotn
537. What preposition it is prpper to use, often depends as much
upon what follows, as upon what goes before. Thus, "To fall /row
a heiyht," " into a pii/' "in battle/' "to work," ^'vpon an fnemy,"
Rely upon, on.
Replete with.
Reproached for.
Resemblance to.
Resolve on.
Respect to ; in respect to.
present ; for Restore to.
after what is Tax with (for example, a crime,an
act) -.for [a purpose, the skate]
Taste of, means actual enjoyment :
taste /or, mean? capacity or ge-
nius for.
Thankful for.
Think of, on.
Touch at.
(toUnite [transitive] to, [intransi-
^ tive] with.
Union with^ to.
Useful for,
Value upon, on.
Vest, before the possessor, in; be-
fore tUe thing possessed, with.
(be- Wait upon, on.
Witness of.
"Worthy, unworthy of. But after
these o/is generally omitted.
SY9TAX — POSSESSIVE.
ui
638. Into is used only after verbs'of motion^ and implies «Mfr«i»(?'«^
In is tised after verbs of motion or rest, and denotes iifuati«n, bttt)
never entrance; as, " He went into a carriage, and rode in it."
539. Bomet, approve, and disapprove, are often used without a prep*
osition following ; so also worthi/ and unmorthy. i
540. The same preposition that follows a verb or adjective, usually
follows the noun derived from it, and vice vtrea ; as, " Confide iv,"
''Confident in," Confidence in."
EXERCISES TO BE CORRBGTKD.
In the following sentences, point out the preposition and the an-
tecedent term. If not appropriate, correct, and give the rule : —
This remark is founded with truth. He was eager of recommend-
ing him to his fellow-citizens. I find great difficulty of writing. —
Every change is not a change to the better. Changed for a worte
shape it cannot be. It is important, in times of trial, to have a
friend to whom you can confide. You may rely in the truth of
what he says. Many have profited from good advice, but have not
always been grateful of it. I have no ocmsion of his service. Fa-
vors are not alwaj^s bestowed to the most deserving. This is very
different to that. Virtue and vice differ widely with each other. —
Come in the house. We rode into a carriage with four horses.
The boy fell under a aeep pit. Such condnet cannot be reconciled
to your profession. Go, and be reconciled with thy brother. A
man had four sons, and he divided his property bet\v(en them. I
an now engaged with that work. He insists on it that he is right
QUESTIONS,
What is rule 12 ?Be prepared to gfve the appropriate preposition
after each word or phrase in the list. Repeat &37, IS^plaia the
use of into and in. What is said of boatt^ worthy^ &c. ? Repeat §40.
THE POSSESSIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTAN-
TIVES.
541. Role XIII. — One substantive, governs another in
142 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
the possessive, xclie.n the latter suhstanticc limits the signi/j-
cattonofthe former ; asy " Virtue's re in trd" — ^^ John's hook."
542. A BubstantiTe, limited by the T osaessive, may be any coun in
any eaie, or a verbal noun either alone or witli its regimen, or
modifying words ; as, * On eaglea' iriiic/t." " He wna rpposed to John'a
tcridug," "I am in farar of apnpil's composinij frcquentli/," "John's
hmviny devoted himtelf too miicii to sliidi/, was the cause of his sick-
n«t8."
54K The noun gevernini; the possessive is often understood; aa,
" This book is John's [book] " It i« always omitted after the pos-
s«i«iT« ease of the person il pronoan ; as, " The book is mim-, thine,
our$," A,9.
544. When several nouns come together in the poaressive cafo. im-
plying common possessing, the feign of the j)ossej!8ive is annexed to
the last, and understood to the rest; hS, "Jano and Lucy's book." —
But if common possession is not implied, or if several words inter
vene, the sign of the possessive should be annexed to each ; as, ''Jane's
and Lucy's book," that is, books, some of which are June's and oth-
«ra Lucy's. " This gained the king's as well «s the people's appro-
bation."
&46. When a name is complex, consisting of more terms than one,
the sign of the possessive is annexed to the last only; as, "Juliua
Csssar's Commentnries," "John the Baptist's head." "His brother
Phillip's wife," 'The Bishop of London's charge."
546. When a short explanatory term is joined to a name, the sign
of the possessive may be annexed to either ; as, " I called at Smith'.s
the bookseller," or, "at Smith the bookpeller's." But if, to such a
phrase, the governing substantive is added, the sign of the posecss-
ive must be annexed to the last; as, 1 called at Smith the booksollor's
skop."
547. If the txplanatory circumstance be complex, or ooneistiug of
more terms than one, the sign of the possessive may bo aunexed to
the name or Irst BubsVantiva ; as, "The Psa'ni is David's the king,
priest, and prophft of the people." "That book is Smith's, the book-
teller in Maiden Lane."
640. When two noana in the pogsessivo are governed by differ-
ent words, the sign of tht» possessive must be annexed to each ; as,
"He took refuge at the governor's, the king's representative," that
i8,j"atthe governor's heuse."
649. The s after the apostrophe is sometimes omitted, when the .
SYNTAX — POSSESSIVE. 14^
first word ends, and the following word begins, with an », or when the
use of it would ©acasion a disagreeable repetition of » sounds; as,
*'For righteousness' sake," "For censcienco' pake" "For Jesus' aak*.'
In other cases, suoh onaissions wttuld generally b© improper; as,
"James' book," ''Miss' shoes," instead of, "James's book," "Miss's
shoes.
550. A clause of a sentence should noter come between the possess-
ive case and the word by wbiph it is governed. A noun governing
the possessive plural, or two or more nouns severally in the possest-
ive singular, should not be p'nral unless the sense require it. Thus,
"The men's health (not healths) sufl'ered from the climate." "JohH'«
and William's wive; are of tho s.trae »^e."
551. The possessive irJiosoever ia sometimes dividing by interposing
the governing wod; as, "whose house soever." This, in general, how-
ever, is to be avoided, and to bo admitted only when eupbonj and
precision are thereby promoted.
EXERCISES TO BE CORRECTED.
Ill the following sentences show which is the limiting substantive
and which is the one limited — where wrong, correct according to the
rule or the observation.
(541.) Virtues reward. One mans loss is often another mans
gain. Mans chief end is to glorify God. My ancestors virtue is
not mine. A mothers tenderness nnd a fathers care are natures
gifts for mans advantage. On eagles wings. For Christ sake. —
For ten sake. Which dictionary do you prefer — Webster, Walker,
or Johnson ? Asa his heart was perfect. John Thomson his book.
Lucy Jones her book.
(531.) He was averse to the nation involving itself in war. Much
depends on your pupil composing frequently. He being rich did
not make him happy. I am opposed to him going on such an expe-
dition.
i' (543.) That book is James book ard that one is Roberta. That
^ knife is your knife, but T thought it was my knife. My book is
old, but your book and Roberts book are new. Which is the best
book, your book or my book?
544.) William's and Mary's reign. Cain and Abel's sacrific
144 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
were not the same. David and Solomon's reigjn were prdspcrous,
John and William's wife are cousins. Men, women, and cbildrens
ihoas for sale. He cared for hia father and also for his mother's
nlerests. The Betsy and Speedwells cargoes we're both saved.
(545.) Messrs. Pratt's, Woodford's <fe Co.s hookstore is in New
Tork. Thompson'a & Company's oflicQ was on fire. Jack's the
Giant-killer's wonderful exploits. The bishop's of London's charge
to his clergy. The Grand Sultan's Mahomet's palace. The sec-
retary's of war report.
(647.) Call at Smith the bookseller and stHtioner's. The par-
cel was left at Johnson, a merchant in Broadway's. He ennilatrd
Ceesar the greatest general of antiquity's bravery. General Taylor
president of the United States, an excellent man ana bravo sol-
dier's residence.
; (548.) That house is Smith the poor man's friend. We spt-at an
agreeable hour at Wilson, the governor's deputy. The coach :itop-
ped at Mr. Brown, Henry's father.
(B49.) James father arrived yesterday. Charles books are com •
plctely spoiled. King James translators meiely revised former
translations. For conscience's sake. For righteuueness's sake.
(856.) They condemcd the judge's in the case of Bardwell d»^cis-
ion. The prisoner's, if I may say so, conduct was shameful. Pe-
ter the Hermit's as Iro was called, opinion. Ail men have talents
committed to their charges. It is tbe duty of Ohrisfians to submit
to their lots. We protest against this course, in our own names
and in tho names of our constituents. A father's and mother's lovea
to their children are very tender. The gcnt.emans and ladys healths
are imp'-oving.
• QlJESTlONai
l^he rule for the possessive ? What niay bu limited by the po.'-
sesslve? Is the governing word ever understood'.^ What is tho rnU)
for the pdssessivfe sign when several nouns come tojrMher imply! !••
common possession ? What is common possession ? Wh';,^^ t\1k^
the pbSseBiiott is not common ? When a name is cotr-^,',p^^ Wliei
ashorte-^planatory term is added? If the explo^,^^,^,.'. eireumstaTir.
be conaplex? When two nouns are govev^^j j,y (liflVrcnr, words r
When is the s omitted? When a u^^.^f^ governs the possessive plu-
ral? May wAoiOfvr be divided ? ^'
SY^TTAX— SUBJtrXCIIVB. 145 j
suBauxcTiyj^ *mgop.
byt Iltrpi: 2IIV —^Tho su^Junclt've mo^d li'used ifi </e#:\;:
p'tndent c'auiCf^ wh^n hoiu cnntinji^nci/ cr.dauhfy and faturi'.
f(/, in'o-^xprcs3:d ; as, ''If ho continue to stuJy howilliin*
5>V3.- W\ion conlinjency or doubt only, and not futuvitr, isiia*
plied. tViei indicative is used ; as, " If he has money he keeps it."
i5 t CoBtingjtey 'or doubt is n«^iially expressed by the connectives
*;/,. tlHMtyh, HiiU 9, ex:cpf, whether. &(i. ; but wheihsr futuri y is implied
t-f Qot, must be g^ithesed from tli© context.
Ibh. Formtrly, t'- e fcubjuKC;ive wps used to express contingency,
ordfubt, whit-er futur.ty vfa3 ini; lied cr not. 0'' tbis, theJiigliall
Bible furnish' 6 CNampIvs in a'tuo.-t.evcry p 'go.
liZ.G. Lest and that, jinncxcd to <i conmiaud, require the siibjiinc-
live ittcjjd ; a?, '-Love not sleep, k»s,t thoii come to uovei ty"' — "Taka
ht-ed that thou speak not to JaeoV), ciihi r goi.d or bad " .And sonic-
limei *slthout a t-oniinnnd ; '-They ih;'.li bcur thee i:p, Icsi hou dush
thj foot .»\a;ain3t u stor.e.
557. //".with iuf fidb)\ving it, when fujnrity is denoted, rpquirea
ih9 subjunctive mood ; jxs, .' If he do but torn h ;lie hill-, ihfy .■•haU
fnaoie." But wlsen futuri* time is not implieil.ilje indicative is Used;
as •' if ht doea but wliif^por, every word is heard dist nctly."
5 3 The subjun ; iv^ mo 'd is U3u I to eriv ss n. wish or dcairej a?,
* I V isb I «,e/« fit home." ''0, t'lat be tcera vi\ v."
Q 9. A 8urp"sitiin or wit-b, iaiply ngji prcRentdfninl o'' tbe filing
siipposed vr depire<l. ia tsprrs td by ti i pa.-t suVjuiciive ; as, "If my
kio^doaj v*r« of thii wwrli, thiaw ul 1 my iervuuts fight.'*
EXT.RCISES 10 L2 CORP.ZCTED.
Whatrerbs Iq the following sentofc?, shoul,<1;iecordi'>5'fo thera^e
be in tie subjunctiro mood, and w'.iat ia the iiidicative ?— corrcot lUeia
aecorJinjjly— p irse tho scnieacoi coirectol.
552.) If ij» man smites hi3 servant and he d C3 he shall surely
\>e put to death. Wu umiit go to-tnorro«-, un'cs if. ;siin3. Tl:ere
will be 0 .euglito do next week, if t!io wea'.her is good. Thoujrli
\beaky ' ©clear, it ia cold. lie vv-ill iniiutaiu hi3 cause, thouLjIjhe
iQ^m Ua f 9tate« Wo may g(ii tliQ IclWxv U' ilic mull umvvs in, Uttd* 1 1
7
14^5 -^ KNOUSU ORAUilAR.
jobn ba come, why UiJ you not tell mc? It' it stiows all nijrUt, tUd
road* will be imp!\ssilile, A-k John if he kno>^ wlieu Jhe.legiflla-
T.ufe meet. If he know anything, be surely knows, ihat unlers he
gtti better he can not be removed. Ifthonbe the Son or(ji)<], com-
mand that these stones be n\ uie bread.
^.^)56.) Take cure that the lior^e do>.'S nm niii iiuny. .^i-i- ilitit l!r<»!i
do§t it not. Let hiiu ihat btundei^i taUo h( e<t U':it 1;,) lut s Khs thv
►Son, lest he is an^^ry. liepiove not a f\ (trii<-r, h-it h« btUOi tl.u^.f.
(5j7.). If he be but in liealtli. it \v:ll be :he (.'.iii-e of great thHtk-
Inlneia. If he does but ran, he will s >i)a oreitake thiMii. if he t«*
but in health, I am coiiteiii. O, \}ui\ lie was wise' I wish 1 wa^
at home.
(550.) If I WMS not Ale.xamlcr, I vo-iUl be niticf^i"'-?- If'il ft'i-*-<»
not so, 1 would havu told yon. If he wan a yfa: olJci , 1 would Sfud
him to pchool. Was gold m ivc. aliuii>iaiii. ii. wt»uld be of le.^s vaJ-
iie. If he was an impostor, lie inusl bavtr lieeii delected. If 1 v us*
li*, I would ac.-eplilie ofT.r. \V;is I ht', 1 wouM accept tip uflcr.
Q.U i: .ill OXS.
"Wliftt ij; t!ie rulf» for the subjun tive ni.*>:il ' \V1ti:r (.:?:•) v.biMi
doabf, only is iinpH'»d7 How i.^ C'tntincenf y cxpi eiicd? Mnw vrai
The subjunclive formerly utcd? \\"h;it cf /fsf ;',\a\ tfiai K A^hat of
»/ with A/'.M'o!lowing? How i atli.-iif or ui-b e.xprcSaeu ? Ei-
plftiu f).",l».
TITK TXFIXlTi-\-l-: Mr,Oi>.
500. rtULT: W . — TJie i: /u(i/'ce mnnd U ijft'rruc'l ly
V6KBS, NOIJNS Of ADJECTIVKS ; flS, " t <li?Jie to lertPli" —
*'A deaire to Icavn"- — '^An.tious to learn '
561. Th« J^infinitivc is a !<ort of veiual n ur.y.iU t l-dS tie eoi.3l;:tvLiyu
wfHoth a uoun and a verb. ' . ,
.162. A-t a noun, the infinitive may be : 1. T]ie. subjeet of a rertj
A9, ^'■To plan 18 pleasant " 2. The ohjn-t of a verb ; ap, '•BTr»y3 tut« io
play." 3. The t/e.?c//y>'//r(' after a cojMilutive veib ; as, '-'Jle is.tO be
m 9i):t[9^." ■ A. la tJij>2^osi (ion with uttOlhot noun;" as, "'SpaYe', Spiift'
I
SYNTlX—lNFr^trTlVB. 14?
.YOijr frlemi the tesk, to read, (o no'1, io acnjf] /n cMirfff^.n." :■>. Thet-i.
Jcef of a prpposilion ; .ms, " About fo r/rp'irf,'^ '"What weiit ye 'out
for Io .tee Y"
SVVX'IAL nt'ij-.s.
oi\i, V.i i.K 2. — Oi}*' vi'i-l) ijnri-,-n.< iinnihcr u.^ iU cbjict. or com-
■ -I
yltuiy'iti ini'if. lufmiUce; us. -JJ -ys love to jih/i/'—'-Thoy seciu
fi<55. Vcrhs wliifh t ike tlie inliai ive as tbelr ohJr.<'l are transitiva
\ orf>8 in tlio netiv«; voioo »Tid tlif iiiliirfix f, tiib^r j>I<»nf, or ttioditled
by otlier vordji, b equivHltml t*^) Uu* oVjetiive cufcc (^(.'3 ) Verbs which
t:ibe tbeinthnuvf* as their c<)</ij»-'«;///m'\ tList Is, in vxAeTjUl our ur coiu.
ji!etc rhe id**!! iTitomleJ. aro intransitivo cr pa^tiivo vtrl'S.
i»0.j. W \\.y. ;> — 7//C' iiijinilli'f, a ^ t'n- .^uhl-rl. or th^ oUjcrt of' a
t>iirrb, sOiKrfin.c^- hu.s- a suUj.-.'vl of i(.i Oivu in iht ohjertivecoi.se.
, • - ♦ ■■ ,
5rt7. TeehUer ronstrucHoi^ thtj, infiuU'vc, witi its ?u''jt>ot, U an
iibridjr<^^l de;)en'l'^«»t cUufS-.-. nnd when iHtvl as \\i<^ s»n^-JHft, is ititro-
duoed by /./#•. Tht.8, S'thjeci — * V ,r m t.t d) ?<i» would b« impn^pir.''
^iaB*'Thit we sluiu'.d (in i i wmiM h^. iunp'v.per." OfJif<-( •-"] know him.
to bd-vQ.H^*)!!' Ht m«ri".«:'r kuow »,Uat. At i.s hd ho««at man," taken to'
^ether, cqu'v^leut r<t, '<tbat he is ti'i honest roan "
n08# Hulk 4. --The ihtinitive r? iistxJ a.'i a dt-sr /iplice afUr any
V.H\) :l; a'-<jjtf.ll-l ; fl-', •■'^'■>i| .iPi' fo hLim^."
3)9.Wh3!i ujvi u3 ;i I i-ripnvtf i'"tc<r tb ) \r rb i» be, the infinitiya
daij-^tes —
1. A»i 9^1 uvalirit oxp;-).?'! m ; a** 'To obey i« '■> e.ijorf."
t, *V*hi*; is po»sidrt or o'jIs.^ it»f? ; a^, ' ll^ld is to b«/(,uuof in Call
ff^mia'. — "The liws are ^v fr? c't^-»rn»^." ■ •'
3 What 18 settled ail dotormiiod* u^i'jh, n'n roif (*-)urJse, ('af>nf. ; a-j.
The ^b'p i.^ ^» *io7 ^o•la trrf'\f ." • ^
570. Fit ».«•: r*. -'!'(•, //<{- ,s«'///j o/'Me iiifin-if.ivf, it not lued afit-r
t!t9 C^trhs 01U. DAKf, N'EKP, MAKK, SKE, ftR\B, FBK.L, afifi LfIT, i/<
/A€ actu"^ t'olee, nyr after let i;i the pa.'tsia ; as, 'I saw hioi do
ii" ''Yell n^erl ntd go."
571. To ttis rule there are s:me exceptions. As it relartes only
14^^ E^'iiUar .^liiAMJklAB.
to euptooy aTjd uaas?, ^o may be inserted when barBbnesa wUl not
thereby be produced ; tbu?, ''CocfoloaB that his' o^*tione'need'^^■be
disguircd." — M':Keiyi{t.
57 3. For the satue roa:on, to x-i so-.uetiine«i omitt*?! aft«r the rerbs
^terceire, behold, obnrrvo, have, aud hnow.
675. Wbeu eovori^l Irfiratlvea ooa>b t-getber in tba sauiR conbtnio.
tinn, the Kicjn fo cxprcsod iritb ibo lir5> is.ei'mitlines omitted vith
those (bit f How ; tbus, "It is better tj be a king and dre, tban to
live and be a vrlDor«," Tbi^ aliould re?er boVlurie when tiibr barsb'
nePS or c-hicur ty wonld bo tborooOlr. ' '
574. To, the sign of th.» infif^itlve, s'loiM never hy u'^od furtbelo/
fioitlve itself. Tliaa, ' I bavo net ■wrriiton, aud do not intend to," ia
a coTloquial vulgirlsm for, "I bav«» not written, and I do not iotood
to ■write ''
575. RuL»:-5, — Th<i injinUioe i^ umd ti) express i/tc fCrtro««.
KND, oz-DF-.-oTGN uf tkc pricfdln'jaci : a*". "Si^mc wbo came* to
scoff, vomaino.l io proj:'
570. Run: l.-^Li comparnaous, the inftriiiioij m^od U pui after
»o AS, Tno.or THAN , ft^ ''Bo 80 %i\K>\X !is to r<\,vi ih\^ letter" 'Too
uM ioUixrn.^^ "vViscr than ioundcrkd:eit.*'
3'8<, The i flnitiv* J8 Pom»jtiii ea usoi to a»^ign, lu aa abridged
f,»nn,tb(» rf;)*»on « ftha^ which g*>i:? before , a9, 'Bate coward tbattbe^
art /o _/?««.'" ''Vograteful raRn ! fa ua«.*e rnj fortune^ rot' me of icy
peace."
AT8. 1b« ioilnUivc it 5' Dielancs put absolutely, wlthoul a g^T^rn
inj5 Vscr.l ; " /'(/ ca-j the truth, 1 way in fault.'*
a79. The inflniiira i* scraetitiiefi omiiLd: as, '*I oonsi ler hiqi (to
bs) a!i bonffit man.*'
58 K ib© inii. i ire, in tbeFeeeveai foustructioas, in parsing maybe
britfiy elated tbua ; • Tiio iufinifive as the subject of--^— " "ntthecd,
^tct o*"-— -" *'ae the ;»,"e'iHcaf6 aftor— - — " "The luSnitivo o/ j/>n,r^c9i^^
«o»»/)ari5Q» —cause— iw«rf ubsofutefy *'
KXERICPES TO »JE CoRBKOTEb,
Tb<r« U but llttU liability to err in the use of tbio uio.-d, etsa^'t
in its tense, and 5n the i.'n proper u*ie or omlealon of the sign <«. WUcb
there ie no rule to authoriau the cmisaloa.U should V<) i&stried«
. (J>1i.) You need not to bs lo serious. I have teen lomo yoapg
c
SYNTAX— FAETIGUPLE8. 149
pereoni *<s eondac^ themgelrei rerj disoreotly. lie bid m« to go
henifl. Tba boys -Kere fill let to go fit cnce. Let -no man to think
too bijfWy oi hlmJiolf.,. T-T.^jflll hoc^d lim"tc>sflj it. He ^ as heard
say it bj «verTb»dy. SoDiaoue b?it iLem to jiass il^ehoase. Tbey
were seen pa B6 the bo'.ise. I hare observed some gaiirisca to us«~
tb» torra. D*ire ba wise. They wore bii Gom? into the bouip. - B^
safe to wfito yourself, tiud tell bL'»i to. And Uv« M Ood designed
«9 to.
P' In^ rtt»t tH« tiseoft^e SriBDH'Tfl 3*1 f^*^ ff iLo-cpir^. scd'^c^c?. and
sliow bow it l8 gortrned. Analyze fbe ienteacesi
it too often happens tbat lo be ftbore tb« reach of want just pla-
ces uft within the reavjh of am; ico. It does^ no good to prea<!h
g^'ntrosity, or «^tPD justice, to tho«?rivho have neitberscnpc nor
9OQI. He WOP born to be grjat. To a^complihh thcpo end**,
{^avagps resort to cunning. Thpy thought fo n^.nke themselvea
rich. Great <ie.-iiro^ are dlficnlt to be f!;rftfifipd. Some people
rife difiicalt to pU^ftt?. To knox© OQr.;clve^, we muft con:nienc*>
by knowing our own \^'ea}ines6fb». If we have not nlwnje time
to read, we hats always time to ir#»fi€5i, To be of Jud t« be ■
that ie ib« tjuestion
Whatie {ha tn\« k^i tbc-lftfinitive? Fr. what vfayh if Hi«. uifuiitlre
nied? Uppeat rule 1 ftnd ?, What verbs take the Intiniiivt- «san
obje:t? Ap A cotnplemont? Repeat rule 3. Wh:U is thO lufiiii*
tive wirh itt* subject? Repeat rule 4. What UotiS the -infinitive
denote wben used as ft doscriptivo ? riepoat rule 5, What except-
i-jas? May the siy-n of tiie infinitive be tised without the verb? —
Repeat ruie 6 ftnd T. Wh.vl ia the infinitive absolute? How ftife
tl^^ ^iffrieoT vonitrncrioris parsed ''
TKF. PARTIOIPLE.
, 581. Rvi'f-Xy I.— i^2iic'(^r€* havt ih^ t'^n${/u('tk>H q/
ngun$^ adf€ciiv€»^ and verh*
50 ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
♦- . . ' .
SPECIAL RULES.
Rule 1. — .1 pnrticipfe v.^ed on n n.ixn mrty h^ I'hfi nrrlHi-
r\atioeto <t ffrb,or fhe ohji^cl or deS'^ripln-r aftfr a crrh f^r
preposition. . . ^.. .-,',■,
RuLK 2. — A p.irdr'ph- nofmidrasanouVf'Jt^lffn^iiMjX
noun or proit.iun. - - i-i»^a
Note. Whoa a n'-t.icplo forms part of a f!ul)slaiiti « pbrif4;'llll
jj.tit to boijargfr^ vOwparaK'ly.tbc whole phrapo is purscfl a«one woxtU A
no'jn or pronom folloviing % participle oJ" tbo vexh <o .&«, must )»• 'm
the ''oaainative oaae , .
582. The });irf,j«'iple, wljile u-^ed !H a n.>nu or :•. flfootive." fn;vy
be modified in all rt'HpectH as ihe v«rh.
srKriAf. nrT,EP. -
583 Rulk i.~ W/,ni thr present or per/rrf pnrtidpU
is iised as a nov.n, a noun hcfure it i§ pntin the po^^e-fif^'ive
ease-ySiiy "Much deponils on the /)<//-»/r.s eonipOMin^- fre-
quently." '• y/t.v hji\ing (Icne/so is*evicfou*t.'* '
584. Hut ji pronoun, in this construction, must V)e iho p<>S'^R-
fiive pronour», arvl not the possossivo cupo ; us, '-Muoh doppiids
on your coniposinj;," &o. ; v\ot i/uur.s.
.7»5. lu ma'<y oasa.", tlie nowHiativtj or ^oVi.^otive casa hQ''<)ro tbe
prueeut participlo as an n^ljcitii-e, wUl express pearly tbe ^nuio i.Ooft.
Thuf, " .M'loh wll d<>)» «u>l on the jmpil'n comp-isinir," and '^Muoh
will (iepedil on the jxip'f c iiH;><Mi)i^," mean Hulmtantially th« same
thing. Stii!, the tH)n£tructinn ia different : i>) the lirst, thoi/tju <;*;/<'/'<«!
is on the c<> //»/>«* •'w.y, in lh*» flooyn«l if is «tu l\nij.)npil ; and thoutjh in
these examples iL^ souse ia iie irly l'«o saute, yot there are ofton ex-
amples ia wbirh the 801130 id eutirely <HfFcrftnt. Thus, "What do
yon think of my Ao/y('*'< rnanin;^ t )-uay ?" implies he hua run, «)itl
asks, *'tiow do you think bo ran V iJut, ** What do you think of my
/m>/-«<? running to d;iy ?"' implies he /<"<»« nol ry.n, and ask^, '* Do you
think ho should run ?"
586. Btle 2.— TlV^^rt tin: present pa rticipU n»ed as n
noun, has' :an. \nfictVi o/' itl)^ECTiyE pefortifyihe^prf'jfdsi'
SYNTAX — PAKTICIPLE6. -1^1
i tron OT follows; AR, ' By tJ\e obf^erving of tkrsc. xu\ei."
"This was a romplrfe f(irv*;u'<ing of the truth."
bil. Bo'b the artu^le n.n^'\ n/'ui iv l.e oiiiitiv-'l, bat not the on* witb-
•^iit the ©titer. By thii ouii.s«i<tn. the participle bst-oiuep a, partieipal
rf'Eiw, ait'J Cisn bo m >tl li- i .^^ lUi' vcrij. (>/cj,n Lot be used whan a-
prcp^sitr ij fol'ows.
5^"8. T^v,hw.Z — yi':it.n\t!i''rcrhal nonn expresses some-
I 'ili.i):(*'fifu'!i'CfiVer)iyii:nfolorri7i(] is t l.e rotR, it should
lnr,^f!tA ariij:fe^andfhej>ri:j)(>Jtio)); iu<, "It was said in
rAfiiir^i^r/^^^o/ilie \vuiu!>s/' But v hen it (Xfi^sc^ ^i^mc-
*'(''*[! 'f e- hich ilie raun ("II'iU'Iikj is not the doer, bid tlie
f^y.iiCT. O'ifh ahoviii be 01,, i ted ; iis, '"The court ?pcut
f^oine fiijic ii> huir wj. tlie v. itjioss.''
089 Ki'L" 4.-»- '/V<e j)a>ii participie and not the pa^t
U:.iiSe, Siiovld hciis-d ii/ter the avxHiories uavk and UEja's,
'I have y-rff'tM' Xiiot'wru^r)— "Tlio letter is written*'
^not w,oe:)'
500' .S I, :jts;),_the pai^l participle Hiumld not bo iiseil for tlie
, j>;igt ,terise:,as, -"'iin /^;<," not run — -I saw,'' nut aecn-^'^ldid'^'
"tiutdoue.
.7^1. Til'. jKii 1 jiple iif 3om-tiuie=i used absolutely, having no de-
p^D'i«7t:c o I aoy'other Wiv.l ; a.», "Prcpciiy Kpeuki«<j, thcr« ip BO
F.xr«rTs:.8 to we conR?:rrED.
tn rii- f .1 ,. v,; ^ , . r "jc/'--, corrcot the errvTS, an 1 give a reason
f*) "■ li.e •liiaii <ie.
(5S i ) rts being me need make no (iilTerence We could not be
'n e of its being him. Tiic whole depended on its being them,
t^HSj Mm xe.>tlljaj; a^aini^t his Maker, brought him into rirrir. —
.|4>fv}.'h h irir.g been sold by hii! brethren, was overruled for goo<l-
^oJ upholding all lliinj^s, is an evidence of his power. Il« beipc
a gre-af man did not make him a happy mrtn. A man being poOf
doGd DOt Uiake him nii.serable. AVhat do you think of my
Horse running to-day? Did he tun well? What think yon of mj
ho.r8« B ronnlng to-day? Will it b© safe?
1!j2 EXGLisn cnAMMAR,
(r)8G ) TTo ppcnfl^ rnrt orins timo j'l stndylnjt ©rtho cl.i?sio«.
By ilie (iliTjiiiiiii;-: wixl'inj y«Mi will coniiunrnl respo •% , D^ ob-
l:iinin;r "T ill" |.i-i)jii>s:,l '«Iii.!* was" ( qi!:.l -o rcji'Ciing nf/lha
jimnosiil. 'I jio t<'iH'))ni;r :'.Myiliii!;i; well i ('qnlrcs {.ivrnl npttllca-*
ti'ni. Lo:n'"fi:g"f njivtliiii- wtll rfqMirijs jiih lit-ation., .i\lfitf'k*
ncss is in;inir«'Moci in Miff'iii.;: (.fil-s |.:itientlv^-i:j tl.e suffering
alls pfiri('ntl_v--i!i ilif m.C" r'w^n; ,,f ilis juiir-jiily. . In the pttiient
pufF.-ritin ills — ill j aiictii Miif.'i-iri;i (if ilis. RocatJiie of piuVi^king
Ills .sons jiikJ dati;;litovs. jlio l^urd al»honed tliem.
(oH8 ) In tlip licarin;:^ ( F tlic will i-oad- nrul in .the csaininjrj];
orMiM'lry piipcrs, n.iuli i'.v.a' wis j^pctit. Tl.c greattBt phin it
guff vimI ill rhi' cnttiii;:; of ihi* skin. ^
(o8D ) l.'s has i.rdke li:s c:ip i hnvo dranl? rnough. "The
tret! \v..» sIkioIv hy tlio w nd. 'I'he tree has K-il. S<>ino (jno hns
t<)M>: TTiy pen. I f^ooh the rn:»n who d^no it. lie llH^• brgjin the
Avoik- Some rt'll liv tho waysi'le mid- \vji< trnde down. Th«
Fronoh lan;:uaj^o isspi»k(; m ovt'»y rart of Kurt.pe.
(50 \) Th«' fortri'S^ was hoinj; builr. '! ho ppf)C whrre this
new and "tranjre tva;rf'dy wa.^ hein;:; actpd. An ntteinpt wns
"beinj; made in ihc Kii;^li~h pavliainnnt. T!ic ».ia;:;nificent ehuroh
now h.'lng fM'OUfcd in ihe oi'3M)f New York. VVhile thcpe thing*
Were holng transactod in Ki glaiid. Wliile tho crrcniony was
neinjr pP'h)i'niod The enn?t was ihcn iieing held. And fitill
lie l»t'i»ig dnn" and irovor done. \V!iG:it is being stdd Jit a fuir
prirc. G' IJ is being foniKi in great qnaiiiitics. A report 18
n"W being prrpavcd. G'lnds arc b^ing Kidd « ff ut first cost.-i^*
While the Ilcee^^a^y mcvcn.cnt vmis bi-ii g made.
.QUESTIONS.
TThilt is iho rule Tor the pai-tiflple? rtcp^at, the two ppcciAl rnles.
Ilepejii tlip notp. WIumi nri^t 'ho nom befoi-o the pnrrioiple he
in tlio possessive case ? Kcpr^at ilu'Suh.etani'e of 585. Whfo must
offo low the paiti('i|)Ic ? vriuU is the rule for iijsinjr or omitting
the Hrti(de and ^>r(•po^ilion ? U'hat is tlio rule lor the past partl»
Ctjile? VVIiiit is tin absolute participle ? . -V^'
■Vin i'J !'J'.( r ;•••;.., ' . t- ■•. .:
CONNEXIO:^ OF TENSES.
502 Rr LE X V I L — //<- (he u $6 r>f v n- js ^ and wor4^ ' '^tfaf, ■ ,
in point of (hue r<.late to each. rtJier, f/'« order of time mvM
ht chhercfd ) fls. "I hiivo known liim these ni.'iur yenrB,"'
not, **I know him these mar^ rcfir? ;" nor, '•'I 'knew
him these many je.irs."
A^'8. liKXSAfK. — The part'«u^or ttnsc nc:f p--arv to bo uj^* 1 n nst "p-
p<jn<l rpoa tLfe lenee, 8i*<] do luloS csn te ^;5ren tuat w il wpp}/ to
fill oasce. iiut it nifty b* proper to wbsarve -
ft04. An ^bfervatiou whicb ifi alTrave trnc niupt be express?! in ttie.
prcselt ifcse; as, 'The 3l<ft;T bcli-Ter! tliat 'hH crimes ore f([\\9\^ '
505. The prsfent p tfc t. u^d i/Ot the p-e'ent tcnjc fbr-uld b" Bjed
in coaTiexJf'n witb words denoting an exter.l of lin;t' cortjtuetJ to tb«
present; ihn", " Tbey contintie with ma now tLieo dftyi^.' ehcul.i b-
' /t«r« eoiiiiiitted."
5&6. Tbc pr«Sfl2t perfift tciii* cogbt nertr to bf used in voDn<5;
ion Vflh WorrgtvLich expfccs past liiue ; ILup. "I tavo jartxerl^
metttuned bis ftttachment to^tuuV/* fkculd fee, "Ifurajcrly ui«>ntiijD-
ed/' ' ■ ■ ''
f67. Tbc pr'if«Dt and post of tie a\ xiiiari'if, »/.///. %ciff, >*//»^. rM»,,
sh'uJd never ho afaocUted in the j?anic ftr 'e'>oo; a d carcJJL>u^t J»o
taken that, the eubBet^u«'nt verb be expr* teed iii iLu fame tinse with
t'>e antecedent verb ; tbne, *'I HK<y or cm do it coir, if I ,/iroro" —
' I might or cirvld dt/it now, if I tlwst.'
fi'-^S, It dOj')'}<ida:if. ol t is^':, t'lo past porfcct JquIc^^Ijt'c or p'Men.'inl
ie n»ei toexpiosean event arteccdint fn, luf ri'rt'r cor f< ir.pTnry
witb^ cr bii'-e-'quoTit fo, tbnt txprofsod ly t> reib. in'' fTn» piij't toiihe
in the Jeuuiug ulnuse. TLu', w« can i^y. '*I be'itvod la; }ifl,< d(Mi© ii,"
I at not, "I hvp?d ho bad dono it j", bccuuse //?.<>/ U5u.v re^er lo <»lt*t.
i- pBPl^ but /i"//e always vortT? tw sjoiolhiug: ii» the futui«. ^ , ,
M3y. When sfujaul is uBci i^u'teud of o-"^?,.t it i xp**t »»/>/■**<>/<< du*y,
it may be fyll:.w?d ?y t>.c prcff^nt or prr^cut poritct ;'?..«, "Yuu
nhnuKi study, iliRt y..a TRdj/bcoom-j lo>lfll^^l "
ilOO. Tae SadLoativJ pr-^tf t is fri'^uwutly xxft'-n af ?.r f o wtrd,--«<l«>«,
</7i, le/yrf. (1$ *'v,Tftos, (ly'/e/", f» oxpr^si tho <i'.uire,iitEo uf a furure
ftotion ; ft?,..*' Whoa he come?, Iq fi dl be ?vo'.coUi«.'' V/hon beforo the
pr«*«nt porfcc-l indicative, thcyvlen-.ta tbe o -Tf ploripn of a future an-.
tion ot ©vent: a>, '-'Hc: wi'l nsror be bettor ti,li h.'ihaf W.t the pan»a
tjf pfsTcrty,'"
K.
154 ENGLISH GRAJIMAB.
601. A rerb in the infiaiiirj mood must be in the ;>re»enf Vns^.when
It expresses what is a^utemptjrarif ip point of time ^^itb its govcraing
verb, or unUfq'Knt to it: 35, '' lle'appelifed f • A-^ a man of letters. "—
"The apa-tlefl were dtiterruined t'j prench the goov''^ ". H»;uoe T«rb»
denotiftg hope, dzxirf, ii.fett u>n, or command, Jnuet b« foUowetl br fba
P'-eKrnt iufiuitke, ftod not tb« ptrffrt.
fiftj. "But th^ porfert tnfiiiitiv* mupt bo used to cM»rc8S wha' }i» ">».
rt ffrf^Mf to the fime <'f the iJov«rDiiig v*rl»; hf. " KoruuJus li« jJHivHo
fiuvfJ^Hiihfl Home."
EXERCISES TO BE CORTIECTED
(594.) Tl»e "ix^tor f^aid t^iat fevrr always pnHUooil thirst. --
The philosopher ttiid tliat heal alwnys pspanfied inotalj*. He
Knid that truth wafi immuLib'e.
(595 ) 1 knotv the family mare than tweniy vearjs. I am ir»w.
at f^chool six months. My brother was sick four week-*, and i«'
110 better. He tells lioslono; enoiij:;h. Thoy oontinne with nW
noTv three d'lys.
(oOIk) He has lately lo^t nn only <^on. He has ]»r>en formerly.,^
very disorderly. I hav*' been in Lrvndon last year, anil seen iIip
king li^st J'ummer. 1 have once, or twice told the story to our
friend before he went away. He ha.s dona it bofoie yesterday.
Some one has lon«r a^^o t«dd the samo story.
(507.) I should bo obliged to him if hcwill gratify me in that
particular. Ye will fiot come to me, that yo toi«i;h( have lif<\ —
Vm v;\>c and good, that ytai mi^^ht be happy. Ho was tuld his
danger, that he may shun it.
(503.) We had h. pod that Lord Xu-eat would have been
able to collect much new rtnd interesting: informati(»n. Tolunj-
l)us hoped that he >vould have rendered the natives friT)U!ary
to the crown of Spain. We expected that ihey would have
come to-day. We tru<^tcd that it had^been_^?fe who should have
redeemed Israel.
(599.) He should study dili'j;eiiLly ihtU he might, become
lefti'ned. We should rest»ect those per.?ons, because ttiey oiftVt- ''
linued long attached to i>*. . . .
PARSING — ADVERBS. 155
' " r
[600 ] We shall welcome him \vhf*n he shall arrive. As soon
as be shall return we vill vecomnioncc our «t«{Jio». A prison-
er is not accMunte-l guilty till he he convicted.
[GDI. 3 t^'riHn the litl le CJtnvorsation I had wiib him. heap- ..
peared to have hrcn a m.»n nf le:nnin^. Our friends intended tOi^
have met n^^. Up m ns iirrtiid lie would l::ive died. j
|'6<'2.] Kirfita!! Aldif-y, ikjw in ruin«, :ipjioar55]to be an o:*ton-i *
sive huiidinu;. r.)'Ctii;;iis,i he, Spar-tan lawgiver, is said to h© "
h<irn in ihe n'twe iiundred and tucuty-sixth year before Christ. .^
(.iUl-STlONS.
R^-pfiat rule IT. Uow cm {ii-^ (.-oirt'Ct ten-e be ascrrtalued ? — , .-,
Whxl oi)?erv:iMO'i is. mn'le on liu' use of the present? Tht^ prf?ent.
perfe-.-i ? The :uiKili»ii i«'s si'ta/i, wi'l, oco.? l)i'jK-ndt'nt clau.'^es ?-^ '
Shovlf-'infiienA of m/t/hf ? 'f l<e pre.-^er.t alter n-lan, till, kr.. ? Wh'en^
mnsx the infinilMe present be U£cd? ihe iutinitivc perfect ? '•
rON-TRfTTIOX OF ADVERBS.
603, Hl'L'^. XViW.^A'JrfrU UKulhij VKllBS, AD.JilC-
TiVRS un>1 •■//A r .Altvf;i'.r>s ; :is. ^' ,}i]\n sjhnks (lUfivrt/j/ ; "■
»>)4. Aff"** adv^irb> .•<( uiclimes modify a<;/'.i.< or ;>ro/JOJni>^ Mi ^
'S'otn}ili!iioiieii.\>\\n\\c iru)n£n also, were prese^^ '^'^1, ^
f-f:>z I. A' briuo; H ti od
Sii'Kfi.vi.fiuie.^ an :..:•.■... •^•Mi-'O' rt. prcpofitio". ^^^ Fonictimos -
^Ch!). Til Lri 1 —/(/'■(:///,>• i^h- iCdnot in nacd as <i(fject\ves^ '
»i 7 Tua 3'^'®'^^ hence, thtikCc, uhciicr^ meaciug yVo«< //</« place
/■'i'u-n thit/*'''^^"^ / om whUh pht e, uroperly should not have^row b©-
^
15(J ENGLISH Gr.AMJfAIl.
0 8. After verT)S firm'-tion the ji'lrQibs 7i//'/cr. thUKnr, Klitlnsr, ure
jjoT used only in 8'>leti n ptyl*. In otdinarv flis"!. U'?^, "hrre, there^
8r<l fcA«re. nr- 11 « ri in- t<'a"l of <}ieni ; as, 'MVc came here." " Taej
waUel th'-re." " ]7/jc;e rikl ho.go*'
C 9 ir/ic/e -hou d uo b ', u.'cd f">r i» trhich. crc^rt t^c rtfor'nco Is
to place T us, •■• They friiCTe-? a protest.aion, irAere [in uhich] ibcy
r»:peaifd their fonn^'r o'ulias "
filO The a Ivo'b* iioin, tho, icVn, ichcre. in pu-'b vbrase? BS tVl nfnt,
til tlietifSitice whev. to wh re & ; , nre snmoiin-.cs used by •.O'^d wr.lerB
as nouns. This, how<ivrr i^vac io prose, acd should not bo jmita*
ttd. Jn poetry- ic'is moo corcinon.
Oil. Of this ' a i-a<ilei' aro t^o exp-c-sions rrf <^ncc. f-'r from Jitn^e,
Ac, bu* t'^e^M an nuw established iai.om.«, mil m paroing are regard'
od ai on"" w>rd.
61.'. Ti.e:''}, nrip r'y an aWar^ tf Vi'?-, *h ohii unl ai aa i3!:r>-
dnctory oX l-'tlve; /.a, " T/icre cvmo to the beaob."'
C13. KuLs 2 — Ttfo vrjnf'ces nrc cqivv^lf-nf fo an nflr*
ed ; as '•[c:inuot drink n^j ['/??;.] moR^," t-r, '-lean drink
no nioro "
ft'4 One nc|;:atir<5 is rom'-t'ir!'-? m-non'od w*tb nn'-tbcr iTplicd in
tbe ne^'tiv^ ir(fi.v dU,nn im. in, il! ir &o.; af, "Tboii a't tint «no«-
tjiiainted with his werits," t:iat U, "'Yiu are acquiintod," Ac. In this
■w»y apb'a-^ipg variety v)f exproesion is S'^racti'ne': produced. Butth*
•word ^rtiy wifi the noga+ivo ^rcso-vee the nogatiun; ae, *^ wasnot
cn?i/ llibe.al but ccvotous."
615. Th** adi't-rbs na>/, no. ynn, ya, of pti stand a'or!0 .1^ a Tippntico
or «ffi-matirea .«^vr., ,,»:. qirst!Mo:«s, "I? hf>a^. hom>?*' '=rcV —
"He 18 a- h...„..." Amer^u an a3.-iiiaii.vo alvcrb, <quiv.Ucnt to •' i?«
l7 •o, ' O', "M'tyt't be HO."
f.lfi X.., bef .re a n-Rn, 53 nn n Vf,Vg ; a^ «.V.> man" "n^fore an
»d.jj.-.ti<r'nrn,h'erSinf..,oonn.ira.ivb^,j,^ c.it i. an ndverh ; aP,
«Awa;^er." -^'. «..„«.•' I, all otW t^, tbc proper negative
rosTTio:;.
C17 PiULn C — .4 Zi'.^-^.'f rrr\fr, fie m-isf pnrl p^acci l^.
/orecpdjechvs; tificr a verb U t.'ie simple /arm, and a/t^r
tTNTllflC— XE*N^5i. 157
I
the first auxiliary In tliekomponnd form ; as, '' He is very
attentive, behaves iic/l find is much esteemed"
C18. This rule appli^s^enerally to acljuuot phrases as well as
to adverbs. / ,
6i9. Never, o/(«:i, <^'^ hj^, eomttirrts, geiierully preecde tb« rerb.—
Not, with the participl/or in&uitivt', ehculi gectraUy be y-Uccd b».
fure it. /
?ra The improper Ir.sitlon of the alrerb ont^ often oeoasioas am-
biguS y. This wiii giorallj be aroM'^d whea it r.fers (o a eeiitcao^*
or c'ausp, by placiuait at the b gipniDg of tfcat rettetce t«rclau?«;
nh8D itrecrs to a Ffl^icate, by {iaoi-igit lefore tUe preUicating
term ; and when it rfera to a fubje<.t, hy placing it after it^ r.ftme or
descriptiofl ; as, "Gn\( B'^kaowicdge thine iniqai-y." "Tho tbought.*?
o( bia heart are cnJy efil.' ' Tahc notb'Bg for your journey^but your
etd£fo/»'y." These olpervatioDg ^i 1 generally be applicable to the
wori^ meetly, solelj, ^i^'/y, ^rsf, at h^af, aoJ p^rhap^* to a few oth-
ers.
621. lu prose, to, t)^-6i.;i of the inSnit're, shou'J never be B^pftrv-
tei by plaoiog an ad"«irb imaiedi.itciy afisr it.
C?2 The adrerb tf/»4'.?7\ is o^m aoa!y p'aced after ih9 »lject4r«
which itmodiSeB; as,l' A hoiHelurgo enough fur all.''
623. Ever is Bometiiea ituproperly used for nether. Tbup, " Aik me
ever 60 much," ehoul(^e, "x\Bk ojc nrvtr $o much"-— that i* bo leach
as never before.
EXERilSES TO BE COERZCTED.
Ab aAverbj are iuieclhablc, m'stakcs aro liable to be male ehiefly
ia their p-^giti jd, or in Mmg as a-iver'is worJ? that are in>t s"", or i&
ueing adverbs where oth*- wordf< .arc required- Correct the ©rroni itt
the foll'owiug >-- i
006. They hoped for i soon and procporous isguc to the war.
The then emperor was ibtcd lor his evuoUy. He ^'hk befriend*
; ftd by the then reigningjukc^ ^"»^"^"^'^s graceiully. He»poke
■V eloquent. She did il^^'i'^ well. Our frie.nds arrived Pafclr.
' The boat move- -^^- »^v.i expressions sou ndod lijirshly. She
is a re--*^'*^'' P'^^'^ S''^' '^'-^ ^*^t ^^'^?V^l and I prPf.j n^^t
_ **ii down.
'158 EXGLISH GRAMMAR.
■^^ ■" , '- ■ . "-Z^i * "..4
[GOT ] He departed from thence inb a dcpert place. T will
send thee far from hence to the Gentie*. Fiom hence 1 awa^^r^
[608 i Where art thou gene ' Andhesnid unto me. ' Qomt^
up here." The city is near, oh ! K-'i mr ctoape there, n'berr
I a>rt, there ye cannot come \ -'•^•' ""'' •''*'^' ^'* "^
fOOf>.] He drew i«p a petition, where lie represented h\«! own
TnVrit. The coiidifioii where I found hi<u v^s deploniMe'. He^
went to London last year, sin^re whon I hav5 not seen Itim.
[C13. 1 I can do no more. He will never be no laller. H»-- •
did not say nothing at all. Neither he nor »o one else can do. f
that. I have received no infjrnjatittn on tte subject, neither' »
from hint nor froui hiy friend. 1 nov-T (lid r«p<^nt ftr 'doin^ *
good, nor shall not now. I can not >»'i> towrte lidrcifrc^ ''f^ortt-"*
)ng never can justity ingratitude. Hi' Ko*kInd ae t<i tell tne"
whether he will do it or no.
[017] We should not be ovor<;onrr'>tall\by present evt^ntij, -^
"'.Ve always should prrf»r ourdu^y to .a>r pleiHurc it is inipviwi-*
pibJe coniinu;illy to l^c at. work. Not only tiefoimd her employ*
ed. bof pk-asod ar.tl Ii-um'^uiI al.«*o In i\io poper difp»N*ition'oi>»
adverbs, the ear yiroi'uily reijaircs »o l. ; cvksuIumI ii« ac!l a>
the sense They Keenied to \h\ nearly dr«>.<^rd alike. The brttik*^
Chtri5<ea is soon expect. 'd to set ^ail. I \^ iMcd tnat trnf. on*
would hang !»ie a hundred times. > x'i *
(<>18.) riio w«Mnen . o.)utri!)u?cd all ih«r ring-; and j.•w^!8"'*
voimt.irily, to as.~i.st tlie ;::^«»veinnient. !lt<!ef<rminod to invite
back the kin^;. an\l to eall t«i;j:;('r]ier hi.s 'riet'dsl llavini^ nul
known or havin;; not o.-nsidered th-.' inoa>-'vos nrnpus^ed. he fail-
ed of PUCCess,
[6121*.]. Tlu'isin can (Uilv be op p used to >oi yrlje;.<iii. Hy greai.-.,,,
nc^-ip, I do not only m.'a'i tlio bulk o' any.-'inij^h,' object, but th«. ,
dihtiucin^^jt of t!i«' whoK. viow. Only yai have 1 known «»f all
the nations oCiho e.ii-th. In p:oni(>tir»«the public j;ood. wc«»r»-
ly di.sohurge our/au..>. M.. ,,nlv rcad'Mio book, ml two. ). e
u vly. read the book but r\A the letter, y« j.^^ | tiie b"ok only
batdid not keep it. He chiefly ppyfce oT vu- ^^^^ ^^. ^^^^.^ J.
H^only reads English, not F»'^n"f»- ' ^
syntax-7-conjuxcti6ns. 169
[621.] Scholars 8Hou1^1Se*taugnvfo careTullj scrutinize tne"*"
sentiments advant^ed in all the books thev r«ad. "To make t^iirf
scnterioe perftpieuous, it \irould l>e neeesi^.jfy to entuelj remod'eV^
it.
QUESTIONP.
^^bat i^ tlie r;iio for alverbs'' Do thr'y ever modify nottns*''-^
What othet pait^ <-tApVecli do they someiini^s Tiko«iify ? May ad- ♦
verbs be used as a/ij.;ciivi!S V WIih* is ^'av] o\ heucc-. ihcvc.^ &c, ? .^
^^'l^en are hUhrr, !h'!f,tr, kc, iisod •'.' Wbut is ^fli<l ol ichcif? What.
Dt'iill nou\ kv.'f Wluttort^vo nip^atives ? What 13 nu implied
iK'g;Uiv<^ ? W1):vt ,'tre «/?// f/o, f7m*«, •&f. ? W'liat is ?u>7 Wtint is
ttmriile of poftitio;* ' VVIihi ii the ruif» tor oiiiui' Wbnl is 9rti«i
CONSTRUCTjOX OF < •< )X.I rxOTIOXS.
624. Rule XfX -• ('■.v/it-irn'> up conncrf woni',<i or se>-
TF:Nrb;P.
■'>2'). N^'nj-vN nl'du' s,"»tM' ciUM-;, tin viu'j; a siniili»r rphilion to
anorhor to wliifli tlu-y lirl(.»i!%;. aw runneolcd hy a fonjiiiu'tiitn.
Thus -
t. N«»iin'fi or p'tin<.\i''.'fi : afi, **J>intf:s and .h-lu jvihI / are-hcre.'*
2. Adjecfivef : a?. "A {•nuLnf. Junvr, f\\\\ llmtoroli'c !n;t)i."
■A. Verbs: o^, *• t'jvo'r 'ir.v,. and «'(»• ;hk\ r-<ii((i:''i--'<l.''
I. Aiivt-rbs. ot- ii-ivc.-h.s aiid ft Ijunrl.-* ; ;i!». •' fie w»n flio prir-^ /V»fr-
/.'/ nivj fir, II I, ml I •J."' or, "f'tnlt/ ho<1 »'•»>/( A*/;. ., "
ft. rr«^pr)>.itioi)f* ; a.^ *• 7'.» nr^d /c.^i t Hfl '•ity"— " T;- nn.l ./nc/i the
hill •'
fi2ti. \'^erbi! conncfted :j;\v/! (h : . .uae ir.miii;i ;ive : '-.Jiuiics /ffii/K
an I MTiVeW.""' " •■■-''
027. N'iiinf'ir pT*)noun'? ciinni'rted ia -tlift uarrtinativc cose, either
}>« su'jjpct^ f^v dc^criptivf: itr-* rel:ii*»-d a.s !»jnh t) th/» .'?tQi«,yer\> } as,
"./.».'. n and ./«;«r* are c )u^ins." ' H ■» i» a •/.■'/m /.'<"/i and s./,o/ i;.."
t}-8, Noun.<< or pronuutis CO rn'c^ed in the possessive caso arag^ov--
ened by tbe same ni>uo : aa, ••Juun'v and ,/.j///r'« Imoiv."
6iy. NoviDS orproaouaa, conneoted in the objoctire ease, are gov-
ertied by the eaTne verb or p?eposi'/ioa; as, "He studies grammar a.ni
lo^ic." "Give the books to h{}i% and ?n«."
ft30. AVbcn uAminatirefl belon? fo fliffofeot i^crbs, or verbg to dif-
ferent noaaiotttives, the conjunct-oa crnntcts the seutecces, not t^je
word«; as, **Joht, reads and Jamee tcriie^.'*
631. Simple eentences or clauses arc connected by conjun«.
tions^ so Qd to form one compouod sentence j vm. ' JBaiA that ye
me Goc/s'.- but ijr ah all Oicy
ftSa. SioiiUr sentencef, whether defoauoiit or indcpcalen*, are cob-
iv««'od bj the ooTijuuctioHS h-n.d, o^, nor, hut, y^t, ^n.
633. CoBJanetioae are frequentlv uudaratooii bitw«ea the w.^tde or
8*uter-oeB eoitaocted ; us, "Caesar €Of?;e, ««fr, and «c7>^»«e''x.'V "Th*
•.s*#h, f«>o.'T?€>»^ and fJiH(h-«it^ were precect.'
SPECIAL RULES.
634. RuLa.- — Oorijuncticm connect the same moods and
tenses of verbs^ and cases oj ii.oun^ or pronouns ; as, *'i?o
g^od and s^c/ispcace/^—** Honor thyjather s'nd7nothcr.'*
635. Verbs of fhe eame mood aad tenj^, under this rule, are geH'
©rallf ale > la the sa-nti.^ form ; "He readi 'XuAtcrifei." (ttot tloes writ4 I.
636, When verbe cofinecLel ara not of the j-ame Diood, tfiise^ o*
•form, a»d eppLcial^y if contraet or opposit'oa, txpres-jied by bvti,
though, f/'cf, is intended, the nominative is repeated; ae, ''He caioa
but h-e would not stay."
6»)7. After expressions imply iag fZowy ',/««*■, or denial, (he ooDJuua-
tion thnt is properly osed—not lest bu(, hu( t\(H ; a^, ' i do not, doubt
t*mt he is hunest"— "I am afraM that ho will die." Also, ahut should.
Tjot be used in tV« t U«e of t?,rt.*. 'Th-^e, 'H^ will not bt?l'evo but uhm
V am to blame," shouid b»i. "but that i uua to bluUie.
GB8. lllTLK 2. — Certain worot'. m the (tntcvuhnt memb'-t.
tif a sen(euc€f require vorrcifponding connectives in the ^ubr
itrqufnt onf ; thus —
1. In clauses oiword,^ simply Ov^tunected —
Il>-h requirea oftti; as, "i?(ifA he an? I i-ain*-. ■
U'th-^r '- or : n.s, * EitJirrha or I whl come."
JftUher • t,(,r ,• ft)*, " Scith'^r tie n / I cftmfl,"
[__ Xyh^th^r- f,r : as, " Whcthf:r h© f-r I «ft!a«."
ytf.i ac^'Tiioa^^lie ilay mc, y t will. I trust in
-» h^ifaho,- E% ''iVof oiV ^^ ^^ «?«o hit broth-
er goes."
2. In c^aa?e8 <j' onr etcd 80 as t> imjly eompsrJsoc^-
fbc romparnHr^ d'gr^^ requires r' <>.'/ ; ap, "He iB^#^^#> ♦/*/^ftif « "^
OfXe," require? if^'^n; a?, " It ii no ot}^er than h*." '
i'/gf — — -- . fi^fln; ag, ''^ li.if tUi do yon expect t^tn Itis.''
A» .=-!».... o« (expressing fqualitj?) ; tkf, "He is e« tall « I
am "
Af' '—- M (• xt-rcseiDg equftUtT; ; 6f, "yie ibj doy ♦#« «
etall iby Btrenglh bti." .
P': — • A* (wiih a nygatirc, cxp-esting iti^quality) ; «*,
"Jlrt is not »© learned «• hie ferotber."
3'j *h/it (elpresslng ccnfe^ucnoe) ; ftf, "He is •© Irwifc
^^«i be can not walk."
5'?.'e,^ — <r« (fiprcBsirg tim'larity); a#, "Fe or r'f'fj^ «» be.'^'
630. In scntentce implying compflripon, there is eommonly
an clipBis in the Fccond member, ofier u'lan and 'at; "My pun-
ishment is greater ihf^n [that i* u-Inc'i) I can bear."
d40. A relative flfjer than input in tbe objtctire enie; tf, ' PtUft.
than H.hoin uone higher eat " This ftnoni&ly haw not, lecn fatiKfae-
torily expUiiied, In this case, flomo regard thou ae • prepo8i»ioB.
641. RtLE 8. — When a lulsfqucnt chv9e or part of a
genfencets com'*non to two cHjJc^cut hut couvccted anfccedtnf
^lavseSj %t must he cq^iQUj/ ajjplicah'e to hoth ; ftp, ''Thai
work always hns been, and always v.ill be, (lamirtd**
—"He isns Iftll, though Doteo handBome, m hit brofh^
f>43. When thiJ ruleia vijiatou, tie crrcctioii Is m,'A>\f, cjtli«r—
1. By altering one of the nstccoJeni c RUres, so that the 9ttl>>>e<iicni
may bo RppUcabl© to bcih. Tziup, ""^he etory has and will be be*
lUved," i« Bot correct, because, though w« cgu eay, nili h* t«'<'tV»W,
fre.can not Bay, Acs he believed. It ahouldte, "The «tarj h** Uten,
ikftd will be., beiieyed." or— .
^ ;«. Jf ^i« ««n »ot b© d?ac, we may complete the constiootiooof Uie
tatt part by ennesiujf its Appropriate subscquont, a&d le^re ihe^f^b,--
It^uect of the le^ocd vcderetooi. TJiUS, • Se wai ttor* be'^-.ttd, but,
1-62 ENGLISH .GRAMMAR.
Bftt sn ranrh a^tn-rod as Tyntbio," i? nof crrpct, because w8 nttsa^,
"'Br« iray more heloA-e*! »9 C^atbin." It sbauM bo -^^He wipttjoreb*-
)*>V:d thxn C^ntbi >, but not bo muob aliui-di "
FXFRrjSE.S TO nr r;i>RlA«;f TED.
^Jnith** f Hawing s^rifeucoa p«vint out the '.'07jjii;i,ctioq'^, Ibe w^ a or
ii->nte>ic p connected Uy them — se wix^tber tbe^ jcorresp'HjdpedyTditig
t ' iV»« rul^fi, «.ofl -f n't f rre t an* j.''v3 a re iPfrP t«'r the cban^fif.
> '-f*><4 )t-ila reaL^ aid vvrjio, well. Atij;<M^' }rU4c»3 ir>iH the
V.jp.iRt «;f a.wist^ n»:n, lujt wili ro<l (inly lii the '."■'•('Hi wf fo«>N.
U he fi1id('rsiriii!l rfip. 4io>>jcct irrl Ml tends lo it. he can ^ciVeflv
fiil alhuccem. t/u>ylM2 lto;ilth iintl tu \\\ p. in peaco are trre-a t
hU;8'<ings.^^^jlt|'^aw>ry fmx)i)^.'i .U' .yV'j[\»V'"i^ !<'<»«■ '»'«^lge than ab<ait
to h\\u\% it . . ■.,».. ?4- ■
\'ot» and rnft !tre pT'^at fj-if-:i«ls Thij.. i>a ^iv.hU mat-fcr be
twet'n jou and i. My f.uhfT and liini arc rery in'imate ''^tje
is^ti^ller than rne , but. i am i.Ki< r than hitn.
(645 ) He reads a^d wriSfMli uril. IJe toads and does^wH^f
wf.ll He icij,:is and in vMvt'n.i^ vvod Hne-s he not rca^.Hinrl
wr;toft vrell ? Did h-j («>!. lell ihef l»i» fuijU, and euheattd ,h«e
to forgive him ? F.-irth has her MdliudeSj and so ]\hh lifo,; ,
(017.) 1 do iK.t deny bal ho U.'.8 ujurit. dhoy \\vv<i ^4*yii''l
)est vou would I'O off'ui'^d. AVo wove sjpprehenMvo kat s,«.nit'
acciclent ha<i hapPiMicJ to iiiivi. \Vc oan no! deny hut whaf hp
\va*s ilt-trt'.'it'-d.. Wc'can not dou'.t hat w>ia( hi> is wrll t '(•{»*
n.trs^fr t.iiii whalMi^ Is^Vfdl
' t^j'f!* IV^ tt*isV^i\h!*-t*'r^M- f.r h..r. It -is >«> ci.-ar r. « I -n.f«-.f!
not cxphiin it. 'Jho rriisiim.x an' so uiM.'itain, a?! that U. (•;*'■'*♦•
•juii't! mmdi vxan)ina; t;in. 'i h*- '.m.: i^ iqually (K'.x'J'n lu^g iifj »)ip
tdiuT. r «mi«it h«; jju I'ai.dld l<Mini» ihut I huv? h<«-'u niiiifa^fn.
He vv(.»uld not do it h.iniselt" noi- lo' ni<' du it. Ho wa.-^ rt't.rfn'gi-y
nh-hi' «v!uhl not speak., ^'o as i h y days so .-)h»H ihy .-itreiigth fa*.
'rht>u;;h.ho f?hiy mo to wdl I tiusi in hiiil. HfliBuet gorliiniself
or sond his torvani. 'I horo is no contntlon so secure fts can r.6t
admit vf change. He in not ns eniinont and fio muoh PHteerfied
I SYNTAX — iKTERo^ECTION. 163
(648-2.) He Ims little rnoro of thf echolar besides the name.
Be I'parJy to sacof)r suc'i p^'Wof^s who need thy as«i>~tarice. —
Jficy hj.i«l jio siopnorrrscii ht»t thf'V anpiu-d thcnisplvcs to iheir
Phillies. ' 'f fiOJ^^ ^avH'^t' pnoph; -iet^urfMl to huvo no ether clemen
i>!if vfiir'. Buch ujpf i!i:>t :icUhMc'i«rw»isly mi*ht to heavnid'-
p.I. He i^aiBC"! noihijij; funhtnby IjJH 5pei.'C-i, b;it ol''^v t»» l^
<!->rn!ii;jnfleit for hi^ td<»4.'i<;ii<je.- . 'I'lii--^ re-Hv>ne vfl»ifiv>>|j>,!il '•^'J^-^'i!^
(651.) I ah^ays !iavo and j ;i]'.vnj9 (shtill hn of this rtpinicn.
MeHs liotder bur riot so w.iie al bis en.-npariinn, Siu-JOiity '* hm
vtilnable and even more so tluin knowiedgi?. Tbfi.r inle»>ii<-tis
Ml ij;ht and probably wcr^' r'nuA TIip revv.ird has already <t
Mill hereafter be -^iven tu liiiu. .\V11J j{ i>o^ ingcd ibivrdu^^o
I' ' )ks arc Ks ul.i-or evo;'» older than tradifioo Pbis l)o«jk xa
preferably jind etioap^TThan ibe other, lie t.i«r.^ no er.re fuT
mtero.vt in the nt itrf^r; '■ -' "
Wiiat i? the rul? tor coMj!i(if;tion.g ? Wh it iM\y ho ronnecto_d?
What, if verbg tir6 ro:\neoteU'? ■S'ni-A? flri*! pr-dilonns ? If thn nom-
iiiRfives heU)usf*to d-mereut varbs V How Hfc rompoii-vd sewtenees
f'ormvd? Aie ciinjaii-.tiions uudtr.-tood ? Whuf is the rule tor
niouds iiiid lousfi? W i.iL id ruMiit l)ji; vys-liK ot the Siiiu- loriu 1'
Wliea mUiil the nomiuative T)o iVpenled ? ^Vhen is that projieriy
usi'd? Uope.it Ihe e<>rre.-pondiuj[2: eonJHuelit)i)8. WhiU oevuis in
^^nStoeftri of vonip;i"'i>ijn y AVh:V. wFit'ii a ebtnsx; h corhmon fiy'rwo
ditforent p;»rfpi ot jt sentence? ito^v can «Ti«»rs ii' 'I if tx- o«rr»«ti.
.<i4'>.. Ul'LiK XX. — /.•i,icrjecu'>jiis.hfifc n> <jrii/JiniafH-4,.il ccm-
tir.ri.on With the other wor(fs \ii a stii<r:rr(.
(')44. After interjocti«..n-, prouovins ot the tirs»t person :)rc coni-
!*nif)irfly in thie o)))ectivo ea«o; iho^o ct {he second, in the wOfHi"
: mihe ; as, "Ah roe !^'— " 0 thoti I" « ' '
164 ENGLISH (GRAMMAR*
645. /7i evejy senUnce^ flie tifords emphjj^f^t (tnd th$ orifi
in zphich ilt^^ 'are arranged, sho%-2d he such, ng clearly/ . (ftnd
properly fo express the uha intended ; and ai ^he tame tini«
ull the parts nfthe ientmc^ fJiouId correspond, and a r$^
far and dependent constrmfion hs preserved throughoiit.
64e. Among Ibe <5ylls to be gnarded ftfaiost flB(l«r \\« g<?iiet»! rtil«
sre tbe foHowiog ;-—
1. the use of ^rords whIeTi do Bolcoi-fCGf-y or properly ftrta«'ey Ibt
iJea iofe*ide<?, or tvbieh convey «n<;«/i.er with equal propriatjr
3. Tbe avrft&gement of trords and elatiscg in ?n?b r vay, that theh
rejatioa to ofehet T^ords aiid ^lattfics is dottbtful, or djfficult te
he perooiVtsd.
3. The separating of adjuhotg frv-^m t^eir prm'ipale, and I'lae-lag
ihcm 60 that fbey may ho joieed ;o ^ords bi which tb*y do Eot
hclong.
4. The sepa-aUeg CL^telailte ci2U*«3 Improperly TTcaa tfatlr ftBtte«-
dents.
5. IJfiing injudioiouely, or Uo fr©<jQ©atly, the third pertefiat •! !>•♦-
rcpive pronoun,, e^ipcipially la indirect dlfr«ou.r»ft.
£IX1:RQIS£S. '_.^'
The following »6ateiiod6 aro not gramm .t;citll,y iaoowect, but frwni
some of th© causes mentionod above,, a.ro ohivurt,intitigant, anirtffiton$,
fit nHintfUigihle. Let the pupil point oat the error aud eorrect it. fend
give a reftson for the oorrectioiu
Tho son said to his fjither that he had '^inncMlaj^fau.st Heaven,
A fsirmcr wentioa hiwyor, and t-olJ him timt his bull hfiUo:or©4
h{» ox. The Greeks fearing to be surrounded on nW -^ides wheel*
ed v'ibout find hidiPil with the river on their b-iek.'^, Nor was
PhilHpTwftntinj!; to corrupt Deraosthenea, as he had most of the
ieadinji; men of (Ireece. ' Parmenio hnd served, with ^reai lid"?]-
it?, Fhillip the f.ither of Alexander, as'woU a* himself, for
whom hefirat opened the way inU> Asia. . Belisovius M-aiJ.gen*
ftral of all the forces under Jasti-nian the Pirsi, a tnatj ofrw^
t«loi'. Lvsiss pro.mifte4 Uii f*th»r i3©T«r.tc ahAftdf^n l»i* frleprt*
Carthage was demolished to the ground »o that ^TC are anablt
to say where it stood; at this daj. Thus ended tha war \rith
A Btioohus, twelve years oftor the second Punic war, and two
after it had begun. Claudius v;as canonized among the ^od€,
who scarcely deseiVGd the nar/ie of a man. He was nt a win-
'low jn Litchfield-, where a party of the roynli^ts had fnnifie^i
th**^ selves, luking tv view of tho cathedral.
ELLIPSIS
Heaptctiog tbe use of tliis flguiw notbitg wore Jvfinil* cau he \aH
JtuvD lliJiB wtiat H eotitHi'.ed in tbe following.
J5 VEf.'I A L RULES'
[ 047. IxiLi: 1 — *d *'£?/'}>£ '«, «?• omaaion a/ uofxh, is ad-
mifsaht^ when thrf/ can he tnipvh'cd hy the mind with suek
a^taintj/ and rc^d.iness atvot to ohscure th*t i'^}sf.
64S. HuLB 2. — All tllipsis i« not aUowalU^wken xtaoM
. 0t*»eur6 the iGiitencf^, weakot ii^ force, nr be attended with
«H iinpropricti/ ; a$. 'W« 9pealc Ibat we do know," fot
that whkh^ &c. •
eJ0. Articles, proncaea sni prciositi'»DP, should aiwaya be re^ttat-
»\ T»be« the words with which they staad eonneotedareusad emph^t
ical y. Under sucb cli'.UDastaucos, even nouns, adjectlree, and rerba,
mast often be repected ! as^ " ot oiilj the year, but ths day aud th*
bour were appointed.''
650. It is gcnerilly Improper, except in poetry, to omit the aatd-
e«dent to areUtive : aad it i» alv.iys go, to omit a r«latiT0 wbes i% is
in the fiumvuatire.
EAEECTSK6 TO SE er>BBF.OTE©.
Iti the ioDowing sentenci^a. omit 9ueb word-d as arc j)»t aeo6g9aE>/
t« the eenee ;—
Cicero wps an eloquent man, an able man, a generous aiafi,
aad he was truly a pauiolie U3an, Avarice and onDoiog may
gain an estate, hut avarice aiid cunning can not gain friends. I
6 » ENQtiSH (JKAiitAR
166\
tFrcp •■' • -. ' .♦: ;■ .3«
vwierntti hini, IjOM'cot liim, I lo.vo him, on iio.nunt. ot "his vlr^
tuc's -. ^.^ ,_ . ;;
H«j !);i» nn aEfjctiunate ))rpllier and jin affoctiona-'ft sistpj-.^
Cenuhie virt«i«.' supposes our be)u-vi»h«j.ro to \te stfcnj^theuod
rindto b*.' oo'^tfirnVc'. i>y |'nnc»{>:t\ Ppi-s;'V(*r('nce in lnu<i;ib^e
piii^Kijils will r.'w.iV'l .'.11 fiur f"IL<. unl will pt'o<liu:(i c^ffi'6'..M )>o
y»»n<! 0;il<M)l:5tioM. W'l;' cfUMi ronimfnd imprMilcritly. ns well :«h
«^i.>!i'^ii>-<» iinpiii'lf'tiily. (.'!i:ni<r:-?! !ivi« nlm-i^t Cinistun' ly tiikin^f
li!;i«*f in Mii'M and in isMunfr.s. in (^niui'"!^ nm] i:iou-t»ims, in ini-
rate Curtiino-! !inJ lo i)ji|i1io .oo.n.hjcL lie i-* toinjiprnlf, *l<' is
(lisjiiterpsl'f'l, he is bonovolent. llf> irgavtls tlie truln, Vmt tlioii
(Ji»«t not r(';>:!U'<i it. W'e t^iR'^c-eiliMl, biUtlipy diil not siu'OPcd.
la the f -llowiii-r scT^tenee'', supply t^u w ordu 5iui'r<.jierly ciiii'tcd,
all. I srarc »vliv tbi?y sioul I ba rjsfo.al : —
\V(> iirri nirnjMi'y inciiir'l t.o pr.ii<:^ \v")o. pr.iiso n-i, im;! I a
tiiiti.'i- wlio llittor u-<. Who be^s^■ «.v»u sisfVin"" be:>t «:jn »ln. A
beaufiru! a;arJori and tn;"S woro ?^f)l'i. Ills honor. iJifori-^f, re-
ligion, vvero ill! nn>.b:ivki'd in this irid.^r^akinji;. IMr.l^y days and
tM'en npi^ks pass awn y nniroprov^ d. ! iu- ('apa'irt lunl sovotm I
men di-'d in his shjp. I !i.< con>lni't i« lutt .« oandiklin^ ?♦,'••,« nd l-hat*
is ihe \)"st r.an be- -lid ofiL. '! hoy i>r.i <y*a tVvic e-Vrwt.lfution aai.
laW8. 'i'hat i-t a pi'i();M'i y M»o-=t >n;-n have., oral, lya'^it. may a-t*
t:»in.' . Thi:-; prop'.-'rty hn.s or uiil hi sold Y.<u 9ni>pr)se biai
V?iunge!' than I. It ro«i!iirps T-.v tnl.-^nt"' t-vwhioh most men a'e
not' horn. Vi-'abvii'^t hiiy not iJCi.i'iit'o. He rn ly be said to buvo
Mayp^l, the lii"'*^ of' u tn^/.;^a. and consoqaently,p,ntit1o I Vo t,1i<^ fp-
vv)|r4.,. '1 hi' ii:'Opi.'^^or t!ii.so.njjU.lcy..|iQH<eit:'»A bea.liby ell^uafy find
suil. I have purehaspd a houri.j arid ori>lnird. A noh!/3 .spirit
di.sdiir»L!th the malice oi turJui-.i; ; his gieatness of u.ul is not to
be cast down. - .<
QIK/TDNS.
Whnt is tlie rale tor inftMJf^-'iions? Wiiat lor proti*)ari«! of tli«
first person ? What ia the -ieueral rult^ for constraciioii ? What,
are the five evil? to be avoidfii? Wjint is ellipsis ? Whatai th«
rules? Tbs rules for nouasaud pronouns ? For thec'uiiiparativ©"
•■"*.' *.':&!* tf ■ if ***: ' :*^ .5r> •••'^ :? c ";•"■■ -' '1^*"^ ♦"^T
i^jC;?rce? FortA'^a.or mur;! adjeclirea? An jpidjective'rin.l ai^icle/'^
A verb with t'ijo Gonv\ imMs'e" ? S.veril cU-trses hnriifio: the Sitrof'
)) eilit";itf* ■? Tiie ver*) '-/o '>^''' For (>r>f»rry"? The seconri clrtii^^e
II ',H 3«nfp;iJ;».' Alver')r.' "I'ft>[t > ill ions'' Oonjuodion ? loiiir-
nV\.E^ OK SYNTAX.
R»'t,ii 1.— Siiijsl.intivos *]on(Ming the sauu- ]>cr.-*ciij or
ih lii^ Hjree in case.
Pau.sir. — I. An fi 'j.>.-!.ivo or ]):n"ti('i]!l(> liii.'ilifi ■* •; be
' suSs'iinllve to \^ Uich it l)eli)nL!;s.
t 2. A<ljo(*ti\'os (li'Motinir (Hit, quality noifn^* in llic Mu
li! tie plil'lll.
k • .
f lil"LE III.— 1. 1 he article d ov .m \n pit hek)re coift-
li. on nouns in tlie .sihi^ular number, when used /^.cft;/^
-. TliO ai {\'e ^7*r is put hofiijc eonnnon noun^j citiicr
iif) j:ui:1!' orplui-a', when ii-icd iU-ji nit I ;j.
liVL^ IV. — Piuii uns agree witli the.n/Huis fuiv* l*iL«.^hjr
tlit.y .stand in i!;endf'r, number, and per-rau^ v ^ , »r
Rile V. — Tlie relative agrees with ilfl anleeedeut >u
number and person.
BUL": Vf. — The ;<u]>jeet of a linitc \cib i.'i put in tli^
nomi'ativc.
Rlle All. — A substajitivij \n hcjse case ciepWds on. no
Other word IS piit in. the nominative. .^ ' :
KtTLE Till. —A verb agrees trith ite tio-^itts^ivo In
number au<i p^r:oi:. . ,•,..,'/
Rule. IX — Tbo descriptiro noun after a verb ia.p^-
in tbe Bamc ca^o as the subject befon} it.
KuLt X. — :V trane^itivc vorb in the artiv*-^ vciro .j;.rv-
erns tbo objective case.
Hulk XI.*-A pi'^iv^silior! irovorn^tbi' nhjoctivc «M!so.
Hulk XIT. — Certain words nnd ]->br.]>^t!8 ^bi»u!d bd
followed by np})ro])riatcprepo:>iiiou?.
KVLE XIII.— One subetantivo '^(,vcr\\^ .inoiber i«
t.ho poBsessivc, Mbcn tbo b-iKor inuhstantjvo bmit** tLd
ftignificatioi) of the fbiinor.
KuLE XIV — Tbo subjur.ctivo mood is itf.^.) In d.t|>©n- '
dent clauses, \rhon liolb oontin}.^onc\» or .!ri«il.i, ui»d
fqtHrit}', are expressed. .^
Jivht, XV.— Tbo Inianitivc mood ia governed by tcf'j,
ic-QUHS, or ttdj^ctioes, •
Kci.K XVL— Paniciples bavc the cotistructiou of
B0U118, adjeiitive!^, and verba.
Rule XVII.— In the use of verbs, and wordd ihat .
in point of time relata to each other, the order of timo
m'ust b© observed.
RuL^XVlIL— Adverbs raodify verls, aJJ& tices, and
otber adverbs.
EtJLS XlX-^Conjooctlotis connect uorJs or itruiin-
RutE XX. — Interjactiona have no gramsi'^atieal con-
nexion with the oth«r words in a uQutenQo.
*!£? ilcI^i'ZS 911
SQfNmX — PARSlmj. ^ - ^»9*i
In every senteiiRe, tb€f."V\^cird^ em ployed, ar.d the or-
der in wliich tlie}^ are arranged, slioukl be suc^ as
clearly and properly, tq oxpress tlie idea intended ^and^
at the same tioic> all the parts of a scntciK-e should
correspond, and a regular aad-depfJ4i4^nfecftn^f;u§itiou
-be preserved tkroughout. • . '<f;Ji imIa! ^ &^\ X .io
EuLTi: 1. — An ellipsis or omission of words, id admis-
sible, when they can be supplied b}^ the mind witli^STich
tiertainty and readiness as not to obscure the sense; as^
"Wo walked by fait'j, not by sight."
Rule 2, — An ellipsis is not allowable when it worald
obscure the sentence, weaken its force, or be attended
With an impropriety.
SYNTACTIQj^L PARSIIi^q^^ ^„ " ^_^ '
651. Syntactical p.»rsing inciudcB eff/rnoUgih'piJj «nd
:adds to it a statement of the relation in which Wordii
stand to each othcr^ and the rules accprdin^., to :. which
they are combined in phrases and sentenc<is.
Before parsin-; the following examples, l©t them b« corre««-
•cd in all cases g;iving the role violated or requiring thecbange^
V then analyze them thoroughly (403 &c.), and then parse thtai
i fully, applying and repeating the rules of syntax,
1. — 1. Too great a variety oF studies perplex and w«ikentli»
jadgment. 2. I called to see you, but you was not at hoin«,—
3. To act with caution, but with steadiness, and vigor, distin-
guish the manly character. 4. The crown of virtu« i» peac«
• and honor. 5. In the hamarr. species, the influence of instinci*
* and habit are generally assigfed by the suggestions of rea«#n.
' C. The train of our ideas are often interrupted. 7. They wero
both unfortunate, but neither of th.cm were to blam§.
2.— 1. VVe arrivfd safely at our journey's «nd. 2. TliEi il»
waiter of no consequence between you and 1. 3. This ihoiild
I «t happen between such friands as him and me. 4. Them
.8
1T# BN^LISH GRAMMAR.
that seek knowledge will find it. 5. Such aro the men whom,
wo might suppose, know better. 6. Our welfare and secnri:/
oonsists in unit/. 7. The love of virtue, and derotion to pleas-
ure, is opposed to each other. 8. No oppressor and no tyrant
triumph there. 9. Eyery le-^f, every twig, every drop of water,
teem with life. 10. AH the world is spectators of your conduct.
3. — 1. Nothing is more lovelier than virtue. 2 His associ-
ates in wickedness will not fail to mark the alterationof his con-
«lact. 3. He is taller than me, but I am stronger than hfm. —
4. Neither riches or beauty furnish solid peace and contentment.
r>. The abuse of mercies ripen us for judgments. G. John, WiK
)iam, and Henry's hats, were stolen 7. A man's manners fre-
r,aently influence his fortune, S. Much depends on this rule
I'oing observed. 9. Such will ever be the effect of youth asso-
ciating with vicious companions, 10. Give to every one their
Hue. 11. It has been fully shown that neither of them are cor-
rect. 12. Every bone, every muscle, every part of man, are
tknown to Him which made him.
4. — 1. He writes tolerable well. 2. Three monihs' notice
are required to be given previous to a pwpiTs leaving of the
sohool. 3. That rose smells sweetly. 4. He employed acoth-
rr friend of his father to assert his claim — (whose claim 1) 5.
'A soul inspired with the. love of truth will keep all his powers
iiitentive tothe pursuit of it. C. It is remarkable his continual
endeavors to serve us. 7. It is the duty of every one to. becare-
iu! of their reputation. 8. Whatever antiquities he could pro-
.cure, he purchased them at any price, 9, I am not so well a»
Avhen you was here. 10. It is three days yesterday, since you
Have promised that money. 11. This mode of expression has
l)cen formerly in use. 12. He promised long ago, that he had
1.1 'ended to that matter. e3. He was expected to have arrived
earlier.
5. — 1. Twice threeare six. 2. Six times three are eighteen.
3. As two are to four, so are six to twelve. 4. Five are the
half of ten. 5. The half of ten are five. G. Nine are not an
even number. 7. One man and one boy is sufficient. 8. Two
boys is equal to one man. 9. Two boys ore less than t r^f—
SYNTAX— PABfliiNO* 171
iViixe arc better Uian nothing.: ,.10. Two i^ better than onc.--
il. Two are an even number — three are rot. 12. Two are
twice one, 13, Two^and*two makes four. 14. Throe fourths
are more than one Iiaif. 15. Five n-.en is too many for such a
j)ieoe of work— 'three is too few. IG. Thre« shot was fired with-
out effect. 17. Thefieet consisted of six sails. 18. A drove of
forty heads of catthi passed along.
6.— 1. Molasses are thicker than water. 2. The mcaslcsare
spreading throup;h the <;ountry. 3. Wheat is Ix^ing sold for a
dallar a bushel, and oats is in demand. 4. "fh-e newg by the
iast arrival is better than we expected. 5. We hoped to have
*'-'heard from you before this. G. Do yon not think he writes
^good "? 7. The wind blows coldly from th<! nwth. and tlie snow
lies deeply on tlio ground. 8. James is as tall if not taller than
'1 am. . 9. lie never has and he never will do so well. 10. Ho
"Whoever said so was mistaken. 11. There are a heroic inno-
cence as well as a heroic -courage. 12. He puts down the migh-
ty and exalteth the humble. 13, Piety toward God, os well
as sobriety and virtue, are necessary to happiness.
7. — 1. Tak« care who you admit into your friendsl)ip. 2. I
ifilways understood it to be ho, whom they said wrote that book.
3. If 1 was him. I v.-ould take more care for the future. 4.
; There is two or three of us who have been at Europe last year.
5. We were in Havre when ihe revolution broke out in France.
C. 1 have been to Bost<;n for a few days, and spent the time
very pleasant. 7. That is the man and the horse which wc
met before. 8. George was the most enterprising young man
whom I ever knew. 9. All who were piresent were pleased
with the entertainment.
, 8.— 1. This excellent person w\as fully resigned either to
have lived or to have died. 2. Between be and I there is somo
disparity of years, but none between he and she. 3, To bo
moderate in our views, and proceeding temperately fnthe pur^
suit of ihem, is'ihc best way lo insure success, 4, Enjoying
health, and to live in peace, are great blessings. 5. Which
dictionary u/iyou -prefer, Webster or Walker? 7. Thoughthis
IKfi ENGfLISr GRAMMAR.
6vent te strange, it certainly did happen. 7 If he docs but con-
sider the subject, he uill no doubt change his opinion .8. Igno*'
ranee is the mother ot fear, as tvell as admiration. 0. Let him
he whom he may, I can not \fart for him. 10. Wo have no
need for his assistance. II. Among every class of people, self-
interest prevails.
9.— 1. Many have profited from the mislortunes of othe'rs.—
Many ridicul&as customs have been brought in use during the
)inndred last years. 3- Is there no pe?st)n who you can send
• 1 rl. at business 1 4. Little attention to business is necessary,
^•«);l wou-ld succeed. 5. Truth is a virtue to vt'hich we should
>.;iy littTe regard. 6. Without firmness, nolhing that is great
e^n be undertaken ; that is hazardous, accomplished. 7. That
is property most men have, or at least may attain. 6. The
pyramids of Egjpt stood more than three thousand ycar»«. 9.
It is thought they have been built by the Egyptian kings. 10
When the nation complain, the rulers should listen to their
Tojce. 11. Whom say the people that I am "^
10. --1. They that honor ine, I will honor. 2. He only got
the muney for a few days. 3. He was mistaken evidently in his
calculations. 4. No man is fit for free conversation, for the in-
quiry after truth, if be be exceedingly reserved, if he he haugh-
ty and proud of his knowledge : if he be positive and dogmatic*
al in his opinions; if he be one who always affects to outshine
all the company ; if he be fretful and peevish ; if ho affect wit,
and IS full of puns, or quirks, or quibbles. 5. A good end does
not vrarrant the using bad means. 6, A good end does not war-
rant using of bad means. 7. Humility neither seeks the last
place, or the last word. 8. Either wealth or power may ' rain
their possessor. 9. Avoid lightness and frivolity; it is allied to
lolly 10. Do you know who you are talking to? 11, Atfc
thou the man who hast dared to insult me *? 12, Oh that the
winter was gone.
11.— 1. We are often disappointed of things which, before
possession, promised much enjoyment. 2. We can fully con-
fide on no one but the truly good. 3. You may rely in that.—
4. The Saxons reduced the greater part ofBritain to their poi^
f ^
PUNCTUATION. 173
er. 5, He was accused with acting unfairly, nt least in a man-
ner ill adapted <or conciliating regard. 6. If there was better
oaanagement, there would be greater eccurity. 7. The ship
Panama is early expected from Canton in the spring. 8. Every
year, every day, ev<jry honr, bring their change. 9. Whom
say ye that f am ?
12. — 1. Many a youth have ruined their prospects for life by
one imprudent step 2 N<j power wii-s ever yet intru'sted lo
man without a liability to tibuse. S. A conceited fool is more
abominable than all fooK 4. My gravity never did no one any
harm. 5 A constant display of graces are fatigueing to a so-
ber mind. G, These coins of compliments and flattery circulate
everywhere in society: the true is of gold, the base is of brass*
7 Expectation and reality makes up the sum <;ot4il of life. 8.
Music, the love of it, and the practice of ib, seems to pervade nil
creation. 9. All soils are not adapted for cultivation 10. The
vain abhors tlie vain. 11. The author dreads the critic ; the
miser dreads th« thief, the criminal dreads the judge, the horse
<lreads the whip, and iho lamb dreads the wolf — all after their
kind. 13. The intellectual and moral censor both have thesacne
ends in view.
13. — 1. 1 was engaged fcwiaaerly in that business, but I never
«hall be again concerned in it. 2. We do those things fre*»
quently which wo repent of afterward. 3. Not to exas; erate
him, I only spoke a few words. 4. Shall you attain success
without that preparation, and escape dangers without that pre-
caution which is required of others?.
PUNCTUATION".
652. Punctuation treats of the points and marks
now used in writing.
(553. The use of these points is to mark the division of asenteii«e
in 'order to show the meaning more clearly, and to serve as ag.uide
in iiua pauses and inflecticns required in readiug.
174 ENGLISH ORAMMAK.
654, The pvincipftlrtiarks used far this'ptJt^ose are ttic' folio win jr,
the comma (,), iha s(m'.colcn (•), the eoJen {'.), Xha pdriod { .), th»
note of inierroffdd'cn ( ? ), the note ofcxtlawiftfioti { ! ), the da^h ■ (— )
the parenthesis ( ), the hrOcItets [ ].
655- With respect to the length of the pauses indicated by these
marks, no very definite rule can be given — the same point iueer-
tain kinds ofcomposition, and in certain poaittons, requiring some-
times a longer and sometimes a shorter pause.
G{)0. As a general rule, tlie co^lma marks the shortest pause ^
the semicolon, a pause double that of the comma ;. the .colon, a
pause double that of the semicolon f and the period, a pause still
loBger than that of the colon.
Kemauk. The system of punctuation uowused in English, is com-
mon to neatly all the modern languages, and also to the be§t editions
•f Latin and Greek. The chief design is to m^rk the divisions and
clauses ©f a sentence, and indicate their relations both of scnee and
of construction. Without a knowledge of the system, it is impossi
ble either fi>r the writer to eonvey his own meaning with certainty,
"♦y'for the reader accurately to comprehend what iS written by anoth
' ■■'. A goad knowledge of punctuation is absolutely essoctial in trana-i
1 .ting Latin and Greek-
COMMA.
657. KuLE 1. — In a s-lio:t, simple piopositiou tlie comm,a is
not used.
When the subject or a transitive or descriptive predicate i^ fol
lowed by an adjunct, the adjunct should be separated by commas.
NoTK. When a short adjunct follows the subject, only one comma is
used, and that is placed before the verb.
EXERCISES.
The Lord is good to his people. The young often ruin
themselves. Tho way of the transgressor is hard. The
punishment of the reckless disturher of ?03iety tends to se-
cure peace. The want of some pursuit to occupy rpw time
is often productive (;-f lasting evil. The inte'mix'ivc oi
^' 'Tt/NOttTATlON. 175
fcvil into^Qcietv' seems to exercise the noblest virtues oflhe
suul. A steely and undivided attention to one purttiit
commonly gives success. Indifference to the ordinary pur-
suits of life is indicative of a defective judgment. The voice
of reason and mercy prevailed over strong passion and re-
venge. The belief that God is merciful affords us relief in
time of distress and trouble. Propriety of conduct and un-
divided allention to your profession will make you popular
and esteemed. The son and daughter of the emigrant per-
isfied in the conflagration.
C58, — RuLB 2. In compound sentences, the clauses amd
members aro usually separated by coniDftas : but when tbo
clauses are short the comma is not used.
Dependent propositions, usually introduced by if^ though, izeeft^
tcAm,&c. must be separated by commas. \ »^>^
EXAMPLES. "'•TT
We som'itimes forget our faults wlien we are not remind-
ed of them. Virtue^supports in adversity and moderates
in prosperity. Your patron though he might have had large
possessions was poor and in gicat want. The principlei
that had been instilled in his mind in boyhood influenced the
whole conduct of his life. Revelation teaches us how. we
may attain happiness both here and hereafter. Love, not
*^', *leep lesfc you come td poverty. ?^ensuality cent aminatei the
body depresses the understanding deadens the moral feel-
ings and degrades man from hisrank in cieaticn. The path
« \of piety and virlue pursued with a firm and constant spirit
^oewilllead to honor. James would have gone with yqu.to
fcsT.the fair if you had iuvited him.
G59. — Rule 3. Two words of the »ame class, connected
by a conjunction expressed^, do not admit a comma between
jjyg them. Wi!ei;i t^e coTij unction is not expressed, a comma
^is inseirted,,^ ^^ ^^^^ . ; ' , '
<^IT5 ENGLISH ORAMMAJt.
r^ NoTx. If the coBnected words hava adjuncts, a comma may be in-
, isfted. Two w«rds making a compound name do not ta^e a comma'
EXAMPLES.
6).'..
-0 A man of integrity and honor may be trusted. The great
: 41<J oak has fallen. Long and doubtful was the conflict.
-i.A mind of great acculene^s and a heart of the noblest impul-
A $es were conspicuous in Henry Clay. Lend lend your wings
- J mount I fly. Sir Waller Scott copied his scenes from na-
ture. Victory in life triumph in death are visions of faith,
ij.f 660, — Rule 4. More than two words of the tame class
f; connected by conjunctions exj^ressed or understood, have a
comma after each ; but when the words connected are^ad-
jective.% the last^should not be separated from its noun.
631. KuLE 5. Words used in pairs,take a comma after each
pa'F.
''" IXAMPLEi.'
•-' 'Industry honesty and temperance are consideied cardi-
nal virtues* Wilt thou love honor serve and keep her?—
o -She is neither handsome talented nor agreet'.ble. Truth \%
''■ hit and artless simple and secure uniform and consistent. —
^he old and the young the grave and the gay the rich and
f the poor are alike ohjects of Divine mercy, That lady is
-I .ol>«autiful modest unaffected and lovely. Ihat large florid
d > ^mpous man is a tyrant.
^ 662, — RuLB 6. Nouns in apposition are separated by a
fomma, when the latter noun has words or adjuncts connect-
«d irith iti but a simple noun in apposition is not separated
by a comma.
663. — EiLn 7. The ncntinative independent, and the
nominative absolute, with the M-eMs dependent otithem,are
cparatcd by commas from the rest of the sentence.
I'uNCTu ATioir . 177
^Q^. — KuL-E 8.. Comparative and antithetical clause: !":•>
separated by commas
EXAMPLES,
Herscbel th« greatest astronomer of bis time discovcredi
Uranus. Paul the apostle sufiered martyrdom. Ilen-ry
bring me some water. Continue my son to w^lk in I be path
of Virtue. I remain sir your obedient lervant. Sbame be-
i'lg lost ruin is inevitable. Deft ated and forsaken Le abJJ-
catcdtbe throne. The Lord the preserver of his people is
graci'^us to all. My son give mc thy heart. Youth wasted
middle age will be miscrbale. Though deep j-^t clear tbougk
gentle yet not dull.
665. — KuirE 9. Adverbs, adverbial plirascs, and conjuunc'
tions used as adverbs, wlien they modify a whole clause and
not any particular word, and especially at the beginning of
a sentence, should be separated by commas; \iz., nai/, so,
hence, again ^ secondly^ moreover^ consequently^ hoicever, in-
deed, d^'C.
CG6. — Rule 10. A relative with its cl use should be separa*
ted from the rest of the sentence.
667. — Rule 11. That, used as a conjunction, and prece*
ded by another clause, has a comma before it.
Examples.
i proceed thirdly to give my reasons. I saw tlie man who
did me that great favor. He came to town that he might
meet his friend. Such undoubtedly is my inteniion. The
trees which he planted are dead. Well do that and I am
content. Attend first to your du'y that you may be entitled
to pleasiire. Moreover the dogs came and licked his sores.
I said so consequently I must abide the issue. The m; n wh©
made that application is sometimes in great d;str©<s
17S EHQLISil GRAxMMAK.
668. — Eui.E 12. When a verb is understood, a coniitfa
must be inserted.
.669. — UuLE lo. Words repaated arc separated by a com
ma.
^;70 — KuLB 14 Invented leniences generally require a
coiivimato separate the part inverted.
G7l. — EuLE 15. A short expression in the manner of a.>
fj^uotation is separated by commas ; also the words my, re-
ply and similar expressions, introducing a quotation or re-
mark, arv». separated by commas.
EXAMPi-LS,
Ypu succeed by flattery ] I by meiit. Holy holy holy is-
the Lord Almighty. Yerily vt rily I say unto you. Ta
avoid his debts he left the country. T^e book of nature;
said he is open before thee. In the midst of ihe debate he
replied that the hour had come. Homer leads us by power
Virgil by attraction. In hope of victory I prepare.
()T2. — EuLE 16. Adjectives^ participles, adverbs, infini-
tives, conjunctions, and prepositions with their cases, when-
separated from the w'ord on which they depend, or when ac-
companied by several explanatory Avards, must, uith the
words dependant upon them, be separated from the rest of
the sentence by commas.
673. — EuLE 17. VV hen a sentence or an infinitive is the
subject of the verb, and the verb stands after it, the verb
must have a comma b' fore it.
674. — EuLE 18, When the subject of the verb consists of
many words, a comma should be placed before the. verb.
675. — EuLE 19. Except dates, figures consisting of four
or more characters, must have a comma before eve-y three
from the end.
i^Ui^CTUATlON. 1^9
676. Rule 20. When no rule applies, the Gomnia must nofe
* be used.
EXAMPLES.
A man desirous of military fame will generally aot brave*
ly, Murat with all his military grdatnesi was fond of gau-
dy dress- To win her esteem is the object of my life. —
Length of days success in life a'.id glorious peace are the
jfruits of virtue. To save my countiy 1 would give and dare
all. The old man leaning serenely upon his staff seemed"
happy in his poverty. I saw the senator but in a room so
crowded I could not approach him. The population of Chi-
na is 148897000 ; Corea 8463000. The old general gate
all his vast wealth to his grand-soa.
QUESW[ON«.
What is the rule for a 8im{>l© proposition? For a compound
proposition? For dependent propositions ? Two or more words
of the sacie class? When are words of the same class ? Thtralc
for- words in pairs ? What is meant by pairs? The rule fertieUDB
in apposition? The nominative independent? Absolute ? How
will you know when nouns arc independent, absolute ©r In appo-
sition ? The rule for antithetical clauses ? Make such a tlaiit.
The rule tor adverbs, conjunctions, &c. ? When is a eonjunctiaa
nsed adverbially? The rule for the relative? What if the rela*
tive is compound ? The rule for that ? The rule whem the verk i*
understood ? For w«rds repeated ? The rule for inverted seBt««-
ces? Make such a sentence. Tfee rule for quotations, &e.? Gi^
tke rule for adjeetives, participles, &c., and naake a sentenetfor
each, shewing the application. When a sentence or infiailir»ic
the|8ubject? Give an example of each. The rule for figurei ?-i^
What is the chief use of pnnctuation ? What languagea h&T« Xh^
game system?
SEMICOLON. '
677. The aemicolon is used to saparate the parts of a sentience
ISO ENGLISH GILLMJlAb.
which are l(ss closely connected than those which are separated bjr
a eomma, and more closclj than those which are separated bj the
ettlon.
GENERAL RULE.
Th« parts of a sentence sjeparated by the semicolon, shouU
f^ntainin themselves a complete and independent proposition, but
•till having a connexion with the other parts.
SPECIAL RULES.
♦78. Rule 1. — When the first division ofa sentence contains a coDi-
pi«t«ptopositIoY», but is followed by a clause added a9 an inferone*
•r reason, or to give some explanation^ the part t'lus added mast be
separated by a semieolon; as, "Perform your duty faithfully; f©r
tkii will procure you tho blessing of Heaven."
$f9. RuL* 2. — When several short sentences, complete in tkem-
selrei, but having a slight oonnexion in idea, follow in] suoeessioB,
iJk»j should be separated by a semioolon ; as, "Ike epic peem recites
tk« exploits of a hero ; tragedy represents a disastrous event; com-
edy ridionles the vices and follies of mankind ; pastoral poetry de-
««ribe8 rmral life; and ele^y displays the tender emetions fcif tbo»
keart.'
$99. Bulb 8 — When a sentence consists of several members, ao4
thweBiembers are complex, and subdivided by eomas, the larger dlr
ritieas of the sentenoe are gometlmea separated by a semicolon; a^
** As the de«ire of approbation, whan it werks according to reason,
improres the amiab'o part of our species in every thing that is lau-
d»kl«; 8<» nothing is more destructive to them, when it is governed
Vf ramiiy and folly."
Ml. EuLE 4. — When a generkl term has several others, as partie-
vlftTS, in apposition under it, the general term is separated from th«
partiealars by a semicolon, and the particulars, from each ether by
••mmas ; an, '^ Adjectire pronouns are divided into four classes j
pvisessive, demonstrative, distributive, and iadefinite." Bi^t if the
word namely be introduced, the separation is made by a comma only.
COLON.
682. The colon is used to divide a sentence in two or more parts,
less connected than those which are separated by a semicolon but
Bfi^j^independent as to require a period.
Punctuation. 1^1
SPECIAL RULES.
683. Rule 1 — A c^lon is used when a seutence is complete in it-
ielf, in both sense and construction, but is followed by eome addi-
tional remark or illustration, depending upon it in sense, though not
in Syntax; as, "A brute arrives at a point of perfection that he can
never pass : in a few yoars he hasall the endowments of which he is
bftpable."
684. Rule 2. — When several short sentences follow in EuccestioDi
each containing a complete fensq in itself, but all having a common
dependence on somt enhscqueyit clause; these sentences are separated
from the subsequent clause by a colon, and from each other by a
ifemicolcn ; as, " That Nature is unlimited in her operations; that
ehe h 1.8 inexhaubtible resources in reserve ; that knowledge will al-
ways be progressive; and that all future generations will continue to
make discoveries : these are among the assertions of philosophers.'*
•85. Rule 3. — Either a colon or semicolon may be used when ail
example, a quotation, or a speech, is introduced; as, " Always re-
member this ancient maxim; 'Know thyself/" — "The Scriptures
give us an amiable representation of the Deity in these words : *Qod
Is loVe/ **
686. Rule 4. — The insertion or omission of a conjunction before
the concluding member of a sentence, frequently determines the use
of the colon or semicolon. When the conjunction is not expreesed
befere the concluding member which would otherwise be separated
by a semicolon, the colon is used ; but when the conjunction is ex-
prafised, the semicolon; as, "Apply jourself to learning: it will
redout d to your honor." — " Apply yourself to learning; for it will
redound to your honor."
PERIOD.
68?. Sentences which ate complete in sense, and not connected
in either meaning or grammatical construction, are separated by a
period; thus, •' I^ear God. Honor the king. Have charity toward
ail men."
688. But when short sentences are connected in meaning, but not
in construction, they are sepaTated by a semicol»n.
689. Long sentences, if com])lote, even though grammatically coa-
nfectcd by conjunctions, often insert a period ; thus, " He wke
lifts up himself to the notice and observation of the world, is, of all
men, the least likely to avoid censure. F«r b« draws upon bisrs*!! a
thousand fyes, th^it will narrowly inspect bim .• every part."
iSi ENGLtSU GRAMMAR.
690. A period uiust bo used at the end of all books, chapter*, let-
lions, Ac; aUo after all abbreviations; as, A D , M. A, Art. II»,
Obs. 3., J. Smith, Ac.
INTERUOOATION.
C91. A question is regar^led as a complete sentence, and the otark
of ia'er'-ogatJon as ciual to a period.
692. The interrogation is always put at the end of Adrect question}
as, *' What is truth ?" But the indirect question do*s not require the
interrogation ; as, " Pilate inquired what is truth.'*
OTHER CHARACTERS USED IN WRITING;
693. lihe Dash ( — ) is used where the sentence breaVs off abruptly |
also^ to denote a significant pause— ah uue:^pected turn in the senil-
tnSnt — or that the first clause is common to all the reet, as in thif
definition.
694. The Exolamation (1) is used after expressions of sadden emo-
tion of any kind; also, in invocations or addresses; as, ** Eternity I
thou pl'asing, dreadful thought" Ok has the mark immediately
after it, or aft^r the next word ; as, " Oh ! that he Would come." Bat
when 0 is used, the point is placed t fter some intervening words j
as, "0 njy friends!"
695. Parentheses ( ) include a clause insertsd in the body of a ien»
tence, in order to convey some itseful or necessary information or re-
mark, but which may be omitted without ii^juring the construction of
the sentence ; »s, " Know ye not, brethren (for I speak to them that
know the law,) bow that the law hath domi .ion over a man as long
as he liveth." In reading, the parenthetic part is distinguished by
a lower or altered tone of voice.
The use of parentheses should be avoided as much as possiWe ^jj^l
696. Brackets [] are properly used to enclose a word or phrase in*
tCTpolatcd tor the purpose of explanation, correction, or supplying a
deficiency in a sentence quoted or regarded as such, f nd which did
not belong to th« original cotnpcsition ; thus, It is said, '* The wiieat
men [and, it mijht be added, the bast too] are not exempt from hu-
man fraiUy."
697. The Apostrophe (') is used When a letter ot letters are omiUed J
as, e'tr for ever, tho' for though; or to mark the possessive caio.
698. Q lotatton marks (* ") are put at tho boginaing and en4 of .a
passage qaotei from an author ia his own worde> or to aark a pal-
age regarded as a quotation.
I
ftlKcTUATlOX. 18^
^99. Tao Hiji^hen (-) is used to connect eompound words which afd
h.f>i permanent compounds, as, lap-dog; aloo at the end of a line to
shotv that the rest of the word tot completed, is at the beginning of
the next lino.
700. Section (^) is used to divide a discourno or chapter into por-
tions.
701 Paragraph (^) w^iS fo-uierly use i t-^ denote the beginning cf a
new parn>rrapb.
70 . The 2?race ( — -— >) is used to conneefc T^ords whi)h have one
comm'U term, "rtlirce lines in poetry h-ving the same rhyme, called
a Ir'ph't.
703. EUpxis ( ) is ust d wLeu soiu^ lettc-ra s'.ro otfiiUcd ; ag
K g for King.. Soveral aster'sks Ae somctimeB us'/d for tho same
purpose; a:? . A''**^/
704. The Card (A) is usod 'o show that some word is either omit-"
ted or interlined.
705. The Index {^^'^) is used to point out anything remarkable.
7P6. The vowel-marks are: Th-^ Diceresia (..) oa the last of t\^o
concurrent vowels, showing that they aru not to bo pronounced as a
d3pth'-»n|?; the Acute acc-rM {') ; the Grave {') ; the Long sound (-)
the Short soan<l (").
707. The marrs of refere-^co arc : The A^terink (*) ; the Obelisk ; or
Dagger {-f) ; the Doubcl Dagger {%) ; the Parallels {\). Sometimes*,-
aU-o, the § and ^i- Als », sma 1 letters or figu:es whicli refer t» notes
at th« foot of !he page.
QUESTIONS.
What is tl e U33 of the 'Semicolon ? What is the general rule ?
How many sj^^Jial rules.' Recite each of them ? Make an exam-
ple for each rule. For what is the Colon used .' Give each of the
rules. Make an example for each. When is the period used ?
Give the rules. Give the rules for the use of Ihe Interrogation.
The Dash. The Exclama'ion. Parentheses. Brackets. Apostro-
phe. Quotation marks. The hyphen. The Section. The para-
graph. The I3race. Ellipsis. The Caret. The Index. Name the
marks of reff rence.
184 ENOWSn GRAi^mAlt.
PART IV.
TROSODY.
^08. Prosody treats of the laws ot versiiication. I'he udag'^
of grammarians is very irregular, as to what things ought to be
embraced under this head. We sliall limit it to versificatrdn.
709. A Verse is a certain number of accented and unaccented
syllables, constituting a line of poelry.
710. A Couplet or Distech consists of two lines. A Triplet con-
sists of three lines rhyming together.
711. A Stanza is a combination of several vcrses, variable in
number, making a regular division of a poem or song. .
712. Rhyme is similarity of sound between the last syllables of
different verses.
713. Blank Verse is poetry that does not rhynie.
714. Feet aie regular portions into which a verse is divided,
each feet having two or more syllables.
Every accented syllable is long, and evory unaccented syllable
is short. Monosyllables, when alCne, are regarded as without ac-
cent, and may generally be long or short at the option of the poet.
715. Metre OR Measurb is the arranjrement of a certain nVim-
ber of specified feet in a verse, and certain verses in a stanza.
When a verse is complete it is called Acatalcctic ; when deficient, it
is Calaleclic; when it has more than the proper quantity, it is Hi/' .
percaleciic,
716. A verse of one foot, is called monojneter ; of two, dimeter ; of
three, trimeter; of four, tetrameter; of ^vt, pentameter ; of six, Aex-
ameter ; 'Of seven, heptamcter.
717. Scanning is dividing a verse into the feet of which it is
composed.
718. All feet in poetry are reducible to eight kinds ; fouv ot two
syllables, and four ot three.
719. A Trachae has tho first syllable accented, and the last unaC-
oeutdd, as, nolle, music.
720 Ah Iambus has the first syllable unaccented, and the last ac^
'cented j as, adore, defend.
721, A Spondee has both the words or syllables accented,- as, vain
mmn.
722. A P^rtKie has both the wcrds c* syllables unaoeented; as, "wt
PROSODY. I'Sf)
723. Ji Dactyl has tha first syllable acoentad, aui the list two ub-
aaceoted ; as, virtuous.
724. An Amphibrach has the first and the last syllable unacoented,
and the midd'e one accented ; as, contentment.
725. An Anapoest has the two first syllables unaccented, and the last
accented ; as, intercede.
726. A Tr ih raah ha.3 all its syllables unaccounied; as, num—era-
lle.
727. Of all these, the principal are the lamhns. Trochee, Anapszeat,
and Dactyl. The other four feet are used chiefly in connection with
these, in order to give variety to the measure.
728. A verse is usually named from the name of the foot which
predominates in it, thus. Iambic, Trochaic, iC',.
1. IAMBIC VERSES.
729. An inambic verse consist? of iambuses, and consequently has
the accent on the second, fonrth, sixth, &c., syllable. It has diffier-
eut metres, as follows :
1. One foot, OV Monometer ; as — »
'Xis sweet
To meet.
2. Two feet, or Diemeter ; as —
With thee | we rise,
With thee | we reign.
t. Thre« feet, or Trimeter; as—*
In pla I ces far | or rear,
Or fa I mous or | obscaro.
4. Four feet, or Tetrameter ; as
How sleep theb'ave, who sink te rest.
By all their conn try's wish es blest
5. Five feet, or Pentameter ; as
For me your trib uta ry stores combine ;
Crea lion's heir, the world, the world is mine.
6. Six feet, or Hexameter ; as
His heart is sad, his hope is gone, his light is passed
He sits and mourns, in si lent grief, the ling' ring day
7. Seven feet, or Heptameier / thns
When all tby mer cies, 0 my God, my ris ing soul surveys.
Transported with tto view I'm lost, in won der, love and praise.
730, Each of these kinds of iambic verse may have an additional
ihort syllable, and so be called i a i}iZ»('c hi/perrheter^, thus
1. Disdain ing.
2. Upon a moun tain.
3. \Vhenon her Ma kei'd bo som, Jl«.
186 ElfGLISii GRAMMAR.
73 L It often happens that a trochee, or sr.tnetimes a spondee, is
ailmi't-d in plar'c of the first f-iot. whic>» gj'von a-p'riaelttg yariety to
the A'prse;' as '' ^ '-"'■ •!'.•!•; • •'
Planets and suns run law less thmugh the sky,
Fierce, hard y, proud in con scions free dom bold.
7.32. Itxmhic rentametcr. — Iambic ve^se of five feet is called Heroic
verse. S'uch is Miltf^n*^s "Paraclise Lost," <fec. By the admission of
tr.^chees, anapass's, &c , in certain places, it is capable of mary va-
rities.
733. Tamhic Hexameter. — A verse of sItc feet is called Alexandrine,
734-. The Elec/iac stanza consists of fyur p:;ntameter lines rhyming
alterdately • as
The cur few tolls the knell of part iug day,
The lowing herd winds sl^^wly o'er the lea;
The ploughman homeward plods his weary way,
And leaves the world tu darkness and to mc.
735. The Spenserian scatiza (which takes its name from the poet
Sj,enser) con ists ot eight pelit'Jmeter or heroic verses, followed by
one hex-meter, or r.lcxandrine verso. This is the staLza in whick
the^'Fairle Queen?," "Childo Harald," &c., are written.
TROCHAIC VERSE.
736. Trochaic verss consists of Trochees, and consequently has
the accent on the jf?r«<, third, fifth, Ac, syllables. It has different
metres.
Go whore glory waits thee ; . -'
But when fa-xe e latcs the®. ' "•
On a inouDtaiE, staetchedbe ncatb a hoary willow,
Lay a shepherd" swain, and viewed the rolling billow.
737. Each of these may take an additional long syllable, and so
hecoiae Jiypercataleciie, or Ji^2)crmeter. •' \ .
1 Restless mortals toil for nought,
Bliss in vain from earlh is sought.
2. Idle after dinner, in his clrair,
Sat a farmer, ruidy, fat and fair. -'i*od BrH
AN^PASTIC VERSE.
738. Anapcstic verse, consists chie^y oi ancepcesls, and, when pure,
has the accent on every th»rd syllable.- It has different metres.
0 ye wood? ! |- spread jour branch | es apace,
To your deep ] est recess | es I fly; _ •,
prtOcODY, 187
I would hide | rvith the beasts | of the chase,
I would van | ish from ev | ery eye •
T39. This also admits -an addition'al' syUablC: "which often has a
pleasing effect ; as — v^ ^'' "" ' •' ' '"' ' U . , -■ :*
On the warm | cheek of youih [smiles and res j es are blend | ing.
DACTYLIC VERSE.
740. Dactylic verse cons.sts chiefly of dactyls, and has many
vaaieties : —
Wearing a | way iii Lis | youthfulncss,
Loveline33, I beauty, an! ] truthfulness.
741. Each variety sometimes takes an additional long syllable,
and so becomes hypermeter.
742. A dactylic verse* seldom ends with a dactyl ; it more com-
monly adds a long syllable, sometimes a trochee, aa in the following
lines : —
Brightest and [ best of the | sons of the [ morning,-
Dawn on our | darkness and | tend us thine | aid.
MIXED VERSES.'
^743. Scaicely any poem is perfectly regular in its feet. Iambi
verse, for example, sometimes admits other feet into the line, par
ticularly at the beginning, as has been already noticed.
744. In odes and Ij'ricr'pieCes, TetseS erf different kinds and differ-
ent metres or measures'are-often intermingled, after the manner o^
the ancient choral odes, with a pleasing effect. 'Alexander's
Feast," Collin's "Ode to the Passions,'- fee, are examples.
POETIO PAUSES.
745. Besides the usual p^usesrequired to mark the sense in read-
ing, and which may be called sentential pauses, indicated by the
punctuation, there are 'other pauses in poetic corapositicMJ, required
by, and necessary to give proper effect to, the movement of the line-
74G. These are chiefly the Final pause and the CccswraZ pause.
7 1 7. The final pause is required at the, end of -every line of poe-
try, even where there is no sentential j^ause. 'When that is the cas
it consists in a brief suspension of the voicjfe/without any change in
ts tone or pitch. When a sentential pause occurs at the end of the
188 ENGL-ISn GRAMMAR.
line, as it docs very often, it takes the place of. and supercedes the
final pause.
748. The cccsural pause is a suspension of the voice somewhere in
the line itself, for which no rule can be given, but which will always
be manifest when poetry is well read. It does not occur in very
short lines. In lines of some length, it generally occurs near the
middle ; sometimes, however, nearer the beginning, and sometimes
nearerthe end ; often in the middle *f a foot, but never in the mid-
dle of a word. Sometimes, besides this, a sort of demiconsural pause
is required, to give full effect to the expression. The following lines
furnish examples of the ccesural pause in different parts of the line,
and also of the demiccesural pause. The former is marked ("), the
latter (') :—
" The steer and lion " at one crib shall meet,
And harmless serpents" lick the pilgrim's feet."
" Warms' in the sun," refreshes' in the breeze,
Glows' in the stars," and blossoms' in the trees;
Lives' through all life," extends, through all extent,
Spreads' undivided," operates' unspent."
149. L'evoiional Hymns. — These maybe composed of any foot
but are generally iambic.
1. Long Metre. — Each stanza has four verses, and each verse hag
four iamcic feet ; hence long metre is iambic pentameter.
Let, not the wise their wisdom boast;
The mighty glory in their might :
The rich in flatt'i ing riches trust,
AVhich take their everlasting fliglit.
2. Common Metre. — h^s four verses in each stanza ; the first and
third each have four feet ; the second and fourth each have three.
Were I possessor of the earth,
And caird the stars my own,
"Without thy graces and thyself,
I were a wretch undone.
3. Short Metre. — has four verses lo the stanza ; the first, second
and fourth have three feet each, the third has four.
The men of grace have found
CJlor}'- begun below ;
Celestial fruit oh earthly ground
From faith and hope may grow
PlWSODY. 189
EXERCISES.
750. The following exercises may be used for practice in scan-
. ning, reading or transposition.
(For want of proper type, Prosody cannot be well presented. In
the next edition the subject will be amply treated )
Jesus shall reign where'er the snn
Does his successive journeys run ;
His kingdom stretch from shore to shore,
Till moons shall wax and wane no more.
Watta.
.'Tis the last rose of summer,
Left blooming alone ;
All her lovely companions
Are faded and gone ;
No flower of her kindred,
No rose-bud is nigh,
To reflect back her blushes.
Or give sigh for sigh 1
Moore.
Go, ye messengers of God I
Like the beams of morning fly,
Take the wonder-working rod,
Wave the banner-cross on high 1
Marsdeti.
Then in a nobler, sweeter song,
I'll sing thy power to save,
When this poor lisping, stammering tongue
Lies silent in the grave.
Cowj^er.
THE STAR ABOVE THE MANGER.
BY THEO. H. HILL.
One night, while lowly shepherd swains
Their fleecy charge attended,
A light bursfo'er Judeas plains.
Unutterably splendid.
Far in the dusky orient,
A star, unknown in story,
Arose to flood the firmaraeat,
Wi\h more thaa morning glory.
190 liNGLISD GRAMMAR.
The chisto.ring constellations, erst
So gloriously glcftwing.
Weaned, when its sudden s[)lendor uuist
Upon their paler beaming.
And Heaven drew nearer E4rtJti,tliat iii^'lit-
Flung wide its pearly portals—,
Sent forth from all its realms of light,
Its radient immortals-:
They hovered in the golden airi
Their goldeu censers swinging, ,
And woke the drowsy shepherds there
TFith their seraphic singiiig.
Yet Earth on this — her gala night
No jubilee was keeping ;
She lay, unconscious of the light,
In silent beauty sleeping.
No more shall brightest cherubim
And stateliest archangels
Symphonious slug such choral hymn —
Proclaim so sweet evangels i
No more appear that star at eve,
Though glimpses of its glory
Are seen by those who still believe
The shepherd's simple stury :
In Faith's clear firmament afar —
To Unbelief a stranger —
Forever glows the golden star
That Btoodabove the manger.
Go:— let the eagle chs,n£e his plumo,
The leaf its hue, the flower its bloomj
But ties around this heart were spun
That could not, would not bo undone.
The one, fantastic, light as air,
'Mid kisses ringing,
And jo>ous ringing,
Forgets to say her morning prjy^r!
Cam xihsU.
LiJf/tihit*
PKOfcODT.
11)1
And, lo ! f.-om tba heart of that far floating gloom,
Whatglramson the darkaeaj soswSnIikc aoi white?
- Lo ! aa arm and a neck, g'anc ng up from the tomb ! —
Thej battk— the JMaa's with t-e E e men t*s might,
he— it ia be f— in his left hand behold, , ° '
As a sign— as a joj i— shines tb« goblet of gold i
. :.•• • ■ - H -,,.. . Schiller.
One more .Unfortunato,
Weary of breath, 'f
ila&hlj importunate,
Gone to her death !
Talcc her up tcnderlj,
Lift her with care ; —
Fashion'd so slenderly,
Young, and so fair J
With fingers weary and worn,
With eyelids heavy and red,
A woman sat, in unwomanly rags,
Plying her needle and thread—
Sh'tch ! stitch! stitch !
In poverty, hunger and dirt
And still with a voice of dolorous pitch,
She sang the "song of the ^"hirt !"
THE FATHER'S SOLILOQUY FOR HIS
PATRIOT SONiS.
HooJ.
Hood.
FALLEN
BY DR» S. G. WARDv
Ah I I had fondly fancied, that
I'd spead the remnant of my days
Ifith my beloved sons in peace,
And share with them the rich reward
Oi all their long, long years of toil
And conflict on the the tented field
Fhen peace, with healing, balmy wings.
My bleeding conntry's wounds should close,
But God, in wisdom and in love,
For us haih otherwi-e oruained,
The last 1 ed, pfecious drop, that coursed
Tbl-ough my descendants, now hath flowed
In ra«Bae«d freedom's sacred cause
192 ENaLISH GRAMMAR.
Now, all alone, t must descend
The hill of life, without a son
To guide my weary, tottering steps.
I'd not recall them, if I could.
To fight life's dubious battle o'er,
And risk their chance for Heaven again.
IFithout a murmcr I submit
To God's all-wise and holy -will,
Tfhoge eye surveys all time and space,
Directs the currents of events.
And brings the greatest good to all.
1 dedicated them to God,
And to my country s sacred cause,
But little thought that they co soon
Jf culd fill the great commission up,
And wear the patriot martyr's crown.
1 thank m} God, that in the morn
Of their young life and hope, they both
Obeyed the Heavenly Spirit's call,
And heard their country's first appeal.
They died as heroes, not as bpies
Or traitors to their native land.
'i hey chivalrously lead the van
irhere fiercest raged the battle-storm
And death held highest carnival,
And won a nation's gratful praise.
If vandal hordes from every land
Must sweep resistless o'er these plains,
( Tfhich Heaven forbid to such a foe)
The darksome glass that hides from view
All boundlesss and eternal things,
May consolation give, to know
The "Free indeed" can never live
Poltroons, nor slaves of tyrants die.
I know not on what gory field
They sleep, I only know they're dead,
And with them is my broken heart.
I know His everlasting arms
H^ere underneath them when they fell.
For parent's heart, nor virtue's self
Could vi^ish no more, so pure in heart
And life were my brave patriot boys,
< )h ! thou Eternal God Supreme,
By Thy unerring wisdom guide
The father to his martyrd sons,
That we may rest in realms of peace.
Where war's discordant trump no more
Shall break the reign ol endless bliss.
BND.
r
1 Branson & Farrar, !
l'i:i5LlsHK!i^ AMI bK.AI.KiiS IN'
I SCHOOL HOOKS
J OF ALL KINDS,
i SHLICET MUSIC
\ FOR ClilLDKKN, I
\ STATK)NARy |
! PAII^TiN(is,PH0T06H^PHS, i
j W R 1 T I N G A N D {
SF ;>rhW^^|) BEAUTIFUL
Maps of Mortii Carolina,
kv
t^'O.,
J (]ij^- Tlie us\ia) (ieductions made to tlie !
I Trade. ^ "
) Xo. 4(L Favettcville St., Raleigli, N. C.
Vvi.-"^»-s-s>a«er